Nnrtli  (Earolina  BtnU 
llttttiFraitii 


This  book  was  presented  by 

MILTON  M.  LEONARD,  D.V.M. 

TO  THE 

VETERINARY  MEDICAL  LIBRARY 


NORTH  CAROLINA  STATE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 


llllllllll!l 

S02161422   I 


This  book  is  due  on  the  date  indicated 
below  and  is  subject  to  an  overdue 
fine  as  posted  at  the  circulation  desk. 


EXCEPTION:  Date  due  will  be 
earlier  if  this  item  is  RECALLED. 


Q^3> 


/ 


200M/09-98-981815 


h 


VETERINARY  POST- 
MORTEM TECHNIC 


BY 

WALTER  J.  CROCKER,  B.SA.,  V.M.D. 


WITH  142  ILLUSTRATIONS 


PHILADELPHIA  AND  LONDON 
J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT  COMPANY 


COPYRIGHT,    I918,    BY   J.    B.    LIPPIXCOTT   COMPANY 


Electrotyped  and  Printed  by  J.  B.  Lippincott  Company 
The  Washington  Square  Press,  Philadelphia,  U.  S.  A. 


RESPECTFULLY  DEDICATED 
TO 

KARL  F.  MEYER 

PROFESSOR  OF  TROPICAL  MEDICINE,  UNI- 
VERSITY OF  CALIFORNIA  MEDICAL  SCHOOL 
AND  THE  GEORGE  WILLIAMS  HOOPER 
FOUNDATION  FOR   MEDICAL   RESEARCH 


PREFACE 

The  scientific  study  of  pathology  without  proper  post- 
mortem technic  is  impossible.  Before  a  pathologic  lesion 
can  be  studied  it  must  be  brought  to  light.  To  avoid  the 
oversight  of  some  obscure  though  important  disease  process 
an  exact  and  painstaking  system  of  technic  must  be  de- 
veloped. Technic  is,  in  fact,  the  foundation  of  the  science 
of  pathology,  and  therefore  demands  deep  study  and  much 
actual  practice. 

This  book  is  written  in  an  endeavor  to  fill  a  gap  in  the 
American  veterinary  literature  which  has  long  been  felt  by 
the  writer  in  teaching  post-mortem  pathology.  It  is  with 
the  earnest  hope  that  it  may  help  those  who  do  make  post- 
mortem examinations,  encourage  those  who  should  but  do 
not  perform  autopsies,  and  that  it  may  facilitate  the  inclu- 
sion of  the  subject  post-mortem  pathology  in  the  curriculi 
of  other  schools  of  veterinary  medicine. 

The  illustrations  of  technical  methods  in  the  text  were 
prepared  from  original  photographs  of  fresh  specimens 
instead  of  line  drawings.  Good  photographs  more  forcibly 
portray  to  the  student  mind  the  reality  of  the  subject,  and 
establish  a  closer  personal  association  with  the  actual  work. 
They  provide  an  unexaggerated  object  for  the  student  to 
attain  to,  and  an  encouraging  stimulus  to  his  best  efforts. 

I  wish  to  express  my  appreciation  to  Doctors  Wilham 


vi  PREFACE 

Koch,  E.  A.  Benbrook,  C.  C  Whitney,  Herbert  Lienhart, 

H.  M.  Martm,  and  JNlr.  Albert  Herbert  for  their  assistance 

in  preparing  the  photographs,  and  to  Doctors  John  Reichel, 

Fred  Bourner,  and  C.  S.  Rockwell,  and  J.  B.  Lippincott 

Company  for  material  used  in  illustrating  the  technic  on 

cattle  and  hogs. 

Walter  J.  Crocker 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 
December,  1917 


CONTENTS 

IHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  General  Considerations 1 

Definition,  Complete  Autopsy,  Incomplete  Autopsy,  Object, 
Authority,  Time,  Date,  Light  and  Weather,  Place,  Clinical 
History,  Destruction  of  Animal,  Description  of  Cadaver,  Wit- 
nesses, Dress,  Care  of  Instruments,  Care  of  Hands,  Notes,  Speci- 
mens for  Laboratory  Examination,  Express  Companies'  Regula- 
tions, Mailing  and  Parcel  Post  Regulations,  Diseased  Tissues  in 
the  Mails,  Milk  or  Urine. 

II.  Autopsy  Room 1§ 

Room,  Large  Table,  Small  Table,  Instrument  Table,  Instrument 
Case,  Desk,  Tub,  Basin,  Shelves,  Water  Pipes,  Sterilizer,  Scales, 
Vise,  Platforms,  Refuse  Cans. 

III.  Post-mortem  Instruments 22 

Virchow's  Post-mortem  and  Cartilage  Knives,  Little's  Case  Knife, 
Pick's  Myelotone,  Virchow's  Brain  Knife,  Dissecting  Scalpels, 
Incising  Knives,  Scissors,  Costotome,  Cartilage  Shears,  Bone 
Shears,  Saws,  Leur's  Double-saw  Rachiotome,  Rule,  Ax,  Chisels, 
Brunetti's  Rachiotome,  Dexler's  Rachiotome,  Side  Chisel,  Cross 
Chisel,  Curved  Bone  Chisel,  Hammer  Hook,  Rib  Hook,  Steel, 
Forceps,  Pinchers,  Graduates,  Mallet,  Pipettes,  Cup. 

IV.  External  Examination 45 

Signa  Mortis,  Apparent  Death,  Algor  Mortis,  The  Eye  After 
Death,  Cadaveric  Lividity,  Rigor  Mortis,  Appearance  of  Post- 
mortem Decomposition,  Visible  Mucous  Membranes,  Natural 
Openings,  Extremities,  Skin. 

V.  Internal  Examination  of  the  Horse 52 

Position,  Skin,  Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and  Back- 
Thyroid  Glands,  Jugular  Furrow  and  Structures,  Parotid  and 
Submaxillary  Lymph  and  Sahvary  Glands,  Left  Mandible, 
Guttural  Pouches,  Tongue,  Larynx,  Trachea  and  (Esophagus, 
Decapitation,  Preparation  of  the  Head,  Extirpation  of  the  Brain, 
Sinuses,  Nasal  Passages  and  Septum,  Teeth,  Ear,  Eye,  Removal 
of  Spinal  Cord,  Peripheral  Nerves;  Operative  Technic  for  the 
Thoracic  and  Abdominal  Cavities:  Front  Leg,  Hind  Leg, 
Xiphoid-pubic  Incision,  Pubic-lumbar  Incision,  Vacuity  of  the 
Thorax,  Ribs,  Omentum,  Single  Colon,  Ligations,  Small  Intes- 


viii  CONTENTS 

tines,  Epiploic  Foramen,  Bile-duct,  Spleen,  Left  Kidney,  Left 
Adrenal,  Duodenum,  Double  Colon  and  Caecum,  Right  Adrenal, 
Right  Kidney,  Stomach,  Liver,  Pancreas,  Pericardial  Sac  and 
Fluid,  Heart  and  Lungs,  Blood-vessels,  Pleura  and  Peritoneum, 
Lj^mph-glands,  Psoas  Muscles,  Ovaries  and  LTterus,  Summary; 
Operative  Technic  for  the  Pelvic  Cavity :  Preparation,  Mammary 
Gland  or  Penis,  Pelvic  Organs,  Summary ;  Operative  Technic  for 
Leg  and  Foot:  Muscles,  Popliteal  Lymph-gland,  Stifle  Joint,  Tibio- 
tarsal  Joint,  Scapulohumeral  Joint,  Axillary  Lymph-gland,  Carpal 
Joint,  Tendons,  etc..  Frog,  Sole,  Wall,  Phalangeal  and  Navicular 
Joints,  Summary;  Operative  Technic  for  the  Musculature,  Bones, 
and  Joints:  Musculature,  Bones,  Bones  of  the  Legs,  Os  Innomi- 
natum,  Ribs,  Bones  of  the  Head,  Phalanges,  Joints,  Summary. 

VI.  Internal  Examination  of  Ruminants 117 

Skin  and  Position,  Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and 
Back:  Thyroid  Glands,  Parotid  Salivary  and  Sxibparotid  Lymph- 
glands,  Submaxillary  Lymph-  and  Sahvary-glands,  Right  Ramus 
of  Mandible,  Tonsils,  Retropharyngeal  Lymph-glands,  Jugular 
Furrow  and  Structures,  Lymph-glands  (Cow),  Tongue,  Larynx, 
Trachea,  and  (Esophagus,  Decapitation,  Preparation  of  the  Head, 
Extirpation  of  the  Brain,  Nasal  Passages,  Eye,  Ear,  etc. ;  Opera- 
tive Technic  for  Thoracic  and  Abdominal  Cavities:  Front  Leg, 
Hind  Leg,  Mammary  Gland  or  Penis,  Xiphoid-pubic  Incision, 
Pubic-lumbar  Incision,  Vacuity  of  the  Thorax,  Ribs,  Omentum, 
Intestines,  Kidneys  and  Adrenals,  Stomachs  and  Spleen,  Liver 
and  Gall-bladder,  Pancreas,  Pericardial  Sac  and  Fluid,  Heart 
and  Lungs,  Blood-vessels,  Pleura  and  Peritoneum,  Lymph-glands; 
Operative  Technic  for  the  Pelvic  Cavity:  Preparation,  Organs, 
Operative  Technic  for  the  Leg,  Foot,  Muscles,  Bones  and  Joints. 

VII.  Internal  Examination  of  Swine 135 

Dorsal  Position,  Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and  Back, 
Operative  Technic  for  the  Thoracic  and  Abdominal  Cavities: 
Intestines,  Duodenum  and  Bile-duct,  Spleen,  Stomach,  Liver, 
Kidneys,  Heart  and  Lungs;  Operative  Technic  for  the  Pelvic 
Cavity,  Left  Side  Position. 

VIII.  Internal  Examination  of  the  Dog  and  Cat 142 

Position,  Skin,  Operative  Technic  for  the  Abdominal  Cavity: 
Omentum  and  Intestines,  Bile-duct,  Stomach,  Spleen  and  Pan- 
creas, Liver,  Kidneys  and  Adrenals;  Operative  Technic  for  the 
Pelvic  Cavity.  Operative  Technic  for  the  Thoracic  Cavity: 
Sternum,  Heart  and  Lungs;  Operative  Technic  for  the  Head, 
Neck  and  Back:  Thyroid  Glands,  Tongue,  Tonsils,  Laryn.x, 
Trachea  and  (Esophagus,  Nasal   Passages,  Brain  and  Cord. 


CONTENTS  ix 

IX.  Internal    Examination    of    the    Mouse,    Guinea-pig,    Rabbit, 

Fowl  and  Elephant 152 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Mouse,  Guinea-pig  and  Rabbit,  Oper- 
ative Technic  for  the  Fowl,  Operative  Technic  for  the  Elephant. 

X.  Technic  and  Description  of  Organs 161 

Tongue,  Larynx,  Trachea,  Oesophagus  and  Tonsils,  Thyroid  and 
Parathyroid  Glands,  ffisophagus  (Thoracic  Portion),  Bronchi, 
Lungs,  and  Adjacent  Lymph-glands,  Pericardium  and  Pericardial 
Fluid,  Heart,  Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Heart,  Spleen, 
Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Spleen,  Stomach,  Brief 
Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Stomach,  Intestines  of  the  Horse, 
Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Intestines  of  the  Horse,  Intes- 
tines of  Ruminants,  Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Intestines 
of  Ruminants,  Intestines  of  Swine,  Brief  Descriptive  Table  of 
Intestines  of  Swine,  Intestines  of  the  Dog  and  Cat,  Brief  De- 
scriptive Table  of  Normal  Intestines  of  the  Dog,  Liver,  Brief 
Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Liver,  Pancreas,  Brief  Descriptive 
Table  of  Normal  Pancreas,  Kidney,  Brief  Descriptive  Table  of 
Normal  Kidney,  Adrenals,  Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal 
Adrenals,  Vagina,  Uterus,  Ovaries  and  Urinary  Bladder,  Brief 
Descriptive  Table  of  the  Normal  Uterus,  Brief  Descriptive  Table 
of  Normal  Ovaries,  Udder  of  the  Cow,  Penis,  Seminal  Vesicles, 
Cowper's  and  Prostate  Glands,  Urinary  Bladder  and  Testicles, 
Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Testicles,  Brain  and  Meninges, 
Table  of  Absolute,  Relative  and  Percentage  Weights  of  Normal 
Brains,  Spinal  Cord  and  Meninges,  Eye,  Ear. 

XL    PoST-MORTEM    PROTOCOL   AND   RePORT 214 

Definition,  Pre-autopsy  Data,  External  Examination,  Internal 
Examination,  Pathologic-Anatomical  Diagnosis,  Epicrisis,  Ad- 
vantage of  Construction,  Suggestions  on  Protocol,  Outline  for 
Post-mortem  Protocol,  Literature  Used,  Appendix,  Index. 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

FIG.  PAGE 

1.  White  coat,  rubber  sleeves,  apron  and  boots.     Rubber  gown  and  boots  8 

2.  Post-mortem  room 19 

3.  Virchow's  post-mortem  knife  for  general  autopsy  work  on  large  animals  23 

4.  Large  cartilage  knife  used  in  severing  asternal  cartilages  of  small  animals 

when  removing  sternum 23 

5.  (A)  Butcher  knife  with  cutting  edge  in  direct  line  with  the  handle.  ...  23 
(B)  Pith.    Very  useful  for  destrojdng  large  animals 23 

6.  Improper  and  proper  ways  of  holding  large  knife  in  doing  autopsy  work  24 

7.  Little's  case  knife  for  general  autopsy  work  on  small  animals 25 

8.  Pick's  myelotome 25 

9.  Virchow's  brain  knife 26 

10.  Dissecting  scalpel 26 

11.  Groove  director - 26 

12.  Incising  knives 26 

13.  Monosmith's  enucleation  knife  for  removing  the  eye 27 

14.  Spearhead  needle  and  probe  used  in  technic  on  eye  and  ear 27 

15.  Harpoon  needle  for  removing  the  optic  lens 27 

16.  Tyrrell's  blunt  and  sharp  hooks 27 

17.  Steel 27 

18.  Raspatory  for  scraping  soft  tissue  from  bones 27 

19.  Championniere's  bone  chisel 27 

20.  Esmarch's  bone  chisel 28 

21.  McE wen's  bone  chisel 28 

22.  Brick  chisels,  much  reduced 28 

23.  Rachiotomy  chisel  for  cutting  cranial  bones 28 

24.  Rachiotomy  chisel  for  cutting  nasal  bones 28 

25.  Cross  chisel  and  proper  position  for  use  of  the  chisel  end 29 

26.  Dexler's  rachiotome  (Schmey) 29 

27.  Brunetti's  left  curved  rachiotome 30 

28.  Brunetti's  right  curved  rachiotome 30 

29.  Side  chisel 31 

30.  Post-mortem  ax 31 

31.  Steel  hammer  hook 32 

32.  Rib  hook 32 

33.  Metal-bound  wood  mallet 32 

34.  Rawhide  mallet 33 

35.  Iron  pinchers 33 

36.  Costotomes 33 

xi 


xii  ILLUSTRATIONS 

37.  Bone-cutting  forceps 34 

38.  Cartilage  shears 35 

39.  Enterotome  showing  one  blunt  point  which  is  longer  than  the  other ....  35 

40.  Small  scissors  which  have  one  point  blunt 35 

41.  Small  scissors  with  straight  and  curved  blades 36 

42.  Artery  scissors 37 

43.  Straight  forceps 38 

44.  Rat-tooth  forceps 38 

45.  Curved  forceps 39 

46.  Dura  and  hiemostatic  forceps 39 

47.  Tumor  forceps 40 

48.  Bone-holding  forceps 40 

49.  Carpenter's  saw 40 

50.  Frame  saw 41 

51.  Small  frame  saw 41 

52.  Charriere's  blade  saw 42 

53.  Langenbeck's  blade  saw 42 

54.  Kelly's  skull  saw 42 

55.  Single  blade  rachiotomy  saw 42 

56.  Leur's  double  blade  rachiotomy  saw 43 

57.  Folding  steel  rule 43 

58.  Needles  used  in  making  cosmetic  post-mortems 43 

59.  Magnif  jang  glass 44 

60.  Proper  position  of  the  horse  for  autopsy 53 

61.  Left  front  and  hind  leg  removed  with  the  skin 55 

62.  Line  of  incision  on  border  of  left  ramus  of  mandible 58 

63.  Left  front  and  hind  legs  removed 60 

64.  Left  ramus  of  mandible  removed  and  jugular  furrow  laid  open 61 

65.  Incision  to  be  made  in  exposing  a  tooth,  nasal  sinuses,  turbinated  bones, 

nasal  septum  and  brain 63 

66.  Removal  of  the  calvarium  with  the  hammer-hook 64 

67.  Brain  exposed  after  removal  of  calvarium 65 

68.  Brain  removed 66 

69.  Longitudinal  incision  through  the  head  after  removal  of  the  brain 67 

70.  Left  half  of  spine  chipped  away  with  a  post-mortem  hatchet,  exposing 

spinal  cord 69 

71.  Left  hind  leg  removed 73 

72.  Insertion  of  first  two  fingers  of  left  hand  in  abdomen 74 

73.  Proper  position  of  hands  and  knife  in  beginning  the  xiphoid-pubic  incision  75 

74.  Proper  mannei*  of  holding  knife  when  making  pubic-lumbar  incLsion ....  77 

75.  Xiphoid-pubic  incision  completed.    Pubic-lumbar  incision  half  completed  78 

76.  Left  hind  leg  taken  off.    Xiphoid-pubic  and  pubic-lumbar  incisions  com- 

pleted    79 

77.  Left  abdominal  flap  turned  up  over  ribs 81 

78.  Preparation  of  the  back  for  dorsal  rib  incision  in  ablation  of  left  side.  .  .  84 


ILLUSTRATIONS  xiii 

79.  After  completion  of  ventral  and  dorsal  rib-incisions  left  side  is  elevated 
and  the  diaphragm  incised  close  to  the  ribs  and  the  side  treed 85 

80.  Tongue,  larynx,  trachea  and  orsophagns  ablated,  right  and  left  vagus, 

cartoid  artery  and  jugular  vein  exposed 87 

81.  Small  intestines  arranged  at  the  end  of  their  mesentery  upon  the  colon 

and  caecum.  Proper  method  of  holding  small  intestines  and  knife  in 
separating  the  intestine  from  its  mesentery 89 

82.  Left  hand  grasping  mesenteric  vessels  at  point  of  attachment  to  the 

double  colon  and  caecum 93 

83.  Occipito-atloidal  articulation  opened.    Pericardium  exposed  for  incision. 

Single  colon,  small  intestine,  double  colon,  caecum,  stomach,  duodenum, 
spleen,  kidneys  and  adrenals  extirpated.  Pelvic  organs  ablated  without 
removing  part  of  pelvis.  Psoa's  muscles  are  incised  vertically,  muscles 
of  the  hind  leg  cut  in  parallel  planes 96 

84.  Method  of  exposing  contents  of  pericardial  sac 97 

85.  View  of  thorax  after  left  side  has  been  taken  off  and  left  apical  lobe 

turned  back 98 

86.  View  of  thorax  after  left  side  has  been  removed 100 

87.  Proper  manner  of  grasping  large  blood-vessels  between  heart  and  lungs 

in  removing  them  from  thorax  or  from  sink  to  table 101 

88.  View  of  cadaver  after  evisceration  of  thorax,  abdomen,  and  pelvis 102 

89.  Aorta,  mesenteric  and  iliac  blood-vessels  properly  opened 103 

90.  Lines  of  incision  for  ablation  of  horny  sole  and  frog 112 

91.  Lines  of  incision  for  sawing  the  wall  of  the  hoof 112 

92.  Correct  position  of  ruminant  at  autopsy 118 

93.  View  showing  the  skin  of  the  right  side  together  with  the  right  fore  and 

hind  leg  dissected  back  from  a  single  ventral  median,  incision  from  the 
chin  to  the  anus 119 

94.  Skin  of  the  right  side  of  the  head  and  neck  removed  and  thrown  over  the 

dorsal  side 120 

95.  Incisions  to  be  made  in  removing  calvarium  and  opening  nasal  passages  122 

96.  This  shows  relation  of  incisions  to  horns  and  occipital  condyles 123 

97.  Showing  position  of  incision  between  horn  and  external  auditory  meatus  124 

98.  Halves  of  calvarium  spread  apart  exposing  brain  and  frontal  sinuses .  . .    124 

99.  The  right  fore  and  hind  legs  and  the  right  side,  have  been  removed 

exposing  thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities 129 

100.  Pelvic,   abdominal   and  part  of  thoracic   cavities  after  evisceration, 

showing  adrenals  and  lymph  glands 133 

101.  Dorsal  position  of  swine 136 

102.  Transverse  incision  made  through  the  belly  wall 136 

103.  Flaps  of  abdominal  wall  laid  outward 138 

104.  Wlien  the  ilioca'cal  valve  is  of  particular  interest 139 

105.  Dorsal  position  of  dog 143 

106.  To  expose  abdominal  viscera 143 

107.  Lay  flaps  of  belly  wall  outward 143 

108.  Figure  to  the  left  shows  the  skin  and  musculature  removed  from  nose. 

Figure  at  the  right  shows  nasal  bone,  calvarium  and  top  of  spinal  canal 
removed 149 


xiv  ILLUSTRATIONS 

109.  Autopsy  of  mouse 152 

110.  Autopsy  of  guinea  pig 153 

111.  Autopsy  of  a  rabbit 154 

112.  Operative  technic  for  the  fowl 156 

113.  After  making  the  incisions  the  crop  is  freed  from  the  breast 157 

114.  Unopened  organs  of  a  chicken  after  evisceration 158 

115.  Representation  of  certain  familiar  objects,  with  scales  in  millimeters  and 

inches 164 

116.  Scale  for  accurate  measurement  (F.  Smith) 165 

117.  Tongue,  larjmx,  trachea  and  oesophagus 166 

118.  Lungs  after  opening  trachea  and  bronchi 169 

119.  Proper  position  of  heart  at    autopsy 170 

120.  Right  and  left  cavities  of  the  heart  opened 171 

121.  The  entire  heart  inverted 172 

122.  Heart  in  same  relative  position  as  in  Fig.  121 173 

123.  Heart  in  same  relative  position  as  shown  in  Fig.  122.    Illustration  shows 

the  second  incision 175 

124.  Spleen  of  a  horse 178 

125.  After  incisions  have  been  made  through  the  spleen 178 

126.  Line  of  incision  in  opening  stomach  and  duodenum 181 

127.  Double  colon  and  csecum.    Proper  position  for  autopsy  view  from  above  185 

128.  Liver  properly  incised 193 

129.  Correct  position  of  hands  and  knife  in  opening  kidney 197 

130.  Kidney  opened  like  a  book  after  completing  incision 198 

131.  Vagina,  uterus,  and  right  ovary  opened 202 

132.  The  udder  divided  into  its  two  lateral  halves 205 

133.  Each  udder-half  is  laid  open  hke  a  book  exposing  cut  surface  of  paren- 

ch>Tna  and  milk  cisterns 206 

134.  Showing  urethra,  bladder,  seminal  vesicles,  etc.,  laid  open 207 

135.  Urethra,  bladder,  seminal  vesicles  and  vasa  deferentia  laid  open,  show- 

ing orifices  of  glands 208 

136.  The  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum  are  slightly  spread  apart  and  two 

longitudinal  incisions  made  through  the   corpus  collosum  into  the 
lateral  ventricles 210 

137.  The  lateral  and  fourth  ventricles  opened 211 

138.  Part  of  the  spinal  cord  of  a  horse 212 

139.  Position  of  hands,  scissors,  and  eye  in  opening  the  latter  on  its  equator  213 

140.  Equatorial  line  of  incision  for  opening  the  eye 213 

141.  Membrana  tympani  and  manubrium  and  malleus  after  splitting  the 

petrous  temporal  bone 213 

142.  Form  which  is  sent  from  the  clinic  to  the  autopsy  room  with  the  cadaver  215 


VETERINARY   POST-MORTEM 
TECHNIC 

CHAPTER  I 
GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS 

Definition. — The  systematic  exposure  and  critical 
examination  of  a  cadaver  for  the  study  of  pathologic 
changes  in  any  or  all  their  relations  and  extent,  and  in 
many  cases  with  the  object  of  determining  the  cause  of 
death,  may  be  called  a  post,  postmortem,  autopsy,  necropsy, 
necroscopy,  mortopsy,  sectio-anatomica,  sectio-cadaveris 
or  section.  Ohduction  means  a  medicolegal  postmortem 
which  is  not  different  from  an  ordinary  autopsy,  except  that 
the  results  are  used  in  court  to  settle  a  dispute  concerning 
cause  of  death  or  accident,  or  duration  of  some  pathologic 
condition  to  establish  the  fact  that  the  animal  was  diseased 
or  unsound  prior  to  the  date  of  purchase.  A  cosmetic 
postmortem  is  one  conducted  with  the  very  least  disfigure- 
ment, and  in  which  the  parts  are  replaced,  and  the  cadaver 
sewed  together,  washed,  the  hair  dried,  and  in  general  made 
to  appear  as  nearly  intact  as  possible.  It  is  usually  accom- 
plished by  making  an  incision  on  the  median  line  of  the 
ventral  side  from  the  xiphoid  cartilage  to  the  pubis,  incising 
the  diaphragm  and  eviscerating  the  thorax  and  abdomen. 
The  organs  are  then  compressed  to  free  them  from  fluid, 
replaced,  packed  tight  with  paper,  cloths,  cotton  or  oakum, 
and  the  incision  closed  with  a  baseball  stitch. 

Complete  Autopsy. — A  complete  autopsy  must  be 


2  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

effectuated  in  cases  where  the  cause  of  death  is  not  known. 
Every  detail  of  technic  must  be  completed  and  every  organ 
or  part  carefully  examined  to  make  possible  a  correct  post- 
mortem diagnosis. 

Incomplete  Autopsy. — A  short  autopsy  (removal  of 
front  leg  and  side  of  the  large  animal)  may  be  done  when 
the  pm-pose  of  the  postmortem  is  to  corroborate  a  positive 
laboratory  or  clinical  diagnosis.  Should  the  trouble  not  be 
disclosed,  one  must  continue  the  autopsy  to  completion. 

Object. — In  no  other  branch  of  veterinary  science  is 
there  demanded  more  sound  knowledge,  accurate  scientific 
and  systematic  technic,  and  keen  powers  of  observation, 
discrimination  and  interpretation. 

In  many  cases  the  purpose  of  an  autopsy  is  to  establish 
the  cause  of  death  or  the  length  of  time  a  disease  process 
has  existed,  or  its  area  of  anatomical  distribution.  The 
information  obtained  may  be  used  in  legal  proceedings 
and  should  therefore  be  exact  and  complete  in  every  detail. 

The  practitioner  should,  whenever  possible,  autopsy 
every  case  lost.  Through  such  study  of  post-mortem 
pathology  he  unquestionably  comes  to  a  more  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  interpretation  of  symptoms,  the  efficiency 
and  proper  selection  of  remedies,  and  in  general,  becomes 
a  better  diagnostician  and  safer  therapist.  He  may  fre- 
quently desire  to  corroborate  his  own  or  another's  clinical 
diagnosis  and  justify  the  treatment  used,  on  his  own 
account  or  as  a  consultant,  by  conducting  an  autopsy  in  the 
owner's  presence.  Systematic  technic  and  sound  logic  in 
such  cases  do  much  toward  the  establishment  of  an  enduring 
reputation,  and  one  is  assured  of  a  greater  pecuniaiy  return 
than  should  he  neglect  such  opportunities  of  study  and 
demonstration  of  morbid  processes.    In  addition  it  affords 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  3 

an  excellent  opportunity  for  the  review  of  anatomy,  and  in 
animals  killed  by  accident,  for  the  study  of  the  physio- 
logical character  of  the  various  parts,  which  better  enables 
one  to  differentiate  the  normal,  pathologic  and  post-mortem 
decomposed  tissues.  The  practice  of  surgical  operations 
on  cadavers  after  an  autopsy  is  commendable  and  tends  to 
increase  one's  efficiency  in  surgery. 

In  many  instances  the  services  of  State  livestock  sanitary 
boards  have  been  sought  to  determine  the  specificity  of  a  dis- 
ease supposed  to  be  present  on  premises  where  three  or  f  our 
animals  died  within  a  short  length  of  time.  Frequently, 
in  these  instances,  a  knowledge  of  systematic  post-mortem 
technic  would  have  shown  the  veterinary  physician  that  the 
trouble  in  each  animal  was  purely  local  and  very  remote 
from  the  nature  of  a  communicable  disease. 

State  veterinaries,  commissioners  of  health,  agents  of 
State  boards  of  health.  State  livestock  sanitary  boards, 
government  field  veterinarians,  and  laboratory  pathologists 
should  be  thoroughly  trained  in  post-mortem  technic,  as 
their  duties  may  necessitate  instruction,  supervision,  or 
actuation  of  autopsy  of  animals  dead  of  contagious  or  in- 
fectious diseases,  for  the  purpose  of  diagnosis,  scientific 
research,  or  food  sanitation. 

Clinicians  should  follow  cases  which  terminate  fatally 
to  the  post-mortem  table  and  there  review  the  study  of  those 
morbid  processes  which  they  were  endeavoring  to  correct. 
This  strengthens  their  ability  in  diagnosis  and  treatment 
and  makes  them  better  teachers. 

Regular  systematic  postmortems  should  be  made  and 
accuratel}^  recorded  at  every  veterinary  school  and  hospital 
for  the  accumulation  of  valuable  data  which  are  of  great 
scientific  and  geographical  interest. 


4  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Autopsy  work  for  students  in  schools  of  veterinary 
medicine  is  indispensable.  The  student  should  first  have 
a  thorough  training  in  general  pathology  and  special 
23athology,  the  latter  particularly  studied  from  the  stand- 
point of  the  pathology  of  the  organs  and  systems  of  organs, 
as  well  as  the  contagious  and  infectious  diseases.  Too  few 
of  our  profession  have  had  a  firm  foundation  laid  in  the 
pathology  of  the  various  systems  of  organs.  With  a  good 
theoretical  knowledge  of  the  morbid  processes  of  which 
an  organ  or  part  is  susceptible,  one  may  be,  and  often  is, 
totally  unable  to  recognize  the  conditions  when  confronted 
with  them.  Pathology  taught  at  the  autopsy  table  trains 
the  student,  as  he  can  be  trained  in  no  other  way,  in  distin- 
guishing between  the  normal,  pathological  and  post- 
mortem decomposed  tissues.  It  stimulates  deep  thinking, 
logical  reasoning  power,  and  the  development  of  a  keen 
mind.  Post-mortem  changes  have,  all  too  frequently,  been 
accused  of  constituting  pathologic  changes  which  have 
never  existed  in  the  subject.  Students  and  graduates  not 
infrequently  fail  to  identify  various  parts  of  organs  or  are 
unable  to  distinguish  one  organ  from  another,  yet  may 
speak  most  learnedly  of  the  Malpighian  corpuscles  and 
the  islands  of  Langerhans. 

Ample  opportunity  is  had  in  most  of  our  veterinary 
schools  for  regular  systematic  courses  in  post-mortem 
pathology.  The  writer  has  taught  the  subject  in  this  man- 
ner for  a  nmnber  of  years  and  is  thoroughly  convinced 
that  in  no  other  way  can  a  student  be  taught  pathology 
with  enough  proficiency  to  enable  him  to  consistently 
recognize,  accurately  describe,  and  logically  give  the 
pathogenesis  of  the  man}^  various  morbid  processes.  Illus- 
trations, museum  specimens,  word  pictures,  and  discussions 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  5 

are  valuable  accessories,  but  when  not  used  in  conjunction 
with  regular  systematic  post-mortem  study  they  fail  in 
their  purpose,  because,  to  the  student  mind,  they  are  not 
real  and  they  lack  the  association  of  other  tissues  and  those 
processes  which  are  primary  and  secondary  to  them.  The 
teaching  of  pathology  by  lectures  without  systematic  study 
at  the  post-mortem  table  would  be  no  less  impressive,  con- 
vincing, or  efficient  than  lectures  in  medicine  without  clinic, 
or  the  theory  of  surgery  without  siu'gery  practicum.  At 
the  post-mortem  table  a  pathologic  process  gives  the 
student  a  full  appreciation  of  its  true  significance.  The 
presence  of  the  cadaver  itself  bears  mute  witness  of  the 
malignancy  of  many  morbid  processes.  The  primary  lesion 
and  many  of  the  subsequently  changed  tissues  when  handled, 
inspected  and  discussed  in  their  full  relationships  so  inter- 
est the  student  that  he  is  much  less  apt  to  forget,  and  exer- 
cise of  the  functions  of  seeing,  hearing,  smelling  and  feeling 
during  the  examination  and  description  of  diseased  tissues 
in  their  proper  environment  establishes  an  acquaintance- 
ship so  close  that  one  experiences  little  difficulty  in  recog- 
nizing the  processes  when  next  met.  Scientific  systematic 
post-mortem  technic  should  be  used  whenever  possible  to 
facilitate  the  teaching  of  pathology  at  the  post-mortem 
table. 

Authority. — Secure  proper  authority  for  conducting 
an  autops}^  before  it  is  begun.  State  laws  may  prohibit 
the  post-mortem  examination  of  animals  dead  of  communi- 
cable diseases,  or  place  certain  restrictions  upon  such 
examinations.  Some  owners  object  to  an  autopsy  being 
performed  upon  an  animal,  especially  if  it  has  been  a  pet. 

Time,  Date,  Light  and  Weather. — Perform  the 
autopsy  in  daylight  and  as  soon  after  the  death  of  the 


6  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

animal  as  possible.  Colors  cannot  be  properly  determined 
in  artificial  light,  and  post-mortem  decomposition  sets  in 
very  soon  after  death,  especially  in  hot  weather.  One 
should  carefully  compare  the  time  and  date  of  death  or 
destruction  with  that  of  autopsy,  as  it  may  aid  in  deter- 
mining the  cause  of  certain  tissue  changes. 

Place. — Choose  the  cleanest  place  available  in  which 
to  perform  an  autops3\  The  cadaver  of  a  large  animal 
should  be  placed  upon  a  table  21^  feet  high  when  con- 
venient. '  In  the  field  where  this  is  impossible  remove  the 
cadaver  from  the  stable  in  order  to  secui'e  the  best  possible 
light  and  to  prevent  littering  the  premises.  Carefully 
consider  the  place  of  death  and  that  of  autopsy,  as  it  may 
assist  in  accounting  for  conditions  of  the  hair,  skin  and 
extremities,  induced  by  dragging  or  handling  the  animal 
after  death.  In  rural  places  the  carcass  is  sometimes  moved 
on  a  stoneboat  or  dragged  on  its  side  to  the  place  of  burial 
or  incineration  before  autopsj^  In  cities  cadavers  are 
removed  to  reduction  plants  soon  after  death.  Secure  floor 
space  near  a  door  or  window  where  the  most  light  is  to  be 
had,  have  the  floor  cleaned,  and  then  work  rapidly,  when 
doing  an  autopsy  at  a  reduction  plant. 

Clinical  History. — Secure  clinical  history,  diagnosis 
and  treatment  of  the  case  and  mode  of  termination  of  the 
animal.  Know,  if  possible,  whether  death  occurred  quietly 
or  if  the  animal  struggled  during  the  agonal  stages,  and 
finally  the  position  of  the  patient  at  the  time  of  death. 
Medicaments  are  sometimes  responsible  for  alterations  of 
tissues.  Autopsy  findings  are  sometimes  absolutely  value- 
less in  establishing  a  diagnosis  without  the  history.  Body 
fluids  gravitate  to  the  side  upon  which  the  animal  lies  soon 
after  death. 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  7 

Destruction  of  Animal. — When  an  animal  is  to  be 
destroyed,  especially  for  autopsy  purposes,  it  should  be 
so  dispatched  as  to  least  harm  those  parts  which  are  of 
most  probable  interest  for  post-mortem  examination. 
When  inflammatory  processes  are  anticipated,  the  animal 
should  not  be  bled  to  death.  It  should  not  be  shot  or  struck 
in  the  head  if  the  brain  is  likely  to  be  of  especial  interest. 
It  should  not  be  shot,  or  injected  intrathoracically  with 
strj'chnine  if  the  heart  or  lungs  are  thought  to  be  affected. 
Large  animals  usually  may  be  most  conveniently  pithed 
or  given  strychnine  intravenously.  Small  animals  may  be 
destroyed  with  chloroform,  ether,  illuminating  gas,  or 
strychnine  subcutaneously.  One  should  seciu-e  the  name 
and  address  of  persons  who  authorized,  effectuated,  and 
witnessed  the  destruction  of  the  animal. 

Description  of  Cadaver. — Take  an  accurate  detailed 
description  of  the  cadaver  before  the  autopsy  is  begun,  as 
the  information  may  be  needed  in  court  proceedings.  One 
should  consider  species,  breed,  sex,  age,  color,  markings, 
size,  weight,  tag  number,  and  clinic  number. 

Witnesses. — Secure  witnesses  to  the  autopsy,  when 
convenient,  for  use  in  cases  of  probable  forensic  involve- 
ment. Witnesses  of  an  autopsy  should  be  ready  to  render 
any  assistance  possible.  They  should  refrain  from  hand- 
ling specimens  until  after  the  autopsist  has  finished  his 
examination,  and  then  only  with  his  permission.  To  keep 
up  a  rapid  fire  of  questions  or  to  audibh^  volunteer  one's 
opinion  concerning  the  pathology  of  each  lesion,  cause  of 
death  and  the  final  diagnosis  is  a  decided  breach  of  courtesy. 
One's  opinion  should  be  given  only  when  asked  and  then 
guardedly,  unless  one  has  had  special  training  in  pathology. 
'     Dress. — Dress    properly.      During    regular    autopsy 


8  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

work  for  students  in  a  post-mortem  room  a  complete  change 
of  clothes  should  be  made  when  possible.  Lockers  should 
be  provided  for  student  use  adjacent  to  the  autopsy  room. 


Fia.  1. — At  left,  white  coat,  rubber  sleeves,  apron  and  boots.    At  right,  rubber  gown  and  boots. 


This  prevents  the  street  clothes  from  acquiring  an  odor 
which  is  most  uncomfortable,  both  to  the  wearer  and  those 
with  whom  he  may  come  in  contact.  One  may  wear  a  long 
white  coat  or  a  suit  of  overalls,  and  a  rubber  apron  which 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  9 

covers  the  front  from  a  few  inches  below  the  chin  to  a  few 
inches  above  the  shoe  tops,  and  rubber  half  sleeves.  Better 
still  is  a  rubber  gown  which  slips  on  over  the  head,  reaches 
nearly  to  the  ankles,  buttons  at  the  collar,  and  has  a  draw- 
string at  the  neck  (Fig.  1).  Rubber  boots  complete  this 
outfit,  which  is  ideal  for  an  instructor  and  students  working 
with  the  cadaver  on  a  table.  When  the  cadaver  is  on  the 
floor  or  ground,  overalls  and  a  rubber  apron  which  has  a 
loop  around  the  neck  and  strings  that  tie  around  the  waist 
are  preferable,  as  the  skirt  of  a  white  coat  or  rubber  gown 
gets  in  the  way  when  one  leans  forward  to  work.  For 
small  animals,  a  white  coat  and  rubber  apron  are  sufficient. 

Care  of  Instruments. — Keep  instruments  sharp. 
Always  place  an  instrument  upon  a  table,  box,  board  or 
towel  close  to  the  cadaver  when  not  in  use  during  an 
autopsy,  so  that  it  may  be  readily  found  when  again  needed. 
Do  not  stick  a  knife  into  the  cadaver's  flesh  or  place  it  in 
a  body  cavity,  as  it  may  later  cause  injury  to  the  autopsist. 
After  completing  an  autopsy  upon  an  animal  dead  of  any 
contagious  or  infectious  disease,  the  instruments  must  be 
sterilized  before  being  put  away,  and  under  no  circum- 
stances should  an  autopsy  be  conducted  upon  another  ani- 
mal with  the  same  instruments  until  after  they  have  been 
sterilized.  If  tliis  were  not  done  they  might  be  a  source  of 
infection  to  the  technician,  and  would  possibly  contaminate 
tissues  of  the  second  cadaver  which,  when  examined  bac- 
teriologically,  might  lead  to  confusing  results. 

Care  or  Hands. — Remove  rings  from  the  fingers  be- 
fore beginning  an  autopsy,  as  they  may  become  a  source 
of  infection  and  are  sometimes  difficult  to  clean  and  sterilize. 
One  may  smear  the  hands  with  carbolized  petrolatum  to 
close  the  pores  of  the  skin  before  starting  an  autopsy  when 


10  VETERINARY  TOST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

rubber  gloves  are  not  worn.     Wear  rubber  gloves  when 
diseases  communicable  to  man  are  suspected. 

During  an  autopsy  wash  the  hands  frequently  enough 
to  prevent  the  accumulation  of  blood  and  filth.  It  should 
be  remembered,  however,  that  one  should  not  hesitate  to 
touch  any  tissue  the  consistency  of  which  should  be  known 
simply  because  it  has  a  repulsive  appearance.  Neither 
should  one  waste  time  cleaning  and  manicuring  his  nails 
during  an  autopsy  period.  The  nails,  except  that  of  the 
right  thmiib,  should  be  trimmed  before  an  autopsy  is  begun. 
The  thumb  nail  is  used  in  stripping  the  capsule  from  an 
organ,  except  when  rubber  gloves  are  worn,  when  the  sharp 
edge  of  a  knife  is  employed.  One  should  not  be  foolhardy 
and  carelessly  expose  himself  to  danger  by  handling  sus- 
picious material  without  rubber  gloves  (glanders,  etc.). 

In  case  of  an  abrasion  or  cut  contracted  during  the  per- 
formance of  an  autopsy,  one  should  stop  immediately  and 
wash  the  wound  with  warm  water  and  soap,  and  then  apply 
an  antiseptic  such  as  concentrated  iodine,  5  per  cent,  lysol, 
or  1-1000  mercury  bichloride  solution,  then  apply  collo- 
dion or  celloidin  dissolved  in  equal  parts  of  ether  and 
alcohol,  bandage,  and  put  on  a  rubber  finger  stall  or  rubber 
glove  and  continue  the  autopsy.  If  this  is  not  convenient 
one  should  wash  and  antisepticize  the  wound  and  direct 
another  person  in  the  performance  of  the  autopsy  until  it 
is  completed,  thus  taking  no  further  chances  of  becoming 
infected. 

Notes. — One  must  make  notes  of  the  post-mortem  find- 
ings immediately  after  the  completion  of  the  autopsy  or 
dictate  them  to  another  person  (amanuensis)  while  con- 
ducting the  autopsy.  One  should  not  depend  upon  his 
memory  for  the  post-mortem  protocol. 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  11 

Specimens  for  Laboratory  Examination. — For 
preservation  of  tissues  for  microscopical  examination  small 
bottles  containing  fixatives,  such  as  formalin  8  per  cent., 
concentrated  sublimate  of  mercury,  Muller's  fluid,  or  95  per 
cent,  alcohol,  should  be  taken  to  the  place  of  autopsy  and 
the  tissue  placed  in  the  fixative  mimediately.  The  bottle 
should  be  packed  in  a  wooden  box  with  absorbent  cotton 
(tumors,  actinomycosis,  etc.). 

■  Material  for  bacteriological  examination  may  be  used 
at  the  autopsy.  Tubes  of  sterile  bouillon  may  be  taken 
to  the  cadaver  and  small  pieces  of  diseased  tissue  dropped 
into  the  fluid  with  very  little  danger  of  contamination  if  the 
scissors  have  been  sterihzed  and  kept  in  paper  wrapping  or 
the  scalpels  sterilized  and  kept  in  test-tubes.  If  this  is  not 
convenient,  place  the  tissue  in  a  sterile,  liquid-tight  rubber- 
stoppered,  wide-mouthed  bottle  or  fruit  jar  and  then  pack 
in  ice  and  sawdust.  The  same  holds  true  for  specimens  to 
be  examined  histologically  when  fixatives  cannot  be  secured. 
When  packing  specimens  for  shipment  to  a  laboratory 
for  examination  keep  the  foUowing  points  in  mind: 

1.  That  the  specunen  should  reach  the  laboratory  in  the 
shortest  possible  time. 

2.  That  it  should  reach  the  laboratory,  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible, in  the  same  condition  as  when  removed  from  the 
cadaver  or  animal. 

3.  That  it  should  be  so  packed  as  to  incur  the  least  pos- 
sibility of  contamination  or  decomposition. 

4.  That  it  should  be  so  packed  as  to  render  the  least 
chance  of  breakage  of  glass  container,  leakage  of  infec- 
tious fluid,  or  escape  of  unpleasant  odor. 

5.  That  ice  should  not  come  in  direct  contact  with 
specimens  that  are  to  be  examined  bacteriologically. 


12  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

6.  Specimens  should  not  be  wrapped  in  cloths  wet  with 
antiseptics  then  packed  in  paper  or  pasteboard  boxes  and 
shijDped,  as  the  covering  macerates  and  facilitates  contami- 
nation of  both  the  tissues  and  the  surroundings. 

7.  Large  specimens  and  those  packed  in  ice  should  be 
sent  by  express,  others  by  parcel  post  or  mail. 

8.  The  package  should  be  plainly  marked,  "  For  bac- 
teriological, serological  or  pathological  examination,"  to- 
gether with  the  name  and  address  of  the  laboratory  and 
the  sender. 

9.  Separate  containers  should  be  so  plainly  marked  as 
to  insin-e  identification  of  the  animal  from  which  the  speci- 
men was  taken. 

10.  When  no  particular  disease  is  suspected,  parts  of 
heart,  liver,  spleen,  kidneys,  lungs  and  lympli-glands  should 
be  submitted  to  the  laboratory.  When  possible  the  whole 
unoj)ened  heart  should  be  sent. 

11.  A  letter  should  be  directed  to  the  laboratory  stating 
the  specific  tests  desired,  the  disease  suspected,  time  of  the 
animal's  death  and  that  of  the  autopsy,  complete  history, 
and  post-mortem  report. 

Express  Companies  Regulations. — Various  State 
boards  of  health  have  decided  that  the  custom  of  shipping 
bodies  (especially  dogs)  to  State  laboratories  or  other  public 
or  private  laboratories  is  unnecessary,  and  a  menace  to  the 
health  of  the  people,  and  regulations  have  been  established 
that  whenever  analyses  of  dead  animal  tissue  become  neces- 
sary, the  brain,  spinal  cord,  stomach,  liver,  or  other  part 
must  be  removed  from  the  body  of  tlie  animal  and  placed 
in  a  tin,  zinc,  or  other  metal-lined  box  tightly  closed  before 
delivering  to  the  express  company  or  other  public  carrier. 

Mailing  and  Parcel  Post  Regulations. — Section 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  13 

36  of  the  Parcel  Post  Regulations:  Specimens  of  dried 
blood  or  of  diseased  tissues  or  conmiunicable  diseases,  cul- 
tures and  tubercular  sputum  may  be  mailed  in  accordance 
with  instructions  of  the  Treasury  Department  (Bureau  of 
Public  Health  and  Marine  Hospital  Service),  as  promul- 
gated by  the  Post  Office  Department  under  Order  No.  3064- 
of  April  22,  1910. 

Diseased  Tissues  in  the  Mails. — Order  No.  3064, 
Section  495,  Postal  Laws  and  Regulations,  is  hereby 
amended  to  read  as  follows :  Specimens  of  diseased  tissues 
may  be  admitted  to  the  mail  for  transmission  to  the  United 
States,  State,  Municipal  or  other  laboratories  in  possession 
of  permits  referred  to  in  paragraph  3  of  this  section  only 
when  enclosed  in  mailing  cases  constructed  in  accordance 
with  this  regulation: 

Provided,  that  bacteriologic  and  pathologic  specimens 
of  plague  and  cholera  (not  hog  cholera)  shall  under  no 
circumstances  be  admitted  to  the  mails. 

2.  Liquid  cultures  or  cultures  of  micro-organisms  in 
media  that  are  fluid  at  the  ordinary  temperatures  (below 
4.5°  C.  or  113°  F. )  are  unmailable.  Such  specimens  may  be 
sent  in  media  that  remain  solid  at  ordinary  temperatures. 

3.  No  package  containing  diseased  tissues  shall  be  de- 
livered to  any  representative  of  any  of  said  laboratories 
until  a  permit  shall  have  been  first  issued  by  the  Postmaster 
General  certifying  that  said  institution  has  been  fomid 
entitled,  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  this  regu- 
lation, to  receive  such  specimen. 

4a.  Specimens  of  tubercular  sputum  (whether  disin- 
fected with  carbolic  acid  or  not  disinfected)  shall  be  trans- 
mitted in  a  solid  glass  vial  with  a  mouth  not  less  than  one 
inch  in  diameter  and  capacity  of  not  more  than  two  ounces, 


14  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

closed  by  a  metallic  screw  top  protected  by  a  rubber  or 
felt  washer.  Specimens  of  diphtheria,  typhoid  or  other 
infectious  or  comnmnicable  diseases  or  diseased  tissue  shall 
be  placed  in  a  test-tube  of  tough  glass,  not  over  one-half 
inch  in  diameter  and  not  over  three  and  a  half  inches  in 
length,  closed  with  a  stopper  of  rubber  or  cotton  and  sealed 
with  paraffin  or  covered  with  a  tightly-litting  rubber  cap. 

h.  The  glass  vial  or  test-tube  shall  then  be  placed  in 
a  cylindrical  tin  box  made  of  1.  C.  bright  tin  plate,  with 
soldered  joints,  closed  by  a  metal  screw  cover  with  a  rub- 
ber or  felt  washer.  The  vial  or  test-tube  in  this  box  shall 
be  completely  and  evenly  surrounded  by  absorbent  cotton 
closely  packed. 

c.  The  tin  box  with  its  contents  must  then  be  inclosed 
in  a  closely  fitting  metal,  wooden,  or  papier-mache  block  or 
tube  at  least  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  thick  in  its  thinnest 
part,  of  sufficient  strength  to  resist  rough  handling  and  sup- 
port the  weight  of  the  mails  piled  in  bags.  This  last  tube 
to  be  tightly  closed  with  a  metal  screw  top. 

5.  Specimens  of  blood  dried  on  glass  microscopic  slides 
for  diagnosis  of  malaria  or  typhoid  fever  by  the  Widal  test 
may  be  sent  in  any  strong  mailing  case  which  is  not  liable  to 
breakage  or  loss  of  the  specimen  in  transit. 

6.  .Upon  the  outside  of  every  package  of  diseased  tis- 
sues admitted  to  the  mails  shall  be  written  or  printed  the 
words  "  Specimen  for  bacteriological  examination."  This 
package  to  be  pouched  with  letter  mail.  See  section  49, 
P.  L.  and  R. 

Milk  or  Urine. — The  liquid  should  be  placed  in  a 
tightly  closed  sterile  container  and  packed  in  ice  and 
sawdust. 

Pus. — Pus  should  be  collected  on  a  sterile  cotton  swab 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  15 

that  has  been  sterilized  in  a  test-tube  or  placed  in  a  sterile, 
tightly  stoppered  bottle. 

Fceces. — Fecal  matter  should  be  collected  in  a  clean, 
tightly  stoppered  bottle. 

Blood. — For  serological  diagnosis  of  contagious  abor- 
tion and  glanders  20  to  30  c.c.  of  blood  should  be  ascepti- 
cally  drawn  from  the  j  ugular  vein  of  the  living  animal  into 
sterile  test-tubes  or  bottles  and  closed  with  rubber  stoppers. 
Blood  should  not  be  smeared  on  glass  slides  or  paper. 

Eocternal  Parasites. — Flies,  fleas,  ticks,  and  other 
easily  seen  external  parasites  may  be  collected  readily,  and 
mange  and  scab  mites  included  in  deep  scrapings  from  the 
skin  should  be  mailed  in  a  tightly  stoppered  glass  bottle. 

Internal  Parasites. — Tapeworms,  flukes,  and  round- 
worms should  be  placed  in  a  rubber-stoppered  bottle  con- 
taining 8  per  cent,  formalin,  60  per  cent,  alcohol  or  1-1000 
bichloride  of  mercury. 

Anthrax. — The  specimen  should  consist  of  an  ear  or 
hoof.  These  should  be  used  for  two  reasons :  In  the  first 
place  they  are  extremities,  distantly  situated  from  the  intes- 
tinal tract  from  which  point  in  the  process  of  post-mortem 
decomposition  various  organisms  simulating  the  anthrax 
bacillus  pass  toward  the  periphery  following  the  blood- 
and  lymph-vessels  and  later  pass  directly  through  the  tis- 
sues. Thus  they  reach  the  ear  or  hoof  later  than  most  parts 
of  the  anatomy  and  lessen  the  possibility  of  contaminating 
the  blood  at  those  points,  which  is  an  advantage  to  the 
pathologist  when  examining  for  anthrax  bacilli.  Secondly, 
by  using  the  ear,  little  or  no  blood  escapes  from  the  cadaver 
which  prevents  contaminating  the  premises  or  infection  of 
the  technician,  a  condition  which  might  obtain  if  an  autopsy 
were  performed  to  secure  specimens  of  spleen  or  other 


16  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

organs.  When  more  than  one  tissue  is  sent  to  a  laboratory 
for  bacteriological  examination,  each  should  be  packed  in 
a  separate  container  to  prevent  contamination  of  the  others. 
The  ear  is  placed  in  a  glass  jar,  preferably  a  Mason  fruit 
jar  with  rubber  ring  to  prevent  escape  of  fluid.  This  is  then 
packed  with  ice  and  sawdust  in  a  strong  box.  A  portion  of 
ear  or  other  tissue  may  be  placed  in  a  hollowed-out  potato 
and  shipped.  Cut  a  large  potato  in  halves ;  hollow  out  part 
of  it;  place  specimen  in  the  vacant  space,  place  halves  to- 
gether and  tie  with  a  string,  wrap  in  paper,  pack  in  a  box 
and  mail. 

Blackleg. — Pieces  of  affected  muscle  should  be  put  in 
a  wide-mouthed  bottle  and  tightly  corked  or  sealed  in  a  fruit 
jar.  "  Blackleg  muscle  should  be  covered  with  salt  because 
the  decaying  process  is  arrested  by  salt  and  the  blackleg 
bacilli  are  stimulated  to  the  rapid  formation  of  clostrydian 
forms  and  spores  "  (Muller). 

Malignant  CEdcma  and  Tetanus. — Locally  affected 
parts  should  be  excised,  packed  in  fruit  jars,  and  then  in  ice 
and  sawdust  in  a  box. 

Hemorrliagic  Sejjticcemia. — Portions  of  pneumonic 
lung  and  portions  of  liver  showing  infarcts  and  focal 
necrosis  should  be  selected.  From  these  the  causative  agent 
can  often  be  isolated  in  pure  culture  directly  on  agar  slants. 
These  may  be  packed  as  above  described. 

Tuhercidosis. — Small  specimens  may  be  sent  in  bottles 
or  glass  jars  which  can  be  tightly  closed.  Large  specimens 
should  be  wrapped  in  cheese-cloth  and  oil-cloth,  placed  in 
tin  container,  tightly  closed,  and  then  packed  in  sawdust 
and  ice  in  a  closed  wooden  box. 

Hog  Cholera,  Stmne  Plague,  Swine  Erysipelas. — Por- 
tions of  skin,  kidneys,  lungs,  lymph-glands,  and  intestines 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  17 

are  preferable.  The  intestines  should  include  the  ileocsecal 
valve.    These  may  be  packed  as  other  specimens. 

Bacterial  Dyseiitery,  or  Para-tuberculosis. — About  a 
foot  of  the  ileum  should  be  ligated  in  two  places  so  that  an 
unopened  portion  may  reach  the  laboratory.  This  is  placed 
in  a  glass  jar  and  packed  as  above  described. 

Infectious  Abortion. — A  foetus,  unopened,  and  placenta 
should  be  wrapped  in  cloth,  placed  in  a  tightly  closed  can, 
then  packed  as  other  specimens. 

Babies. — The  head  of  a  small  animal  suspected  of  rabies 
should  be  severed  from  the  body  as  closely  to  the  trunk 
as  possible.  This  facilitates  the  location  of  the  ganglia  to 
be  examined.  The  head  of  a  large  animal  should  be  severed 
in  such  manner  as  to  leave  six  inches  of  the  neck  with  the 
head.  To  lessen  the  weight  the  lower  jaw  may  be  removed 
and  the  head  may  be  cut  in  two  parts  transversely  at  a  point 
just  anterior  to  the  eyes,  and  the  nasal  portion  discarded. 
The  head  should  be  packed  securely  in  a  tin  receptacle 
and  this  packed  in  sawdust  and  ice  in  a  wooden  pail  or  box 
and  tightly  closed. 

Glanders. — Pieces  of  skin,  nasal  septum,  lung  or  lymph- 
gland  showing  nodules  or  ulcers  should  be  carefully  ex- 
cised, tightly  sealed  in  a  fruit  jar  or  other  container  that 
can  be  made  liquid  tight,  then  packed  as  other  specimens. 

Poultry  and  Small  Afiimals. — The  entire  cadaver 
should  be  wrapped  in  cloth,  packed,  and  shipj)ed  as  other 
specimens. 


CHAPTER  II 
AUTOPSY  ROOM 

Room. — An  ideal  autopsy  room  for  teaching  purposes 
is  one  20'  X  28',  with  high  ceihng,  plenty  of  skylight  and 
ventilation.  The  Hoor  should  be  cement,  graded  slightly 
toward  a  central  drain.  The  walls  should  be  cement  or 
enamel  upw^ard  five  feet  from  the  floor  so  that  they  may  be 
readily  cleaned  and  antisepticized  (Fig.  2). 

Large  Table. — A  convenient  autopsy  table  for  large 
animals  is  one  built  somewhat  like  a  truck  except  that  a 
handle  is  not  necessary.  It  is  8'  long,  3'  wide,  and  32" 
high.  The  top  is  more  durable  when  made  of  hard  A\'0()d 
approximately  3"  thick,  covered  with  zinc  or  other  metal 
and  sloped  toward  a  drain  in  the  centre.  Side  leaves  are 
of  no  particular  advantage,  and  when  a  table  is  built  to 
revolve  it  is  seldom  used  for  that  purjiose.  Wheels  under 
the  table  are  necessary  for  convenience  in  moving  it  about 
while  cleaning  the  room.  The  wheels  at  one  end  may  be 
arranged  as  large  castors  which  facilitates  directing  the 
table  in  case  it  should  be  necessary  to  demonstrate  a  subject 
in  an  adjacent  class-room.  The  main  points  necessary  are 
that  the  table  be  simple,  strong,  convenient  and  easily 
cleaned.  It  should  be  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  room, 
as  it  is  necessary  to  work  on  all  sides  of  it. 

Small  Table. — For  small  animals  a  zinc-covered  table 
6'  long,  3'  wide  and  3'  high  is  desirable.  The  surface  should 
slope  toward  a  drain  in  the  centre  and  a  slanting  lip  1" 
high  should  be  placed  on  all  sides  to  prevent  organs  from 
slipping  oif .     This  table  need  not  be  movable,  but  should 

18 


AUTOPSY  ROOM 


19 


20  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

possess  strong  legs  and  be  placed  against  the  wall,  as  a 
small  animal  can  be  moved  about  at  the  convenience  of  the 
autopsist.  Two  temporary  wooden  tables  like  those  used  in 
dissecting  laboratories  may  be  placed  on  either  side  of  the 
small  table.  They  are  necessary,  when  the  latter  is  in  use, 
to  place  the  organs  of  large  animals  upon,  for  observation, 
after  having  been  washed  in  the  tub. 

Instrument  Table. — A  small,  Hght,  metal  instrument 
table  32''  high  and  surface  measurements  30''  X  20"  is 
necessary  during  an  autopsy.  The  instruments  to  be  used 
for  an  autopsy  may  be  taken  from  the  instrument  case  and 
placed  upon  this  table  at  a  point  convenient  to  the  obducent. 

Instrument  Case. — An  instrument  case  may  be  of 
wood  or  glass  and  fastened  against  the  wall.  The  size  must 
depend  upon  the  number  of  instruments  used.  One  4'  high, 
3'  wide  and  1'  deep  is  convenient. 

Desk. — A  writing  desk  must  be  placed  in  one  corner  of 
the  room.  It  should  have  one  or  more  drawers  and  the 
surface  should  slope  forward  somewhat.  One  of  convenient 
measurements  presents  surface  length  of  30",  width  28", 
height  at  highest  point  49"  and  at  lowest  point  46". 

Tub. — For  washing  organs  after  their  removal  from  the 
cadaver  a  tub  should  be  provided.  A  porcelain  tub  showing 
length  of  54",  width  24",  and  depth  18"  is  very  serviceable. 

Basin. — For  cleansing  the  hands  during  and  after  an 
autopsy  a  porcelain  wash  basin  supplied  with  hot  and  cold 
water  should  be  installed. 

Shel^tes. — Shelves  should  be  placed  above  the  wash 
basin  to  hold  bottles  of  antiseptic. 

Water  Pipes. — A  water  pipe  1"  in  diameter  should  be 
placed  over  the  large  and  small  autopsy  tables.  One  rub- 
ber hose  1"  in  diameter  should  extend  from  the  pipe  to  the 


AUTOPSY  ROOM  21 

small  table.  Two  such  pieces  of  rubber  hose  should  extend 
from  the  water  pipe  to  the  large  table,  one  at  either  end. 
AVhen  not  in  use  a  hook  arrangement  holds  them  above  the 
table.  This  arrangement  of  the  water  hose  is  necessary  to 
wash  blood  from  the  organs  and  tissues  before  their  removal. 
For  cleaning  the  floor  and  walls  a  rubber  hose  1"  in  diame- 
ter and  30'  long  should  be  provided. 

Steeilizer. — An  instrument  sterilizer  is  necessary  for 
use  after  the  autopsy  of  animals  dead  of  infectious  diseases, 
such  as  glanders  and  tuberculosis. 

Scale. — A  scale  marked  with  the  metric  system  for 
weighing  organs  and  tumors  is  necessary. 

Vise. — A  vise-like  arrangement  is  convenient  for  hold- 
ing the  head  while  removing  the  brain  and  for  the  sawing 
of  long  bones. 

Platforms. — ^Several  temporary  slat  platforms  should 
be  placed  upon  the  cement  floor  around  the  tables  to  pre- 
vent slipping.  Those  convenient  for  a  room  20'  X  30'  are 
7'  X  3'  and  the  top  is  3"  from  the  floor.  Each  platform  is 
made  of  twelve  j^ieces  of  hardwood  2"  X  2"  by  7'  laid 
lengthwise  and  four  pieces  2"  X  9"  by  3'  laid  crosswise  and 
securely  nailed. 

Refuse  Cans. — Large  animals  in  cities  must  be  re- 
moved soon  after  the  autopsy.  For  small  animals  metal 
refuse  cans  20"  in  diameter  and  30"  high  with  close-fitting 
covers  may  be  used.  An  antiseptic  must  be  placed  over  the 
cadavers  kept  in  this  manner  and  the  cans  must  be  emptied 
frequently.  A  crematory  might  be  used  to  advantage.  In  the 
field  where  conveniences  are  few,  choose  a  grass  plot  when 
possible  upon  which  to  conduct  an  autopsy.  Have  a  few 
clean  boards  upon  which  to  lay  the  organs  as  they  are  taken 
out.  Be  provided  with  several  pails  of  water,  soap,  towels,  etc. 


CHAPTER  III 
POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 

Vircliow's  post-mortem  knife  (Fig.  3),  and  cartilage 
knife  ( Fig.  4 ) ,  are  steel  instriiiiients  with  hollow  handles. 
They  are  used  on  the  cadavers  of  large  animals  and  are  very 
serviceable  when  properly  taken  care  of.  They  should  be 
kept  sharp  with  a  stone,  not  a  steel.  Ajjj^lication  of  too 
much  force  on  the  knife  when  it  is  dull  causes  injury  to  the 
blade  and  may  break  the  instrument  at  the  junction  of  the 
blade  and  handle.  One  should  make  a  practice  of  the  con- 
stant use  of  these  knives  in  autopsy  work,  and  avoid  the 
tendency  to  substitute  a  butcher  knife,  since  systematic 
post-mortem  work  is  not  butchery.  When  circumstances 
compel  one  to  resort  to  the  use  of  a  meat  knife  he  shoidd 
select  a  short  steel  instrument  with  a  handle  which  forms 
a  straight  line  with  the  cutting  edge  of  the  blade  at  the 
junction  (Fig.  .5)  so  that  the  heel  of  the  blade  does  not 
catch  in  the  tissues  when  the  knife  is  drawn  toward  the 
autopsist  while  making  an  incision. 

In  using  the  j^ost-mortem  knife  one  should  grasp  it 
with  a  full  hand  grip  as  though  to  cut  bread  (Fig.  6). 
Sufficient  pressure  can  be  brought  to  bear  upon  it  in  this 
position  for  any  reasonable  purpose  and  the  depth  of  the 
incision  may  be  regulated  with  nuich  greater  accuracy. 
Beginners  are  sometimes  inclined  to  take  the  knife  as  they 
would  a  pen  or  scalpel  while  dissecting,  and  they  frequently 
seize  it  as  a  dagger  would  be  held.  When  used  like  a  scalpel 
(Fig.  6)  not  enough  pressure  can  be  exerted,  and  when  held 
like  a  dagger  (Fig.  6)  the  force  cannot  be  regulated  and 

22 


M 


I  Ens 


»  c  g 


24  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

one  experiences  difficulty  in  making  a  straight  incision. 
Both  these  positions  are  unhandy,  prevent  free  arm  and 
shoulder  movement,  and  should  not  be  employed. 

Little's  case  knife  (Fig.  7)  gives  excellent  service  in 
autopsy  work  on  small  animals. 

Pick's  myelotome  (Fig.  8)  is  used  for  severing  the 
spinal  cord  at  right  angles  when  the  brain  and  cord  are 
to  be  removed  separately. 


Pie  6. — The  "pen-hold"  at  the  left,  and  the  "dagger-hold"  in  the  centre  are  improper. 
The  "bread  cutting"  position  to  the  right  is  the  proper  way  to  hold  a  large  knife  in  doing 
autopsy  work.     The  thumb  may  slip  a  little  more  to  the  left  side  of  the  knife. 

Virchow's  brain  knife  (Fig.  9)  has  a  two-edged,  round 
end,  thin,  flexible  blade  and  hollow  handle.  It  is  used  in 
opening  the  lateral  ventricles  of  the  brain  and  for  incising 
the  cerebrum,  cord  and  cerebellum.  It  should  be  kept 
moist  when  in  use  to  prevent  the  brain  tissue  from  sticking 
to  the  blade. 

Dissecting  scalpels  of  various  sizes  (Fig.  10)  may  be 
used  for  autopsy  of  small  animals,  and  with  a  gi'oove  direc- 
tor (Fig.  11)  for  incising  meninges. 

Incising  knives  are  used  in  making  long  incisions  in  the 
liver,  muscles,  lungs,  and  in  opening  the  kidneys  (Fig.  12). 

Monosmith's  enucleation  knife   (Fig.   13)    is  used  in 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


25 


removing  the  ej^ebcall.  The 
blade  curves  in  such  manner  as 
to  cut  the  attachments  and 
avoid  injury  to  the  sclera. 

A  spearhead  needle  and  a 
probe  set  in  either  end  of  a  hol- 
low metal  handle  (Fig.  14)  are 
convenient  for  finer  work  on 
the  eye  and  ear. 

A  harpoon  needle  (Fig. 
15)  is  employed  in  removing 
the  optic  lens. 

Tyrrell's  blunt  and  sharp 
hooks  set  in  either  end  of  a  hol- 
low metal  handle  (Fig.  16)  are 
convenient  in  removing  the  ear 
ossicles  and  for  optic  work. 

A  common  steel  (Fig.  17) 
is  necessary  to  keep  meat 
knives  sharp  when  one  is  com- 
pelled to  use  them. 

A  7'aspatory  (Fig.  18)  is 
used  to  scrape  tissues  from 
bones  when  close  examina- 
tion of  the  bone  substance  is 
necessary. 

A  pith  (Fig.  5B)  is  occa- 
sionally used  in  destroying  ani- 
mals. The  point  is  placed  over 
the  space  between  the  occipital 
bone  and  atlas  on  the  dorsal 
median  line  of  the  neck,  oppo- 


<^   ' 


KJ 


Fig.  7 


Fig.  8 


Fig.  7. — Little's  case  knife  for  general 
autopsy  work  on  small  animals. 

Fig.  8. — Pick's  myelotome.  Used  for 
severing  the  spinal  cord  at  right  angles 
when  the  brain  and  cord  are  to  be  re- 
moved separately. 


(:i.J 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

site  the  lateral  wing  of  the  atlas,  and  the  head 
of  the  pith  is  struck  sharply  with  the  palm  of 
the  hand.  The  animal  may  be  cast  first,  or 
placed  beside  a  step,  table  or  other  elevation 
which  will  enable  one  to  conveniently  perform 
the  operation  without  injury  to  himself. 


i 


^ 


Fig.   0. — Virchow's   brain  knife.     This  thin,  flexible,  two-edged  knife,  with 
rounded  end,  is  used  in  pertorming  technic  on  the  brain.     It  should  be  mois- 
tened before  using  to  prevent  brain  tissue  adhering  to  it. 
Fig    10. — Dissecting  scalpel  used  in  finer  work  on  large  animals  and  general  technic  en 
small   animals. 

Fig.  11. — Groove  director  used  with  small  scalpel  in  cutting  the  meninges. 
Fig.  12. — Incising  knives,  used  in  making  long,  smooth  incisions   through  the  liver,  kid- 
neys, lungs,  udder,  and  muscles. 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


27 


Championniere's,  Es march's,  and  McE wen's  hone 
chisels  (Figs.  19,  20,  21,  respectively)  are  used  in  cutting 
the  nasal  and  cranial  bones  in  exposing  the  nasal  septum 


Fig.  14. — Spearhead  needle  and  probe  used  in  technic  on  ej  e  and  ear. 


Fig.  15. — Harpoon  needle  for  removing  the  optic  lens. 

mi 


Fig.  16. — Tyrrell's  blunt  and  sharp  hooks  are  ver>-  useful  in  work  on  the  middle-ear,  the  eye 
small  blood-vessels  and  nerves. 


BC 


Fig.  17.— Steel. 


Fig.  19. — Championniere's  bone  chisel.     Used  in  cutting  the  nasal  and  cranial  bones. 

and  sinuses,  the  brain,  cord,  and  structures  of  the  foot.  As 
field  substitutes  a  steel  cold  chisel  or  brick  chisel  may  be 
utilized   (Fig.  22). 


28  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Esmarclis  hone  gouge  is  useful  for  bone  work. 
Bachiotomy  chisels  or  curved  handle  bone  chisels  (Figs. 
23,  24)  are  used  in  cutting  the  vertebrse  of  large  animals, 


Fig.  20. — ^Esmarch's  bone  chisel.     It  is  very  heavy  and  is  used  on  the  vertebrae  of  large  animals. 


Fig.  21. — McEwen's  bone  chisel.     This  instrument  is  lighter  and  is  used  on  the  sole  of  the 
foot  and  dental  alveoli. 


FiQ   22. — Brick  chisels  much  reduced.     They  may  be  u-i-d  a.^  bone  ciii-cU 


Fig.  23.— Rachiotomy  chisel  for  cutting  the  cranial  bones  in  removal  of  the  calvarium. 


Fig.  24. — Rachiotomy  chisel  for  cutting  nasal  bones  in  removal  of  turbinated  bones. 


severing  long  bones  of  small  animals  for  examination  of  the 
bone-marrow,  and  in  the  technic  of  the  head  and  foot. 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS  29 

The  cross  chisel  is  -a  combination  hammer,  chisel  and 
round-edged  wedge.  The  upright  has  a  very  sharp  edge. 
The  length  of  the  cross  piece  is  12  cm.  (4>)4"),  that  of  the 
upright  13  cm.  (ca  5y\") .  This  instrument  is  used  in  pry- 
ino;  off  the  calvarium  of  small  animals  after  the  cranial 
bones  have  been  cut,  and  it  is  used  for  removing  the  perios- 


FiG.  25. — Cross  chisel  and  proper  position  for  use  of  the  chisel  end. 
Fig.    26. — Dexler'e  rachiotome  (Schmey). 

teum.  The  cross  chisel  (Fig.  25)  is  made  like  a  capital  T. 
To  use  it  grasp  the  instrument  so  that  it  lies  in  the  palm 
of  the  hand  with  the  upright  sharp  chisel  portion  passing 
backward  and  downward  below  the  wrist.  The  right  half 
of  the  cross-piece  with  the  hammer  head  should  lie  between 
the  thumb  and  forefinger,  and  the  left  half  of  the  cross- 
piece  or  wedge  end  should  pass  between  the  first  two  fingers. 


30 


VETERLNARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


Fig.  27 


Fig.  28 


Fig.  27. — Brunetti's  left  curved  rachio- 
tome  for  opening  the  spinal  canal  of  small 
animals. 

Fig.  28. — Brunetti's  right  curved  rachio- 
tome  for  opening  spinal  canal  ol  small 
animals. 


Upon  closing  the  hand  the  last 
three  fingers  grasp  the  upright 
or  chisel  branch,  the  thumb  and 
the  base  of  the  forefinger  en- 
close the  hammer  end,  and  the 
fu'st  finger  closes  over  the  left 
half  of  the  cross-piece  or  wedge 
(Fig.  25). 

Deoclefs  rachiotome  (Fig. 
26)  presents  a  loop  handle  and 
a  head  opposite  the  cliisel  edge 
to  strike  upon.  The  handle  is 
placed  at  right  angles  to  the 
cutting  edge  instead  of  in  a 
direct  line  with  it. 

Brunettts  rach  ioto m e s 
(Figs.  27,  28)  are  right  and 
left  curved  spinal  chisels  used 
for  opening  the  spinal  canal  of 
small  animals.  A  probe  point 
extends  2  cm.  bej^ond  one  end 
of  the  cutting  edge  to  guide  the 
chisel  when  it  is  placed  in  the 
canal  and  to  prevent  the  chisel 
from  slipping  off  the  vertebra? 
at  each  impact  of  the  mallet. 

A  side  chisel  is  a  steel  in- 
strument with  a  cutting  edge 
on  one  side  of  the  blade  instead 
of  at  the  end  ( Fig.  29 ) .  It  has 
a  sharp  point  projecting  later- 
ally from  one  side  of  the  end 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


31 


in  the  direction  of  the  cutting  edge.  It  is  used  in  cutting 
vertebrae  of  small  animals  when  opening  the  spinal  canal. 
A  head  is  made  on  the  back  of  the  chisel  to  receive  the 
impact  of  the  mallet.  It  may  be  used  to  cut  the  incom- 
pletely sawed  portions  of  bone  in  removing  the  brain,  and 
the  point  may  be  used  in  lifting  the  calvarium  after  all  the 
bones  have  been  cut. 


Fig.  30. — Post-mortem  ax  for  cutting  the  ribs  and  removing  the  spinal  cord. 

The  post-mortem  aoc  ( Fig.  30 )  should  have  a  straight 
cutting  edge  14  cm.  (5l/4")  in  length.  The  depth  should 
be  17.5  cm.  (7")  and  the  handle  45  cm.  ( 18") .  The  weight 
is  approximately  1.5  kg.  (3.3  lbs.).  The  ax  will  be  found 
very  convenient  for  cutting  the  ribs  of  large  animals  and 
for  cutting  the  vertebra?  of  large  animals  in  removing  the 
cord.  It  is  well  to  have  the  handle  corrugated  to  prevent  it 
slipping  from  the  hands. 

The  steel  hammer  hook    (Fig.  31)    is  a  combination 


32 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


wedge,  hammer  and  hook.    The  wedge  is  used  in  breaking 
unsawed  angles  of  bone  in  removing  the  brain,  the  hammer 


Pjq  31  — Steel  hammer  hook.  The  hook  is  notched  so  that  it  will  not  slip  and  is  used 
to  pull  off  the  calvarium  after  the  bones  have  been  sawed  and  chiselled.  The  wedge  is  used  to 
pry  up  the  edge  of  the  calvarium. 


F,f.    .•?2.— Rib  hook.     Used  to  hold  the  side  up  while  the  diaphragm  is  being  cut. 

llfilllfi 


Fig.  33.— Metal-bound  wood  mallet  used  with  chisels  and  rachiotomes  in  cutting  bone  and  hoof. 

for  tapping  bones  to  determine  whether  they  have  been 
sawed  completely  through,  and  the  hook  is  used  in  pulling 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


33 


the  calvarium  free  from  the  skull  of  large  animals  after  the 
bones  have  been  severed.    The  hook  at  the  end  of  the  handle 


34. — Rawhide  mallet.     This  instrument  is  smaller  and  lighter  ths 
used  for  the  same  general  purpose. 


vood  mallet  and   is 


Fig.  36.-Costotomes  used  in  cutting  the  ribs  of  small  animals  in  removal  of  the  sternum. 


is  provided  with  sharp  notches  to  prevent  slipping  when 
hooked  under  the  edge  of  the  calvarium. 

3 


34 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


A  )'ib  hook  (Fig.  32)  is  a  steel  hook  with  a  loop  handle 
used  to  hold  the  ribs  up  while  the  diaphragm  is  being- 
severed,  and  to  remove  the  side  after  it  has  been  freed  from 
the  body.    It  is  6"  long. 


Fig.  37. — Bone-cutting  forceps.     The  forceps  have  short,  heavy  blades  and  are  used  in  remov- 
ing the  brain  and  cord  of  small  animals  and  exposing  nasal  passages. 

A  wood  mallet  (Fig.  33)  with  each  striking  sm-face 
metal  bound  is  used  with  chisels  in  cutting  bone  and  hoof. 

A  rawhide  mallet  (Fig.  34)  is  used  with  chisels  on  small 
animals. 

Iron  pinchers  (Fig.  35)  are  invaluable  in  removing  the 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


35 


sole  and  wall  of  the  hoof.  It  should  have  handles  35  em. 
(14")  long  and  the  diameter  of  the  jaws  should  be  9  em. 
(3.5"). 

Costotomcs  (Fig.  36)  are  instruments  used  in  eutting 
the  ribs  of  small  annuals.     The  blades  are  eurved  and  the 


ting  thin  bone, 


nt  has  straight,  pointed  blades  and  is 


Fig.  38. — Cartilage  shears.     This  instrunionu  uat 

'  the  turbinates,  cartilage  ot  the  na-,ar,  beptuni,  and  sternal  cartilages. 


-Enterutonie  showing  one  blunt  point  which  is  longer  than  the  other.     It  is  used  in 
opening  the  intestines. 


Fig.  40. — Small  scissors  which 


re  one  point  blunt.     It  is  used  as 
small  animals. 


enterotome  for  very 


hook-like  blade  may  be  notched  and  so  divided  that  the 
other  blade  passes  through  it. 

Bonc-cidtiug  forceps {Yig.  37) have  short,  heavy  blades 
placed  at  various  angles  to  the  handles.  They  are  especially 
useful  in  cutting  the  bones  of  the  skull  and  vertebra?  of  small 
animals  in  removing  the  brain  and  cord. 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


Fig.  41. — Small  scissors  with  straight  and  curved  blades  for  opening  hearts  and  intestines  of 
very  small  animals. 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS  37 

Cartilage  shears  (Fig.  38)  have  straight  blades  which 
are  thinner  than  those  of  the  bone  forceps. 

An  enterotome  (Fig.  39)  is  a  scissors  with  detachable 
blades,  one  of  which  is  longer  than  the  other  and  blunt.  It 
is  used  in  opening  small  and  large  intestines,  vagina,  uterus, 
urethra  and  bladder  of  male  and  female  and  sometimes  in 
opening  the  heart. 

Small  scissors  are  necessary.  Various  sizes  and  shapes 
are  useful.    For  opening  the  intestines  of  small  animals  and 


Fig.  42. — Artery  scissors  used  for  opening  small  blood-vessels  and  intestines  of  birds. 

fowls  a  small  scissors  with  one  half  blunt  blade  is  used 
(Fig.  40) .  Those  with  straight  and  curved  blades  are  used 
in  opening  very  small  hearts  and  intestines  (Fig.  41) . 

Artery  scissors  with  straight  and  bent  blades,  one  of 
which  is  blunt  and  longer  than  the  other,  are  used  in  opening 
small  blood-vessels  ( Fig.  42 ) . 

Forceps. — Various  sizes  of  plain  (Fig.  43),  and  rat- 
tooth  straight  (Fig.  44),  and  cui-ved  (Fig.  45)  forceps  are 
used  in  picking  up  parasites,  removing  petuitary  body,  ear 
ossicles,  holding  the  cerebral  and  spinal  meninges  of  small 


38 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS  39 

animals  while  they  are  incised,  and  in  removing  skin  and 
organs  from  small  animals. 

Dura  and  hcemostatic  forcej^s  are  useful  in  removing 
arteries,  turbinated  bones,  nasal  septum,  holding  meninges, 
tendons,  tendon  sheaths,  ligaments,  etc.  (Fig.  46) . 


Fig    46.— Dura  and  hemostatic  forceps  used  to  hold  meninges,  turbinated  bones    nasal  sep- 
tum, blood-vessels,  nerves,  tendons,  etc,  while  they  are  being  cut  or  ablated. 

Tumor  forceps  are  used  in  extirpating  tumors,  masses 
of  muscle  tissue,  turbinated  bones,  and  necrotic  tissue 
(Fig.  47). 

Bone-holding  forceps  (Fig.  48)  are  employed  in  hold- 


40 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


•/d       £ 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENTS 


41 


ing  the  spine  of  small  animals  while  the  canal  is  being 
opened,  portions  of  temporal  bone  in  opening  the  middle- 
ear,  small  bones  for  transverse  section,  and  turbinated  bones 
of  large  animals.  After  decapitation  of  dogs  or  cats  sus- 
pected of  rabies  an  attendant  can  hold  the  head  firm  for 
removal  of  the  calvarium  by  grasping  the  nose  or  upper 
jaw  with  these  forceps. 


Fig.  50. — Frame  saw.    Used  on  the  bones  of  the  head  and  pelvis. 


Fig.  51. — Small  frame  si 


A  large  blade  saw  is  necessary  to  saw  large  bones  longi- 
tudinally, and  in  sawing  through  the  head  of  large  animals, 
through  the  pelvic  symphysis,  and  through  the  wall  of  the 
hoof  (Fig.  49). 

A  frame  saw  is  employed  on  large  animals  in  sawing 
the  nasal  and  cranial  bones,  shaft  of  the  iliimi,  long  bones 
transversely,  and  in  small  animals  in  transversely  severing 


42 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


the  spine  in  the  sacral  region  to  start  the  process  of  opening 
the  canal  with  bone  forceps  or  rachiotoniy  chisels  ( Fig.  50 ) . 

A  small  frame  satv  is  used  on  small  animals  (Fig.  51) . 

Charriere's  blade  sate  is' used  in  sawing  the  cranial  and 
nasal  bones  of  small  animals  (Fig.  52) . 


Fig.  52. — Charriere's  blade  saw. 


This  instrument  is  used  in  work  on  the  nasal  and  cranial 
bones  of  small  animals. 


Fig.  54.-:-Kellj's  skull  saw  for  removing  calvarium  of  very  small  animals 


Fig.  55. — Single  blade  rachiotomy  saw. 


Langenheclc's  blade  saw  is  verj^  narrow  and  is  conve- 
nient for  finer  work  about  the  teeth,  the  head  in  removing 
the  eyes  attached  to  the  brain,  and  on  very  small  animals 
and  fowls  (Fig.  53). 


POST-MORTEM  INSTRUMENT 


43 


Kelly's  skull  saw  is  convenient  for  removing  the  cal- 
varimn  of  small  animals   (Fig.  .54). 

A  single  blade  rachiotomy  saw  is  one  used  in  severing 


Fig.  57.— Folding  steel  rule  used  in  measuring  tissues. 


PET.v6T..N»T.co.  iiunntiimiimi 


iiiHHiiiiiiiitiir 


illUMMmMMMMI        '^.-^^ 


iinniiiHtiiiiini        .^i M 


5 


Fig.  58. — Needles  used  in  making  cosmetic  postmortems. 

the  vertebrae  of  small  animals  in  removing  the  spinal  cord 
(Fig.  55). 

Leur's  double  blade  adjustable  raeluotomy  saw  is  used 
in  removing  the  spinal  cord  (Fig.  56) . 


44  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

A  hone  or  steel  rule  graded  in  centimetres  on  one  side 
and  inches  on  the  other  is  necessary  in  measuring  organs. 
A  folding  rule  is  most  convenient  (Fig.  57) . 

Post-7norte7n  needles  are  used  in  sewing  the  cadaver  to- 
gether in  making  a  cosmetic  postmortem  (Fig.  58) . 

Graduates  are  required  for  the  measurement  of  cavity 
fluids.    They  should  range  in  capacity  from  10  to  1000  c.c. 

Measuring  cups  of  one-quarter,  one-half  and  one  litre 


Fig.  59. — Magnifying  glass.     This  glass  is  useful  in  the  examination  of  parasites,  ingesta,  cut 
surfaces  of  organs,  etc. 

capacity  are  convenient  for  collecting  and  determining  the 
quantity  of  fluid  found  in  the  thoracic  and  abdominal 
cavities. 

Pipettes  are  very  useful  in  removing  small  quantities  of 
fluid  from  the  brain  cavities  and  from  the  pericardial  sac. 
They  should  range  in  capacity  from  1  to  100  c.c. 

A  magnifying  glass  is  useful  in  the  examination  of 
small  lesions  and  objects  (Fig.  59). 


CHAPTER  IV 
EXTERNAL  EXAMINATION 

Before  the  autopsy  of  an  animal  is  begun,  a  verj^  care- 
ful examination  of  its  exterior  should  be  made. 

Signs  of  Death  or  Signa  Mortis. — To  determine 
the  presence  of  death  one  should  touch  the  cornea  of  the 
eye  with  the  finger  to  test  its  reflex  sensibility,  observe  the 
flank  and  nostrils  for  signs  of  respiration,  apply  the  ear  to 
the  thorax  to  detect  cardiac  action  and  respiratory  sounds, 
and  flex  the  extremities  to  determine  the  presence  of  rigor 
mortis. 

Apparent  Death. — This  name  is  applied  to  a  con- 
dition in  which  all  the  vital  functions  are  depressed  to  the 
lowest  possible  degree,  when  only  by  great  care  in  exam- 
ination of  the  seemingly  dead  body  can  there  be  detected 
feeble  cardiac  contractions  and  occasional  faint  respiratory 
movements,  a  condition  accompanied  by  the  loss  of  con- 
sciousness and  sensibility,  and  by  reduction  of  the  body 
temperature.  In  recently  born  animals  this  condition  is 
seen  quite  frequently,  lasting  perhaps  for  hours;  in  this 
connection  it  is  perhaps  due  to  a  premature  separation 
of  the  placenta,  aspiration  of  the  amniotic  fluid,  compres- 
sion of  the  umbilical  cord  or  to  anaemia  (Kitt). 

Cooling  of  Cadaver  or  Algor  Mortis. — After  death 
the  cadaver  cools,  usually  in  from  one  to  twenty-four  hours, 
depending  upon  the  surrounding  temperature  and  exposure 
to  air  currents.  There  is  sometimes  a  post-mortem  rise 
of  temperature  of  a  few  degrees  for  several  hours,  due  to  a 
continuance  of  tissue  metabolism,  and  a  failure  of  blood 

45 


46  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

cooling  or  heat  dissipation,  following  cessation  of  lung  and 
peripheral  capillary  circulation. 

The  Eye  After  Death. — No  reflex  action  is  shown 
upon  touching  the  cornea,  which  is  opaque  and  dull;  the 
pupils  are  dilated;  the  eyeball  has  lost  its  tenseness  and 
may  be  somewhat  shrunken  from  the  evaporation  of  fluids. 
The  eyelids  are  usually  partly  closed  and  rigid  during  rigor 
mortis. 

CADAATiRic  LiviDiTY  OR  HyposTxVSIs. — After  the  skin 
has  been  removed  from  an  animal  that  has  been  dead  for  a 
few  hours,  bluish-red  spots  may  be  seen  externally  in  the 
subcutis  of  the  side  upon  which  the  animal  has  been  lying. 
This  is  due  to  the  contraction  of  the  elastic  artery  walls 
after  death,  which  forces  the  blood  into  the  veins,  and  to  the 
gravitation  of  the  blood  within  the  veins  to  the  most  de- 
pendent parts  of  the  body,  constituting  hypostatic  conges- 
tion or  hypostasis. 

These  livid  spots  may  coalesce,  forming  one  larger  area, 
the  surface  of  which  is  not  elevated,  as  the  blood  remains 
within  the  veins  and  does  not  escape  from  them  into  the 
perivascular  tissue.  On  cut  section  the  blood  flows  freely 
from  the  vessel,  but  is  not  seen  in  the  adjacent  tissue.  Ex- 
ternal pressiu'e  upon  these  areas  with  the  fingers  or  with 
the  heel  of  the  hand  may  force  the  blood  through  the  lumen 
of  the  vessels  away  from  the  hypostatic  sjjot,  relieving  the 
tissue  of  its  lividity. 

A  hemorrhage  in  the  same  position  differs  from  a  livid 
spot  in  that  the  surface  of  the  hemorrhage  is  elevated.  The 
blood  escapes  through  the  blood-vessel  walls  into  the  adja- 
cent connective  tissue,  causing  it  to  bulge.  Pressure  upon 
the  hemorrhage  by  the  fingers  or  heel  of  the  hand  fails  to 
reduce  the  process,  as  the  blood  is  outside  the  vessels  in  the 


EXTERNAL  EXAMINATION  47 

connective  tissue,  and  on  cut  section  for  the  same  reason 
blood  does  not  flow  so  freely  as  from  an  area  of  hypostatic 
congestion.  Internally  hypostasis  occurs  in  the  lung,  kid- 
ney, side  of  the  great  colon,  caecum,  and  loops  of  the  small 
intestines  on  the  side  upon  which  the  animal  has  been  lying. 

Hypostasis  and  hemorrhage  must  not  be  confused  with 
areas  of  imbibition  of  blood  pigment.  These  areas  occur 
in  the  same  position  and  develop  following  hypostatic  con- 
gestion. They  are  red  instead  of  bluish-red,  not  elevated, 
the  color  is  uniformly  distributed,  and  no  blood  escapes 
after  incising  the  areas.  Imbibition  is  one  of  the  first  signs 
of  post-mortem  decomposition.  Upon  the  breaking  down 
of  the  red  blood-corpuscles  in  the  process  of  decomposition 
the  haemoglobin  escapes  into  the  blood  plasma,  staining  it 
red.  This  colored  fluid  is  imbibed  or  soaked  up  by  the 
tissues  which  have  lost  their  vitality  after  death,  and  are 
uniformly  stained  red  or  pink.  This  condition  may  also 
be  seen  along  the  margins  of  congested  veins.  The  vein  and 
its  branches  may  appear  deep  blue  or  purple  in  color,  and 
present  a  margin  from  a  quarter  to  a  half  inch  in  width, 
which  is  red  near  the  vessel  and  shades  out  to  a  light  pink  at 
its  extremity. 

Rigor  Mortis. — Post-mortem  muscular  rigidity  is  a 
condition  in  which  coagulation  of  the  muscle  albumin  causes 
the  muscles  to  become  set.  Rigor  mortis  begins  immediately 
after  death  in  some  cases,  and  only  after  four  to  twenty- 
four  hours  in  other  conditions.  It  lasts  usually  twenty- 
four  hours,  but  may  sometimes  continue  forty-eight  hours 
or  longer;  in  fact  it  disappears  when  decomposition  sets  in. 
Post-mortem  rigidity  appears  first  in  the  eyelids  and  masse- 
ter  muscles  and  gradually  spreads  backward  over  the  entire 
cadaver;  it  disappears  in  the  same  manner.     Rigor  mortis 


48  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

sets  in  quickly  and  completely  in  heavy  muscular  animals 
which  have  been  sick  but  a  short  time  and  develops  by  slow 
degrees  in  animals  showing  cachexia.  To  determine  the 
presence  of  this  condition  one  should  flex  the  extremities  and 
attempt  to  open  the  mouth  of  the  cadaver.  In  fully  devel- 
oped rigor  mortis  the  limbs  may  be  flexed  only  after  the 
application  of  considerable  force. 

Appearance  of  Post-mortem  Decomposition. — 
Putrefaction  usually  occurs  in  from  six  to  thirty-six  hours, 
depending  upon  the  condition  of  the  animal  at  the  time 
of  death  and  the  conditions  of  atmospheric  moisture  and 
temperature.  The  bacteria  which  are  always  present  in  the 
intestinal  tract  produce  gi'eat  quantities  of  gas  by  fermen- 
tation of  the  ingesta.  The  intestines  become  distended  and 
great  force  is  exerted  against  the  diaphragm  and  abdominal 
walls.  The  abdomen  appears  round  and  greatly  bloated; 
the  skin  is  tight  and  a  resonant  sound  is  produced  by  tapping 
upon  the  belly  wall.  The  pressure  in  the  pelvis  causes  the 
rectum  to  protrude  and  evert.  The  force  against  the  dia- 
phragm causes  blood  and  froth  to  be  forced  from  the  lungs 
out  of  the  nostrils.  The  diaphragm  may  rupture  and  the 
intestines  enter  the  thoracic  cavity.  The  post-mortem  rup- 
ture may  be  distinguished  from  the  ante-mortem  rupture 
by  the  absence  of  hemorrhage  in  the  ragged  margin  of  the 
former,  since  the  blood  has  ceased  to  flow  after  death.  Rigor 
mortis  disappears  and  hypostasis  develops  into  imbibition 
of  blood  coloring  matter.  The  putrefactive  bacteria  pass 
from  the  intestines  first  through  the  blood-  and  lymph- 
vessels  and  then  directly  through  the  body  structures  in 
every  direction,  breaking  down  the  tissues  into  carbonic 
acid,  compounds  of  ammonia  and  water.  The  extremities 
are  the  last  to  decompose  because  situated  farthest  from 


EXTERNAL  EXAMINATION  49 

the  intestinal  tract.  Gas  may  distend  the  subcutis  so  that 
the  skin  crepitates  upon  pressure  and  may  cause  the  four 
extremities  to  stand  out  from  the  body  hke  posts.  Upon 
incising  the  skin  gas  escapes  with  considerable  force.  Soft 
skin  over  the  abdomen,  especially  if  white,  turns  green, 
brown  and  almost  black  (post-mortem  pigment) ,  probably 
due  to  the  action  of  hydrogen  sulphide  gas,  produced  by 
the  effect  of  the  putrefactive  bacteria  upon  the  iron  of  the 
haemoglobin,  forming  iron  sulphide  or  other  compounds 
of  iron  and  sulphur.  Putrid  odors  are  given  off  by  the 
decomposing  cadaver. 

Visible  Mucous  Membranes. — The  eyes,  ears,  nos- 
trils, mouth,  anus,  vulva,  prepuce,  and  penis  should  be 
closely  noted.  Intense  paleness  may  indicate  internal  or 
external  hemorrhage,  visceral  congestion  or  oligocythsemia. 
Intense  yellow  color  indicates  icterus;  deep  blue  or  purj)le 
may  indicate  cyanosis,  which  may  be  due  to  gravitation 
if  the  part  be  dependent,  or  to  disturbances  of  the  heart 
under  various  conditions.  These  external  signs  constitute 
guides  for  internal  examination.  When  ana?mia  is  indi- 
cated by  pale,  visible  mucous  membranes,  one  should 
search  for  signs  of  external  hemorrhage ;  upon  opening  the 
cadaver  he  should  look  for  internal  hemorrhages.  If  these 
be  absent,  he  should  open  a  long  bone,  as  the  femur,  and  ex- 
amine the  yellow  bone-marrow  of  this  hjemopoietic  organ. 
In  dogs  and  cats  suffering  from  hehiiinthiasis  the  yellow 
bone-marrow  is  red  and  gelatinous,  due  to  its  active  attempt 
to  replenish  red  blood-corpuscles  which  are  destroyed  by  the 
absorbed  hemolytic  toxin  of  the  intestinal  parasites  and  to 
the  disturbed  nutritive  conditions.  The  indication  of  icterus 
by  yellow-colored,  visible,  mucous  membranes  necessitates  a 
close  examination  of  the  duodenum  for  catarrhal  duodenitis, 
4 


50  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

and  of  the  ampulla  of  Vater  which  may  be  greatly  swollen 
and  in  that  manner  close  the  bile-duct.  The  ductus  chole- 
dochus  should  be  opened  to  the  gall-bladder  or  liver  and 
examined  for  cholangitis,  gall-stones,  or  parasites,  and  the 
liver  should  be  observed  for  cirrhosis,  etc.  The  purple  or 
cyanotic  mucous  membrane  indicates  that  a  careful  exam- 
ination should  be  made  of  the  cardiac  and  respiratory 
organs.  One  should  look  for  valvular  lesions  of  the  heart, 
exudative  pleurisy,  pneumonia,  pressure  upon  the  dia- 
phragm by  liquid  or  distended  abdominal  organs. 

Natural  Openings. — Sanguinolent  discharge  from 
the  anus  shows  the  necessity  for  close  examination  of  the 
intestinal  tract  for  hemorrhagic  conditions  which  may  be 
the  seat  of  trouble.  Bloody  discharge  from  the  nostrils  indi- 
cates that  the  nasal  passages  and  lungs  should  be  carefully 
observed  when  the  internal  examination  is  made.  Green 
liquid  food  material  running  from  the  nose  or  mouth  points 
toward  possible  lesions  of  the  stomach  or  intestines,  espe- 
cially in  the  horse,  although  the  stomach  need  not  neces- 
sarily be  ruptured.  Purulent  discharges  from  the  nostrils 
show  that  the  nasal  sinuses,  nasal  mucous  membrane,  gut- 
tural pouches,  and  lungs  should  be  carefully  inspected  for 
inflammatory  conditions.  Thus  it  may  be  seen  that  a  careful 
examination  of  the  visible  mucous  membranes  and  natural 
openings  may  produce  a  valuable  guide  to  the  seat  of  trouble 
and  gi'catly  assist  in  making  the  internal  examination. 

Extremities. — The  limbs  should  be  manipulated  to  de- 
termine the  presence  of  rigor  mortis  and  fractures.  The 
soles  of  the  feet  should  be  closely  inspected  for  street  nails, 
and  the  walls  of  the  hoofs  for  signs  of  operations  and  patho- 
logical lesions.  The  legs  should  be  carefully  inspected  for 
exostoses  and  changes  in  the  tendons,  bursae,  and  joints. 


EXTERNAL  EXAMINATION  51 

Skin. — The  integument  should  be  carefully  examined 
in  all  regions  of  the  body.  The  color  of  the  soft  hairless 
parts  is  often  important  as  an  indicator  of  internal  troubles ; 
when  yellow  it  indicates  icterus ;  when  green  it  may  point  to 
post-mortem  decomposition.  The  skin  must  be  carefully 
observed  for  oedematous  swellings,  emphysematous  crepita- 
tion, bruises,  scars,  wounds,  abrasions,  blisters  and  stains 
from  discharges  or  application  of  medicaments.  Many  such 
points  may  be  a  source  of  infection  or  aid  in  the  explanation, 
of  lesions  to  be  found  on  internal  examination.  Tension  of 
the  skin  over  the  abdomen  should  be  tested  to  determine 
if  bloat  be  present. 


CHAPTER  V 
INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 

For  class  work  sections  should  not  consist  of  more  than 
ten  or  fifteen  students.  For  convenience  they  should  be 
divided  into  groups.  Two  should  be  assigned  to  the  head, 
neck  and  back,  two  to  the  evisceration  of  the  thoracic  and 
abdominal  cavities,  two  to  the  exentration  of  the  pelvic 
cavity,  two  to  the  legs  and  feet,  muscles,  bones  and  joints, 
one  to  weighing  the  organs,  and  one  to  taking  notes.  In 
each  gi'oup  one  student  only  should  do  the  cutting  and  the 
other  act  as  his  assistant,  an  arrangement  which  lessens  the 
possibility  of  accident.  Each  group  of  students  should  be 
assigned  to  a  different  part  of  the  work  each  day. 

Position. — The  horse,  ass,  or  mule,  after  careful  exter- 
nal examination,  is  placed  on  the  right  side  either  on  the 
ground  or  on  a  table  (Fig.  60).  This  position  has  many 
advantages  over  the  dorsal  position  of  Kitt  or  Schmey  or 
the  left  side  position.  When  an  animal  of  one  of  these 
species  is  placed  on  the  light  side  the  small  intestines  will 
be  found  uppermost  in  the  region  of  the  left  flank  as  the 
left  or  uppermost  side  is  removed.  This  facilitates  the 
proper  examination,  ligation,  and  removal  of  the  small 
intestines  which  would  be  buried  beneath  the  double  colon 
and  Cfficum,  which  are  situated  largely  on  the  right  side  of 
the  abdomen,  if  the  animal  were  placed  on  the  left  side  and 
the  right  side  removed.  The  left  cardiac  notch  of  the  lungs 
is  more  pronounced  than  the  right,  therefore  the  pericar- 
dium, contents  of  the  pericardial  sac,  and  the  heart  in  situ 
may  be  more  easily  examined  when  the  necropsy  is  con- 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


53 


ml 


CO        o 

P  (n  fB 

O  B- 


1=3 


o  — o 
£3« 


3    M     O 


54  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

ducted  with  the  cadaver  placed  upon  its  light  side.  The 
dorsal  position  is  disadvantageous  in  that  it  necessitates 
propping  the  cadaver  up  with  sharp  sticks  or  blocks,  or 
tying  the  feet  to  stakes  or  rings  in  the  wall,  truck  stakes, 
etc.  In  the  field  the  dorsal  position  is  very  impractical 
and  much  inconvenience  may  be  obviated  by  using  the  right 
side  position  of  Kitt. 

Skin. — The  hide  has  a  commercial  value,  and  in  many 
cases  must  be  removed  before  the  autopsy  is  begun.  The 
autopsist  should  see  the  cadaver  before  the  skin  is  removed. 
When  this  is  not  possible  have  the  hide  present  so  that  it 
may  be  examined  and  aid  in  identification  of  the  animal. 
When  not  obligatoiy  do  not  waste  the  time  and  energy  to 
remove  the  integument.  In  case  the  owner  demands  the 
hide,  allow  someone  else  to  remove  it.  If  the  autopsy  is 
being  conducted  at  a  reduction  plant  one  of  the  employes 
will  do  the  work,  if  on  a  farm  the  owner's  help  may  be 
utilized.  When  circumstances  compel  the  autopsist  to 
remove  the  skin  he  should  make  an  incision  on  the  median 
line  from  the  tip  of  the  chin  to  the  anus,  avoiding  the  navel 
of  young  animals  and  the  genitals.  At  right  angles  to  this 
line  an  incision  is  made  through  the  skin  on  the  inside  of  each 
foreleg  to  the  carpal  joint  and  up  the  back  of  each  hind  leg 
to  the  tarsal  joint.  At  the  carpal  and  tarsal  joints  and  the 
muzzle  a  circular  incision  is  made  through  the  integument. 
The  skin  is  drawn  back  from  the  edges  of  the  incisions,  and 
a  curved  edged  knife  held  almost  flat  against  the  skin  during 
the  operation  in  order  that  as  much  of  the  panniculus  may 
remain  on  the  body  and  as  little  on  the  skin  as  possible. 
In  skinning  the  cadaver,  the  ears  are  cut  off  close  to  their 
base  and  left  with  the  hide.  An  incision  is  continued  from 
the  median  line  along  the  ventral  surface  of  the  tail.     By 


EXTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


55 


o  m 


re  <:  TO 

n>  ft  2 


56  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

applying  traction  the  skin  is  readily  removed  from  the  tail 
after  the  body  has  been  skinned.  Great  care  should  be 
exercised  not  to  cut  or  puncture  the  hide,  as  each  injury 
reduces  its  market  value.  During  the  process  of  removing 
the  integument  the  autopsist  may  observe  the  skin  for  con- 
dition and  lesions,  and  the  subcutis  for  nutritional  condition, 
oedema,  hemorrhages,  icterus,  etc. 

When  pressed  for  time  one  may  quickly  remove  the  skin 
from  the  uppermost  side  of  the  cadaver  by  placing  an 
incision  on  the  median  line  from  the  tip  of  the  chin  to  the 
anus  and  then  dissecting  the  hide  from  the  uppermost  side 
of  the  neck  and  abdomen  but  not  from  the  legs.  Raise 
the  legs  upward  and  sever  them  close  to  the  body,  allowing 
them  to  be  removed  with  the  integument  of  the  left  side 
of  the  cadaver.  This  can  be  done  in  a  very  short  time,  which 
adds  to  the  convenience  of  the  autopsist.  At  the  same 
time  the  hide  is  not  injured  and  may  be  removed  by 
those  who  desire  it  after  the  autopsy  has  been  completed 
(Fig.  61). 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and  Back 

Thyroid  Glands. — To  extirpate  the  thyroid  glands 
made  an  incision  six  inches  long  on  the  median  line  of  the 
neck  immediately  posterior  to  the  larynx  ( Fig.  60 ) .  Cut 
through  the  skin,  subcutis,  sternothyro,  and  omohyoideus 
muscles  down  to  the  cartilaginous  rings  of  the  trachea. 
Seize  the  thyroid,  draw  it  out  and  sever  its  attachments. 
Remove  the  opposite  gland  in  the  same  manner. 

Jugular  Furrow  and  Structures. — Place  an  inci- 
sion immediately  above  the  jugular  furrow,  downward 
through  the  muscles  to  the  deepest  layer  of  cervical  muscles, 
from  the  first  rib  forward  to  the  left  wing  of  the  atlas 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  57 

(Fig.  60).  Continue  the  incision  along  the  border  of  this 
lateral  wing  and  finish  it  just  back  of  the  ear.  Lay  open 
this  incision  and  separate  the  jugular  vein,  carotid  artery, 
oesophagus,  vagus,  sympathetic  and  recurrent  nerves  ( Figs. 
63,  64 ) .  The  vagus  and  sympathetic  nerves  are  enclosed 
in  a  common  sheath.  Examine  the  structures  of  the  right 
jugular  furrow  when  the  trachea  and  larynx  have  been 
removed  (Fig.  80).  The  anterior  cervical  lymph-glands  lie 
along  the  carotid  artery  in  the  vicinity  of  the  thyroid  glands ; 
the  middle  cervicals  in  the  middle  of  the  neck  on  the  trachea 
below  the  carotid  artery,  and  the  inferior  cervical  glands  lie 
at  the  entrance  of  the  thorax  under  the  trachea. 

Parotid  and  Submaxillary  Lymph  and  Salivary 
Glands. — Make  an  incision  through  the  skin  from  the 
temporomandibular  articulation  just  below  and  in  front 
of  the  ear,  to  the  symphysis  of  the  mandibular  rami  at  the 
chin,  following  the  inferior  border  of  the  left  ramus  ( Fig. 
60).  Lay  the  skin  back  from  this  incision  below  the  ear 
and  in  the  submaxillary  space.  Incise  and  examine  the 
parotid  and  submaxillary  salivary  glands  and  the  submaxil- 
lary lymph-glands. 

Left  Ramus  of  Mandible. — To  remove  the  left  ramus 
of  the  lower  jaw  it  is  necessary  to  sever  the  muscular  attach- 
ments from  its  internal  surface  and  to  saw  through  the  bone 
just  above  the  symphysis.  Force  the  knife  under  the  left 
ramus  close  to  the  temporomandibular  articulation.  Press 
the  cutting  edge  upward  closely  against  the  internal  sur- 
face of  that  bone,  and  cut  forward  to  the  tip  of  the  chin  or 
symphysis  of  the  inferior  maxilla  (Fig.  62).  Withdraw 
the  knife  and  make  another  incision  from  the  temporomaxil- 
lary  articulation  to  the  left  commissure  of  the  lips,  down- 
ward to  the  teeth    (Fig.   62).     The  temporomandibular 


58 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


■jllllill 

_  a)  h  0)  „     js'a  a 
o  O  c    .  O  P  M  _,^ 


.  ^  2  0)  c  XI  o  ^  , 
•S^  o  g  fl  «  g  a  §. 

^'"3  c  P  c  §-3  o 

iSfiifi 


Si 


s£p-^-a 


=  ^2h 


IliP^Ill 

S  0)  I  O   M_,J3-     . 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE         59 

articulation  and  the  symphysis  of  the  maxillary  rami  now 
alone  maintain  the  position  of  the  left  ramus  of  the  lower 
jaw.  Remove  a  section  of  skin  and  lip  two  inches  wide  from 
the  left  ramus  just  posterior  to  its  symphysis  with  the  right 
ramus  (Fig.  62).  Saw  through  the  left  ramus  at  this 
point,  grasp  it  above  the  incision  and  raise  it  upward  and 
backward  until  a  complete  disarticulation  of  the  temporo- 
mandibular joint  is  effected.  Remove  the  left  ramus  of  the 
lower  jaw,  and  expose  for  examination  in  situ  the  teeth, 
gums,  tongue,  larynx,  pharynx,  guttural  pouches,  posterior 
nares,  soft  and  hard  palates  (Figs.  63,  64) . 

Guttural  Pouches. — To  open  the  left  guttural  pouch 
locate  the  great  cornu  of  the  hyoid  bone  and  make  an  incision 
through  the  walls  of  the  pouch  three  inches  long,  following 
the  posterior  border  of  the  hyoid  cornu.  In  opening  the 
right  pouch  place  a  similar  incision  along  the  right  great 
cornu  which  lies  directly  under  the  left  when  the  cadaver 
is  lying  on  its  right  side.  If  the  left  pouch  contains  blood, 
pus  or  other  fluid,  sponge  it  out  clean  before  incising  the 
wall  of  the  right  pouch  to  prevent  contaminating  the  latter 
(Fig.  64). 

Tongue,  Larynx,  Trachea,  and  Esophagus. — The 
tongue,  larynx,  trachea,  and  the  oesophagus  are  extirpated 
together  and  their  discission  effectuated  later  preparatory 
to  describing  their  appearance.  To  remove  them,  first  seize 
the  left  great  cornu  of  the  hyoid  bone  with  the  bone  forceps 
and  twist  from  right  to  left,  breaking  the  cornu  completely 
near  its  superior  attachment,  then  seize  the  right  cornu  and 
break  it  in  the  same  manner  ( Fig.  64 ) .  Next  grasp  the 
free  portion  of  the  tongue  with  the  left  hand,  draw  it  out 
of  the  oral  cavity  and  hold  it  upward  while  the  frenum  is 
severed  and  the  glossal  attachments  loosened  all  along  the 


60 


VETERINARY  TOST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


e  ^  ° 
o  fl     . 

c  o  «  o 
"^^  a  ^ 


S   ffl  S   Mt 


II  g.fl 


j^  aoJ3 


o  o  a  «  g 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


61 


•g  O.S 

<:  <=  'l 
2.(1  1, 
P:r'h 


W 

lie 

HI 


re  S 


F3P 


62  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

organ.  Place  two  fingers  in  the  glottis  and  draw  the  larynx 
outward  from  the  cadaver.  Cut  through  the  soft  palate, 
carrying  the  incision  upward  and  backward,  then  down- 
ward behind  the  larynx  and  trachea  until  they  are  severed 
from  the  head  and  neck.  Incise  the  oesophagus,  trachea, 
vessels  and  nerves  close  to  the  thorax,  remove  and  place 
tongue,  larynx,  trachea  and  oesophagus  upon  the  table 
(Figs.  80,  117). 

Decapitation. — The  head  is  excised  at  the  occipito- 
atloidal  articulation. 

To  accomplish  this  take  a  position  on  the  dorsal  side 
of  the  neck.  Have  an  assistant  grasp  the  nostrils  and  raise 
the  chin  upward  and  backward.  With  the  head  in  this 
position  incise  the  skin  and  muscles  back  of  the  right  ramus 
of  the  inferior  maxilla.  Next  have  the  head  forced  back- 
ward and  downward  in  such  manner  that  the  ventral  aspect 
of  the  occipito-atloidal  joint  is  uppermost.  Cut  the  ventral 
capitus  muscle  and  the  ligaments  of  this  articulation  and 
expose  the  spinal  meninges.  It  is  at  this  point  that  spinal 
fluid  may  be  collected  before  the  meninges  are  severed,  when 
a  microscopic  or  bacteriological  examination  of  the  fluid  is 
desirable  (Fig.  83).  This  may  be  done  with  a  sterile 
pipette  or  hypodermic  syringe.  Complete  the  disarticula- 
tion of  the  joint,  sever  the  dorsal  rectus  capitus  muscle, 
ligamentum  nuchse  and  skin.    Remove  the  head  to  a  table. 

Preparation  of  the  Head. — Place  an  incision  from 
the  right  temporomandibular  articulation  to  the  right  com- 
missure of  the  lips,  downward  to  the  teeth.  Grasp  the  right 
ramus  at  the  interalveolar  space  and  draw  it  upward  and 
backward  until  the  temporomandibular  joint  is  disarticu- 
lated. To  remove  the  skin  and  muscles  from  the  head 
place  an  incision  down  the  median  line  of  the  head  and  face 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  63 

from  the  occipital  crest  to  the  incisor  teeth.  Lay  back  the. 
skin  from  this  incision  and  remove  the  ears  and  hps  together 
with  the  skin  of  the  head.  Dissect  the  musculature  away 
from  the  parietal,  temporal,  occipital  and  maxillary  bones. 
Remove  the  fat  from  each  temporal  fossa,  and  have  the 
bones  especially  free  of  muscular  tissue  between  the  tem- 
poral fossa  and  the  foramen  magnum  ( Fig.  65 ) . 

Extirpation  of  the  Brain. — Various  vise-like 
arrangements  may  be  used  to  hold  the  head  while  the  bones 
are  being  sawed  through,  although  an  assistant  can  hold 


Fig.  65. — Lines  indicate  incisions  to  be  made  in  exposing  a  tooth,  nasal  sinuses,  tur- 
binated bones,  nasal  septum  and  brain.  Incisions  in  supra-orbital  process  are  made  when  the 
eye  and  optic  nerve  is  taken  out  in  connection  with  the  brain.  Incisions  are  made  on  either 
side  of  the  external  auditory  process  to  remove  the  petrous  temporal  bone. 

the  head  sufficiently  steady  upon  a  table  without  the  use  of 
a  headholder.  Place  the  head  upon  its  upper  teeth  on  a 
table  with  the  incisor  teeth  distal  to  the  autopsist.  Draw 
a  line  with  the  cutting  edge  of  the  knife  transversely  across 
the  frontal  bones  between  points  represented  by  the  anterior 
curve  of  the  temporal  fossae.  This  is  used  as  a  guiding  line. 
Draw  a  second  line  one  inch  posterior  to  the  first  but  parallel 
with  it,  then  saw  through  the  bone,  following  the  second 
line.  Draw  two  other  lines,  one  on  either  side  of  the 
cranium.  Start  each  line  at  the  end  of  the  transverse  inci- 
sion made  with  the  saw,  and  carry  it  backward  across  the 


64 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


temporal  and  occipital  bones  parallel  to  the  top  of  the 
zygomatic  process,  and  temiinate  each  line  in  the  foramen 
magnum  above  the  occipital  condyles  (Fig.  65).  Cut 
through  the  temporal  and  occipital  bones  with  a  curved  bone 
chisel  or  a  wide  blade  steel  brick  chisel,  following  these  lines. 


Fig.  66. — Removal  of  the  calvarium  with  the  hammer-hook. 

When  the  three  incisions  described  have  been  completed 
place  the  hook  end  of  the  steel  hammer-hook  under  the 
anterior  margin  of  the  calvarium  or  skullcap  and  gently 
pull  it  upwards  (Fig.  66).  If  the  bones  have  been  com- 
pletely severed  the  calvarium  will  be  removed  easily,  ex- 
posing the  meninges  and  brain  (Fig.  67).     Examine  the 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


65 


dura  mater,  then  penetrate  it  with  a  groove  director,  and 
with  a  sharp  scalpel  incise  it  longitudinally  and  lay  it  back. 
To  remove  the  brain  work  the  fingers  between  the  organ 
and  the  cranial  bones,  beginning  anteriorly  and  taking  great 


exposed  after  removal  of  calvariur 


care  not  to  injure  the  olfactory  lobes.  Raise  the  anterior 
portion  of  the  brain  with  the  left  hand,  sever  the  efferent 
nerves  and  remove  the  cerebrum  and  cerebellum  together. 
Sinuses,  Nasai.  Passages,  and  Septum. — To  expose 
the  sinuses  and  nasal  passages  it  is  only  necessary  to  remove 

5 


66  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

a  triangular  piece  of  bone  from  one  side  of  the  face.  Three 
lines  are  to  be  followed.  The  first,  a  transverse  line  in  front 
of  the  orbit  from  the  median  line  of  the  face  toward  the 
facial  crest,  to  a  point  over  the  roots  of  the  last  molar  teeth. 
The  second  line  from  the  inferior  end  of  the  first  line,  for- 
ward across  the  maxillary  bone  over  the  roots  of  the  teeth 
to  the  nasal  process  of  the  premaxilla.  The  last  line  is 
made  from  the  superior  end  of  the  first  incision  forward  to 
the  anterior  end  of  the  nasal  bone,  longitudinally  on  that 


Fig.  68. — Brain  removed.     Left  turbinated  bones,  part  of  nasal,  lacrimal  and  maxillary  bones 
removed.     Lines  of  incision  for  extirpation  of  nasal  septum. 

bone  and  to  one  side  of  the  median  line  of  the  face,  just 
missing  the  nasal  septum  (Fig.  6.5).  The  nasal,  lacrimal 
and  malar  bones  are  sawed  through  on  one  side  following 
the  first  line,  which  was  made  transversely  in  front  of  the 
orbit.  The  lacrimal  and  supermaxillary  bones  on  one  side 
are  cut  through  with  a  heavy  bone  chisel  or  steel  brick  chisel 
following  the  second  line,  and  along  the  nasal  septmu  fol- 
lowing the  third  line.  With  these  incisions  completed  a 
three-cornered  piece  of  bone  may  be  removed  from  the  face, 
anterior  to  the  eye  and  to  one  side  of  the  nasal  septum, 
with  a  hammer-hook  (Fig.  68) .  Examine  the  sinuses  and 
turbinated  bones. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


67 


After  examining  the  turbinated  bones  on  the  side 
opened,  cut  them  free  with  a  chisel  and  remove  them  with 
dura  tongs  or  rat-tooth  forceps.  The  nasal  septum  is  ex- 
posed when  the  turbinated  bones  have  been  extirpated  ( Fig. 


Fig.  69. — Longitudinal  incision   through  the  head  after  removal  of  the  brain. 

68 ) .  With  a  sharp  knife  make  a  vertical  incision  through 
the  septum  at  its  superior  extremity,  then  incise  the  septum 
following  its  peripheral  attachments  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  extirpate  it  as  nearly  intact  as  possible.  The  opposite 
turbinated  bones  may  be  examined  through  this  aperture. 


68  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

When  necessary  the  other  side  of  the  face  may  be  opened 
in  a  similar  manner.  Schmey  saws  the  head  in  two  parts 
following  the  median  line  but  avoids  the  septum  (Fig.  69) . 

Teeth. — To  remove  the  teeth  cut  the  alveolar  walls 
with  a  brick  chisel,  placing  that  instrument  on  the  superior 
margin  of  the  alveolar  wall  at  a  point  between  two  teeth, 
and  then  force  the  chisel  along  the  dental  organs  to  the 
roots.  Pry  up  the  external  walls  between  these  incisions 
and  force  the  teeth  out  of  their  alveoli  ( Fig.  65 ) . 

Ear. — Extirpate  the  tympanic  and  petrous  portion  of 
the  temporal  bone  by  making  deep  incisions  with  the  chisel 
one  inch  anterior  and  one  inch  posterior  to  the  external 
auditory  meatus  ( Fig.  6.5 ) .  Technic  on  the  internal  ear 
will  be  described  with  technic  and  description  of  organs. 

Eye. — Enucleate  the  eye  with  small,  sharp-pointed  scis- 
sors and  forceps.  Grasp  the  nictitans  membrane  with  the 
forceps,  draw  it  out  and  sever  it.  Pass  the  scissors  into  the 
orbital  cavity  beside  the  eyeball  and  snip  it  free  from  its 
muscular  attachments  and  the  optic  nerve.  Always  keep 
the  scissors  pointed  toward  the  bony  walls  of  the  orbital 
cavity  to  avoid  puncture  of  the  eyeball. 

IIemovai>  of  Spinal  Cord. — The  spine  should  be 
opened  and  the  cord  extirpated  after  the  legs  and  side  have 
been  removed,  cavities  eviscerated,  and  the  head  disarticu- 
lated at  the  occipito-atloidal  joint.  In  the  cervical  region 
all  the  musculature  should  be  excised  from  the  left  half  of 
the  vertebrae.  In  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  regions  from  the 
first  rib  backward  one  should  sever  all  broken  ends  of  ribs 
close  to  the  vertebrae  with  an  ax.  This  preparation  com- 
pleted one  should  wash  and  dry  the  ax  handle  and  the 
hands  to  avoid  danger  of  the  ax  slipping  from  one's  grip. 
Take  a  position  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  cadaver  and  swing 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


i^ 


ti 

II 


s.^ 


B^ 


WCFQ 


1^ 

f  CO 

ii 

S3 


h 


<3  S-' 


70  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

the  ax  from  right  to  left,  almost  parallel  with  the  vertebrae 
beginning  with  the  left  wing  of  the  atlas.  The  ax  handle 
is  so  held  in  the  hands  that  just  as  the  cutting  edge  strikes 
the  vertebra  it  is  rotated  upward  away  from  the  spine  in 
such  manner  as  to  remove  a  small  chip  of  bone.  Continue 
to  chip  in  one  place  until  the  canal  is  opened  and  the  cord 
visible,  then  from  this  point  backward  continue  the  chipping 
process  until  the  entire  canal  is  opened  to  the  coccygeal 
vertebrae.  Pick  up  the  cord  in  its  meninges  with  forceps 
and  with  a  scalpel  sever  all  efferent  nerves  and  remove  the 
structure.  Great  care  must  be  used  in  directing  the  edge  of 
the  ax.  Should  it  approach  the  spine  at  a  sharp  angle  the 
blade  would  be  carried  through  the  vertebra  and  the  cord 
severed  (Fig.  70). 

Peripheral  Nerves. — Peripheral  nerves  must  be  dis- 
sected out  along  anatomical  lines  for  examination. 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Thoracic  and  Abdominal 
Cavities 

Front  Leg. — To  remove  the  front  leg  take  a  position 
on  the  ventral  side  anterior  to  the  limb  facing  the  cadaver. 
Place  an  incision  just  back  of  the  shoulder,  from  the  crest 
of  the  back  to  the  sternmii,  cutting  downward  through  the 
thoracic  muscles  to  the  ribs  but  not  through  the  intercostal 
muscles.  Next  make  an  incision  immediately  in  front  of  the 
shoulder  from  the  top  of  the  neck  to  the  manubrium  or  point 
of  the  sternum.  Have  an  assistant  raise  the  leg  upward 
then  sever  it  from  the  body  by  cutting  through  the  pec- 
toral muscles  from  the  sternum  to  the  superspinous  pro- 
cesses (Fig.  62).  Examine  the  axillary  nerves  and  blood- 
vessels before  dividing  them,  then  cut  downward  deeply 
in  such  manner  as  to  leave  as  much  muscle  with  the  leg 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  71 

and  as  little  on  the  ribs  as  possible.  The  assistant  should 
bear  upward  continuously  during  the  cutting  and  finally 
when  the  leg  is  loosened  force  it  completely  over  on  the 
dorsal  side  '(Fig.  63).  There  it  should  be  cut  free  and  be 
removed  to  a  table  where  the  lymph-glands,  joints,  tendons, 
tendon  sheaths,  foot  structures,  etc.,  may  later  be  exposed 
and  inspected. 

Hind  Leg. — To  remove  the  hind  leg  remain  on  the 
ventral  side  in  front  of  that  extremity.  Start  the  first  inci- 
sion just  back  of  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium;  cut  down- 
ward and  forward  toward  the  flank,  through  the  tensor 
fascia  lata,  panniculus  in  the  fold  of  the  flank,  and  through 
the  skin  on  the  inner  side  of  the  leg  close  to  the  abdomen 
as  far  as  the  penis  or  mammary  gland.  The  next  incision 
is  horizontal.  It  is  made  parallel  to  and  three  inches  above 
the  median  line  from  the  skin  inward  to  the  coxofemoral 
articulation  ( Fig.  62 ) .  Place  the  cutting  edge  of  the  knife 
against  the  skin  three  inches  above  the  median  line,  handle 
toward  the  tail,  point  toward  the  abdomen,  and  cut  inward 
toward  the  coxofemoral  joint,  taking  great  care  that  the 
point  of  the  knife  does  not  puncture  the  abdominal  wall. 
When  the  joint  is  opened  the  air  rushing  in  causes  a  loud 
sucking  sound.  Cut  through  the  ligamentum  teres,  back- 
ward and  upward  over  the  ischial  tuberosity,  then  down- 
ward behind  the  acetabulum.  During  the  incision  have 
the  leg  held  straight  up  and  forced  toward  the  dorsal  side 
of  the  cadaver  until  it  falls.  To  remove  the  leg  entirely 
cut  deeply  into  the  musculature  following  a  line  marked 
by  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium,  the  acetabulum  and  the 
ischial  tuberosity.  Allow  as  much  of  the  hip  and  thigh 
muscle  to  be  removed  with  the  leg  as  possible  without  cut- 
ting into  the  great  sciatic  ligament  (Fig.  63) . 


72  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

The  following  muscles  are  cut  through  in  removing 
the  hind  leg  in  this  manner:  tensor  fascia  lata,  panniculus 
of  the  flank,  gracillus,  sartorius,  pectineus,  adductors,  semi- 
membranosis,  quadratus  f  emOris,  obturator  externus,  rectus 
femoris,  capsularis,  psoas  major,  illiacus,  obturator  inter- 
nus,  semitentinosis,  biceps  femoris,  and  the  gluteal  muscles. 

Xiphoid-pubic  Incision. — After  the  left  fore  and 
hind  legs  have  been  removed  dissect  the  penis  or  mammary 
gland  away  from  the  abdomen  and  lay  it  behind  the  right 
hind  leg  (Fig.  63).  Do  not  cut  through  the  j^enis,  and 
in  stallions  do  not  cut  the  spermatic  vessels  if  the  urogenital 
tract  is  to  be  removed  intact.  Next  make  an  incision 
through  the  skin  and  subcutis  on  the  median  line,  from  the 
pubis  to  the  xiphoid  cartilage  (Figs.  63,  71).  If  the  in- 
tegument has  previously  been  removed,  draw  a  line  with 
the  sharp  edge  of  the  knife  along  the  superficial  surface 
of  the  abdominal  muscles  between  the  points  indicated  to 
be  used  as  a  guide.  Press  against  the  sternum  with  the 
thumb  to  locate  the  xiphoid  cartilage.  At  a  point  one 
inch  posterior  to  it  make  an  incision  two  inches  long.  This 
cut  is  difficult  to  make  without  puncturing  an  intestine, 
especially  if  the  cadaver  be  bloated.  Stand  back  of  the  right 
foreleg  with  the  left  side  against  the  ventral  surface  of  the 
cadaver.  Hold  the  knife  in  the  right  hand  with  a  full  hand 
grip,  as  though  to  cut  bread.  Place  the  curved  portion 
of  the  cutting  edge  near  the  point  against  the  median  line 
of  the  abdomen  just  back  of  the  xiphoid  cartilage  and  press 
it  into  the  muscle  only  an  eighth  of  an  inch  or  less  (Fig. 
71).  Remove  the  knife  and  inspect  the  incision.  The 
fibres  will  tear  at  the  point  of  incision  in  direct  proportion 
to  the  degree  of  gas  pressure  within  the  abdomen.  Place 
the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  in  the  incision  and  attempt 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


73 


cro  a 
•5     gr 

•a  otra   I 

re  a  p-r 


Sols 


g.  Eo'2 

IB 


<0   g,^' 

if 


=^3  p 


3^1 


74 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


to  enlarge  it.  Again  apply  the  knife  cautiously  and  with 
very  little  pressure  until  the  tissue  can  be  felt  to  yield  a 
little,  when  the  knife  is  again  withdrawn  and  the  finger 
inserted.  This  precedure  is  carefully  continued  until  the 
finger,  not  the  knife,  first  passes  completel}^  through  the 
abdominal  musculature,  then  the  finger  should  be  forced 


Fig.  72. — Insertion  of  first  two  fingers  of  left  hand  in  abdomen  after  making  incision  indicated 
in  Fig,  71. 

through  the  peritoneum.  The  point  of  the  knife  should 
never  be  forced  through  the  abdominal  wall  at  this  point 
fii'st,  as  a  puncture  of  the  intestine  invariably  results. 
After  the  index-finger  has  been  inserted,  the  opening  should 
be  enlarged  so  as  to  admit  the  second  finger  also.  Insert 
the  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  turn  the  backs  toward 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


75 


the  xiphoid  cartilage,  bend  the  fingers  to  make  an  angle 
with  the  apex  formed  by  the  knuckles;  place  the  ends  of 
the  first  two  fingers  against  the  peritoneum  of  the  abdom- 
inal wall  one  on  either  side  of  the  median  line  (Fig.  72). 
Hold  the  knife  in  the  right  hand,  cutting  edge  toward  the 
pubis.    Place  the  jDoint  in  the  opening  about  half  an  inch. 


Fig.  73. — Proper  position  of  hands  and  knife  in  beginning  the  xiphoid-pubic  incision 
First  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand  are  inserted  in  the  opening  made  in  the  abdominal  wall  in  the 
manner  indicated  in  Fig.  72.  The  knuckles  of  the  first  two  fingers  protect  the  intestines  from 
the  knife.  The  point  of  the  knife,  with  cutting  edge  outward,  is  inserted  between  the  fingers  and 
two  inches  of  the  belly  wall  incised  by  a  quick  outward  incision.     This  is  continued  to  the  pubis. 

between  the  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand  close  to  their 
base  (Fig.  73).  Cut  slowly  through  the  abdominal  wall 
from  the  xiphoid  cartilage  to  the  pubis  along  the  median 
line,  keeping  the  knife  in  this  position.  The  knuckles  of 
the  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand  are  so  pressed  against 
the  intestines  during  the  incision  as  to  protect  the  latter 


76  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

from  the  point  of  the  knife,  thus  preventing  puncture  of  an 
intestine,  escape  of  the  fecal  matter  into  the  peritoneal 
cavity,  and  possible  masking  of  lesions.  When  the  knife  is 
very  sharp  and  the  autopsist  experienced,  the  first  finger 
of  the  left  hand  may  be  inserted  in  the  incision,  back  of  the 
ensiform  cartilage,  together  with  the  knife,  and  the  end  of 
the  finger  placed  on  the  back  of  the  knife  so  that  it  pro- 
trudes over  the  point  to  prevent  it  puncturing  an  intestine. 
In  this  position  the  incision  through  the  abdominal  wall 
from  sternum  to  pelvis  may  be  made  with  one  long,  smooth 
motion  of  the  arms. 

Pubic-lumbar  Incision. — When  the  intestines  are 
distended  with  gas,  portions  of  the  small  gut,  the  free  end 
of  the  double  colon,  or  the  point  of  the  c^cum  may  protrude 
after  the  xiphoid-pubic  incision  has  been  made.  When 
practical,  draw  the  free  portion  of  the  double  colon  out  of 
the  abdomen  to  lessen  the  tension  and  facilitate  the  next 
incision  ( Fig.  75 ) .  The  pubic-lumbar  incision  is  made  from 
the  pubis  upward  in  front  of  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium 
to  the  lateral  processes  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  immediately 
posterior  to  the  left  kidney  (Fig.  62).  Great  care  must 
be  taken  in  this  operation  to  prevent  puncturing  an  intes- 
tine. Stand  in  front  of  the  right  hind  leg,  face  toward  the 
ventral  surface  of  the  cadaver.  Grasp  the  abdominal  wall 
six  inches  anterior  to  the  pubis  with  the  left  hand,  placing 
the  thumb  in  the  xiphoid-pubic  incision.  Take  the  knife 
by  the  end  of  the  handle  with  the  right  hand  in  such  man- 
ner that  the  blade  is  at  right  angles  to  the  forearm,  cutting 
edge  away  from  the  autopsist,  point  upward.  Grasp  the 
handle  firmly  with  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  and  thumb 
and  extend  the  first  and  second  fingers  straight  out  from 
the  hand  (Fig.  74).     Carry  the  handle  of  the  knife  into 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


77 


the  abdominal  cavity  close  to  the  pubis,  butt  foremost, 
cutting  edge  against  the  upper  lip  of  the  xiphoid  incision, 
point  of  the  knife  outside  of  the  abdomen  extending  toward 
the  right  shoulder  of  the  autopsist  ( Fig.  75 ) .  Draw  the 
belly  wall  tight  with  the  left  hand  and  cut  through  it  toward 
the  lumbar  vertebrae,  in  front  of  the  external  angle  of  the 
ilium,  with  that  part  of  the  blade  closest  to  the  handle, 
keeping  the  point  entirely  out  of  the  abdomen  ( Fig.  7.5 ) . 
The  butt  of  the  knife 
handle  and  the  first  two 
fingers  should  extend 
straight  out  from  the 
hand  and  precede  the 
cutting  edge  of  the  knife, 
forcing  the  intestines 
away  from  the  abdomi- 
nal wall  in  such  manner 
as  to  prevent  their  being 
cut.  The  spermatic  cord 
of  the  male  should  not  be 
injured,  but  should  be 
dissected  from  the  in- 
guinal canal  and  to- 
gether with  the  testicles  be  placed  in  the  pelvic  cavity  to  be 
removed  later  during  the  exenteration  of  that  region. 

After  the  xiphoid-pubic  and  pubic-lumbar  incisions  have 
been  completed  the  free  end  of  the  double  colon,  the  cfecum 
and  the  small  intestines  will  usually  fall  out  of  the  abdom- 
inal cavity  if  they  have  not  previously  been  drawn  out  ( Fig. 
76).  Should  they  not  protrude  of  their  own  accord  apply 
steady,  gentle  traction  to  the  free  end  of  the  double  colon 
until  it  can  be  withdrawn,  after  carefully  inspecting  the 


Fig.  74. — Proper  manner  of  holding  knife  when 
making  pubic-lumbar  incision.  First,  two  fingers  are 
extended  to  force  the  intestines  away  from  the  cutting 
edge  of  the  knife,  thus  avoiding  accidental  incision 
of  a  gut  and  contamination  of  abdominal  contents. 


78 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


c-2 

— '    4) 

a  a 
o  o 


&  a 

^2 

J'' 

il 

^  - 

II 

.-M 

~-l. 

.    ^^d 

:¥ 

i'^o 

^Kv^H 

-¥ 

■A%  \j^^M 

Q-os 

.  <-#4BH 

t^. 

i'lH 

fl 

.  ^^^^^H 

"E-c'-s 

l\^M 

2    ^ 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


79 


Fic 
and  laic 
of  part 
abdoniii 
double 

'.'^^-'^ 

'  1 

J.    76.— Left  hir 
i  bark  of  the  ri 
of  OS  innomina 
nal  wall  posterio 
colon,  and  csecu 

I     '. 

lift' 

k 

^      '  ^^^^Hl^^  ~  ^' 

i 

Prep 
aes  of 
jelvic  1 
lage 
usual 

^XShB  'wI'T&v 

uoe    n 
incisio 
structi 
Xiphc 
manne 

HHKBHr^  ^i.V^^^^^H 

■ 

•-^p:- 

IFir^^WlMiMilr^      Vk  ^i^H 

H^ 

SSc  g. 

m. 

III 

H^^v^^^^ 

^ 

If' 

ill 

^^^^^^^K             '"  li^'^^ 

Ik 

i-m 

^^^^^mBKf^^^^^:%^ 

) 

Isgs 

fl^fl^^^^^^B^r  '"'ySi*^''^^^ 

w 

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^vB^^ 

Ml 

rill 

.j^Snl^Hl^^l^nl^^H^^^I 

j 

E'.i'S'i 

jBi**  ''^^^^swy*'^Si^^alB^^^B 

^ 

l«3  2, 
5  S  o  c 

lair- 

.^ii^^^^^^H 

80  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

topographical  relationship  of  the  viscera  exposed  by  placing 
the  free  flap  (operculum)  of  the  abdominal  wall  up  over 
the  ribs  (Fig.  77). 

Vacuity  of  the  Thorax. — After  the  free  portion  of 
the  double  colon  has  been  withdrawn  from  the  abdomen  and 
forced  backward  toward  the  pubis  as  far  from  the  ensiform 
cartilage  as  possible  (Fig.  77) ,  so  that  the  ax  will  not  punc- 
ture it  when  the  ribs  are  cut,  the  autopsist  should  place  his  / 
right  hand  in  the  abdominal  cavity  with  the  palm  against  the 
diaphragm  to  test  the  vacuity  of  the  thorax.  When  the 
abdominal  surface  is  concave  and  tight  the  thoracic  surface 
must  be  convex.  This  is  the  physiological  position  and 
indicates  that  the  thorax  is  a  vacuum.  When  the  abdominal 
surface  of  the  diaphragm  is  convex  it  indicates  that  air, 
gas  or  liquid  is  in  the  thoracic  cavity.  Air  may  enter  the 
pleural  cavity  through  an  external  wound  or  following 
rupture  of  bronchi,  alveoli  and  the  visceral  pleura.  Gas 
may  form  in  the  thorax  from  the  action  of  bacteria  either 
before  or  after  death.  In  cases  of  hydrothorax,  according 
to  F.  Smith,  gallons  of  fluid  may  be  contained  in  the  thorax 
and  not  force  the  diaphragm  into  such  a  position  that  the 
abdominal  surface  will  be  convex,  while  Kitt  maintains  that 
quantities  of  fluid  in  the  thorax  will  arch  the  diaphragm 
toward  the  abdomen.  A  further  test  of  thoracic  vacuity, 
pneumothorax  or  hydrothorax  is  accomplished  by  making 
a  puncture  half  an  inch  long  between  the  sixth  and  seventh 
ribs.  This  incision  should  be  made  with  the  point  of  a 
knife  through  the  intercostal  muscles  at  a  point  equally 
distant  from  the  ends  of  the  ribs,  after  the  diaphragm  has 
been  palpated.  As  soon  as  the  point  of  the  knife  has  been 
withdrawn  place  the  index-finger  in  the  aperture  as  far  as 
the  first  joint  and  draw  upwards  slightly  to  open  one  end 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


81 


i 

c  ^ 

Eg- 

oS 


Er.3 

'S.c 


^1 
5,3- 

so 

!l 


82  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

of  the  incision.  If  the  thorax  is  a  vacuum  air  will  rush  in 
past  the  finger,  imparting  a  cold  sensation  to  back  of  the 
digit.  If  vacuity  of  the  thorax  is  not  present  fluid,  air  or 
odoriferous  gas  may  pass  out  by  the  finger,  or  there  may 
simply  be  a  failure  of  air  to  rush  into  the  thorax  through 
the  opening.  When  there  is  a  great  quantity  of  fluid  in 
the  thoracic  cavity  it  will  often  escape  through  the  incision 
as  soon  as  the  knife  has  been  withdrawn,  or  immediately 
the  ax  severs  the  ribs. 

Ribs. — Place  a  line  with  the  sharp  edge  of  the  knife 
across  the  lower  part  of  the  chest  from  the  inferior  end  of 
the  fu-st  costa  to  the  xiphoid  cartilage  (Fig.  77) .  This  line 
is  to  be  followed  with  the  saw  or  ax  in  cutting  the  ribs. 
To  obviate  incising  muscular  tissue  with  saw  or  ax  seize 
the  pectoral  muscles  which  remain  on  the  lower  part  of  the 
qhest,  pass  the  knife  between  them  and  the  ribs  and  lay 
the  tissue  over  the  edge  of  the  sternum  (Figs.  63,  77). 
Remove  a  triangiflar  piece  of  abdominal  wall  six  inches  long 
extending  from  the  ensiform  cartilage  backward  along  the 
border  of  the  ribs  (Figs.  76,  77).  We  remove  the  side, 
following  a  method  similar  to  that  of  Czokor. 

To  cut  through  the  ribs  with  an  ax  is  decidedly  more 
expeditious  than  to  saw  through  them,  although  some 
pathologists  prefer  the  latter  method.  Great  care  must  be 
taken  not  to  cut  into  the  pericardium  and  heart,  as  the 
pericardial  fluid  would  become  stained  with  blood  from 
the  ax,  or  perhaps  a  quantity  would  escape  and  prevent 
accurate  measurement  of  the  fluid.  It  is  not  impossible 
that  a  pleuritic  exudate  might  enter  such  an  accidental 
incision,  contaminate  the  pericardial  fluid  and  render  im- 
possible correct  judgment  of  the  nature  of  the  fluid  as  it 
appeared  before  the  sac  were  accidentally  opened.    After 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  83 

washing  and  drying  the  hands  and  ax  handle  so  that  it  will 
not  slip,  take  a  position  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  cadaver 
in  front  of  the  right  foreleg  facing  the  thorax.  Aim  to  fol- 
low the  line  previously  made  with  the  knife  from  the  xiphoid 
cartilage  to  the  inferior  end  of  the  first  rib  (Fig.  77). 
Swing  the  ax  from  right  to  left,  nipping  each  rib  with  two 
inches  of  the  anterior  corner  of  the  blade  only.  So  direct 
the  ax  that  the  blade  will  be  carried  on  out  of  the  thorax 
if  more  force  is  used  than  that  necessary  to  sever  one  rib, 
and  so  that  the  blade  will  not  be  carried  downward  through 
the  ribs  into  the  heart.  In  this  manner  sever  the  inferior 
ends  of  the  ribs  from  the  xiphoid  cartilage  to  the  fu'st  costa. 
To  prepare  the  superior  extremities  of  the  ribs  for 
section  with  the  ax,  take  a  position  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the 
cadaver.  Cut  through  the  musculature  with  a  knife,  diag- 
onally from  the  superior  end  of  the  first  rib  to  the  seventh, 
striking  the  latter  at  a  point  six  inches  from  its  vertebra. 
Trim  the  musculature  away  from  the  ribs  from  this  incision 
to  their  superior  ends.  From  the  seventh  to  the  eighteenth 
ribs  make  an  incision  six  inches  above  and  parallel  with  the 
crest  of  the  back.  Cut  downward  to  the  ribs,  pass  the  knife 
under  the  longissimus  dorsi  and  remove  all  muscle  from 
the  angle  made  by  the  ribs  and  vertebral  spinous  processes 
from  the  seventh  to  the  eighteenth.  A  portion  of  each  rib 
from  the  first  to  the  eighteenth  will  now  be  free  from  muscu- 
lar tissue,  which  greatly  facilitates  cutting  through  them 
(Fig.  78).  This  preparation  completed,  the  hands  and  ax 
should  be  washed  and  dried  as  before  and  each  rib  cut 
through  with  two  inches  of  the  anterior  corner  of  the  blade. 
The  line  followed  by  the  ax  should  be  that  first  made  with 
the  knife  from  the  top  of  the  first  to  a  point  on  the  seventh 
costa  approximately  six  inches  from  its  vertebra,  and  from 


84 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  85 

the  seventh  to  the  eighteenth  in  a  straight  hne  parallel  to 
and  four  to  six  inches  above  the  crest  of  the  back.  After 
each  rib  has  been  severed  press  upon  the  side,  close  to  the 
incision,  with  the  heel  of  the  left  hand.  At  points  where 
it  does  not  give  under  this  pressure  apply  the  ax  again 
until  the  ribs  are  severed. 


pjf,    79 — After  completion  of  ventral  and  dorsal   rib-incisions   left    side   is   elevated   and 
the  diaphragm  incised  close  to  the  ribs  and  the  side  freed.     Line  of  incision  in  the  diaphragm. 

To  complete  the  removal  of  the  side  the  autopsist  should 
stand  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  cadaver  and  cut  the  dia- 
phragm close  to  the  ribs  from  the  last  costa  to  the  xiphoid 
cartilage  (Fig.  79).  During  this  operation  an  assistant 
should  stand  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  cadaver,  reach  over  the 


86  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

side,  place  a  hook  under  the  ventral  border  of  the  ribs,  and 
draw  the  side  upward  as  the  diaphragm  is  being  cut,  until 
the  ribs  and  abdominal  wall  drop  over  the  dorsal  side  of  the 
body,  when  it  may  be  cut  free  and  removed. 

When  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities  have  thus 
been  exposed  and  at  the  time  they  were  being  opened  the 
autopsist  should  carefully  note  the  presence  of  excessive 
fluid,  clots,  gas  and  foreign  bodies  and  the  position  of  the 
organs.  Virchow  says  that  no  organ  should  be  removed 
until  its  exact  relationship  to  other  organs  has  been  deter- 
mined. In  excising  an  organ  place  the  knife  under  the 
attachments  and  cut  upward  whenever  possible  to  avoid 
cutting  adjacent  structures. 

Omentum. — Seize  the  omentum  and  remove  it  with 
the  hands  by  traction. 

Single  Colon. — Extend  the  hand  into  the  pelvic 
cavity;  seize  the  single,  small,  or  floating  colon,  or  the 
abdominal  portion  of  the  rectum  as  it  is  sometimes  called, 
near  the  point  at  which  it  enters  the  pelvis;  squeeze  the 
contents  in  either  direction  for  a  distance  of  six  inches  and 
apply  two  ligatures,  called  a  double  ligature,  one  on  either 
side  of  the  empty  space,  then  cut  through  the  intestine  be- 
tween the  ligatures  ( Fig.  80 ) .  This  prevents  tlie  escape 
of  fecal  matter  into  the  peritoneal  cavity.  Next  force  the 
floating  colon  out  of  the  abdominal  cavity  upward  over 
the  external  angle  of  the  ilium.  Continue  forcing  this  gut 
over  the  dorsal  side  of  the  cadaver  until  no  more  can  be 
extruded,  due  to  its  connection  with  the  terminal  portion 
of  the  double  colon  ( Fig.  80 ) .  When  the  entire  floating 
colon  has  been  forced  over  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium 
the  rectoduodenal  ligament  will  be  found  directly  OA^er  the 
left  kidney   ( Fig.  80 ) .     This  ligament  is  a  guide  to  the 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


87 


m   O   B   f^5   j^   g   K^IN 


CL(I) 


-  o  -"  -,  ap 

P   O  K 

5-3J 


01  E3  fj-S   p   o 


S.g 


-p  D" 


3  2,S£| 


g.ooO:^£-^g,g.p 

■g-:  §  ^  3 1  g  I  r^ 

^  |^«  3.Eg  P  3  3  P- 


2  o  '^"''n'Q-^^ts 


(B    O 


«  £.0-0  S"S 
S-^g-pS-o-g^g 


o  o  tra  B  rt- 

o'g_|S'^ 
»  5'o'3  Q, 


r»-  2.  P  ^  n>  ^C  .  p 

"■c  ^  I  o  «.-g  O. 

p5  rt,  ■     ?  rtM  O  C 

r»  ^"O  S    B-  S  'O    to  . 


o  c  g  g  o  c 


88  VETER1>JARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

points  at  which  double  ligatures  are  made  on  the  jejunum 
and  the  anterior  part  of  the  abdominal  rectum  or  single 
colon.  A  double  ligature  is  applied  to  the  single  colon 
close  to  the  rectoduodenal  ligament  and  another  double  liga- 
ture on  the  jejunum  close  to  that  ligament  (Fig.  80) .  Cut 
between  these  ligatures,  then  remove  the  single  colon  by 
incising  its  mesentery  close  to  the  attachment  of  the  latter 
to  the  sublumbar  region. 

Ligations. — To  ligate  an  intestine,  double  a  stout  piece 
of  twine  12  inches  long.  Force  the  loop  end  under  the  gut 
and  bring  it  up  on  the  opposite  side.  Push  the  two  free 
ends  through  the  loop.  Draw  this  slipknot  tightly  around 
the  intestine.  Divide  the  free  ends  and  carry  them  around 
the  gut  in  opposite  directions,  bringing  them  to  the  top 
again  where  they  are  tied  with  a  surgeon's  knot. 

Small  Intestines. — -Arrange  the  folds  of  the  small 
intestine  properly  on  its  mesentery"  and  examine  the  latter 
carefully.  Seize  the  jejunum  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
rectoduodenal  ligament  where  it  has  been  severed  from  the 
duodenum.  Pull  upward  and  outward  on  the  jejunum 
with  the  left  hand  until  the  mesentery  is  tight,  then  cut 
through  the  latter  close  to  the  gut,  using  great  care  not  to 
injure  the  intestinal  wall  (Fig.  81).  While  cutting  the 
mesentery  with  the  knife  draw  the  intestine  out  of  the  abdo- 
men and  allow  it  to  fall  to  the  floor  at  the  autopsist's  left 
side.  When  a  portion  of  intestine  equal  to  the  length  of 
the  arm  has  been  drawn  out  and  severed  from  the  mesen- 
tery, drop  it  and  take  a  new  gi'ip  closer  up,  and  thus  con- 
tinue drawing  the  intestine  out  and  cutting  it  from  the 
mesentery  until  the  caecum  is  reached.  Here  apply  a  double 
ligature  (Fig.  80)  and  cut  through  the  ileum,  thus  com- 
pleting the  removal  of  all  the  small  intestine  except  the 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


90  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

duodenum,  which  is  left  with  the  stomach  and  removed 
later  with  that  organ. 

Epiploic  Foramen  of  Winslow. — Place  the  left  hand 
in  the  concavity  made  by  the  small  curvature  of  the  stomach, 
follow  the  groove  in  the  liver  and  trace  the  posterior  vena 
cava  from  the  point  where  it  passes  into  the  substance  of 
the  liver  back  to  the  pancreas  and  portal  vein.  The  fin- 
gers may  be  passed  through  a  slit-like  opening  at  this  point 
called  the  epiploic  foramen  of  Winslow.  It  is  formed  by 
the  caudate  lobe  of  the  liver,  posterior  vena  cava,  pancreas, 
gastropancreatic  fold  and  portal  vein.  One  should  be  able 
to  locate  the  epiploic  foramen  readily  as  the  jejunum  may 
pass  through  this  opening,  producing  a  hernia  (Bruck- 
muller,  Cadeac). 

Bile-duct. — To  examine  the  ductus  choledochus  raise 
the  stomach  upward  by  grasping  its  wall  on  the  great  curva- 
ture and  forcing  it  toward  the  vertebra.  The  duct  will 
be  seen  as  a  flat  band  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
wide  extending  from  the  liver  to  the  duodenum.  It  may 
be  opened  with  a  sharp-pointed  scissors.  The  pancreatic 
duct  enters  the  duodenum  with  the  bile-duct.  There  is  no 
free  portion  of  the  pancreatic  duct.  After  the  bile-duct 
has  been  examined  allow  the  stomach  to  fall  back  into  place. 

Spleen. — Grasp  the  spleen  by  the  posterior  basal  angle 
which  points  toward  the  kidney.  Draw  the  organ  forward 
and  cut  through  the  suspensory  ( splenophrenic  and  spleno- 
nephritic)  ligament  and  the  gastrosplenic  omentum  and 
remove  it  from  the  cavity. 

Left  Kidney.— To  remove  the  left  kidney  force  the 
fingers  through  the  perirenal  fat,  pass  them  around  the 
periphery  of  the  organ,  draw  slightly  upon  it  until  the 
renal  vessels  and  ureter  are  exposed,  then  hold  the  kidney 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  91 

in  the  left  hand  and  pass  a  knife  under  the  ureter  and  renal 
blood-vessels  between  the  organ  and  the  sublumbar  muscles 
and  cut  upward,  severing  it  from  the  body.  If  it  is  desired 
to  examine  the  whole  urogenital  system  intact,  cut  through 
the  renal  blood-vessels  but  not  through  the  ureter,  then 
place  the  kidnej^  and  ureter  in  the  pelvic  cavity  until  the 
organs  of  that  region  are  extirpated. 

Left  Adrenal. — The  left  adrenal  gland  lies  directly 
under  the  left  kidney,  and  is  plainly  visible  when  that  organ 
has  been  removed.  Do  not  attempt  to  cut  it  loose,  but  force 
the  fingers  under  and  around  it,  carefully  tearing  it  away 
from  its  attachments.  This  organ  is  very  friable  and  is 
easily  split  or  broken  even  shortly  after  the  death  of  a 
healthy  animal. 

Duodenum. — There  is  danger  of  breaking  the  duode- 
num away  from  the  stomach  if  it  be  allowed  to  remain  in  its 
natural  S-curve  position  while  the  large  intestines  are  being 
drawn  out  of  the  abdominal  cavity.  To  obviate  this,  place 
the  left  hand  between  the  stomach  and  the  double  colon, 
force  it  downward  until  the  knuckles  are  pressed  against 
the  ribs.  Push  the  hand  and  arm  backward  under  the 
duodenum,  and  vessels  and  ligaments  that  attach  to  the 
large  intestines.  When  the  hand  has  reached  a  position 
back  of  the  kidney  close  to  the  sublumbar  muscles,  force  it 
upwards  to  the  rectoduodenal  ligament.  Grasp  the  duo- 
denum with  the  left  hand  at  this  point  where  it  has  been 
severed  from  the  jejunum,  and  draw  it  downward  under 
the  colic  vessels  and  forward  towards  the  stomach.  As  the 
duodenum  is  being  drawn  forward  under  the  colic  vessels 
by  the  left  hand,  the  right  hand,  introduced  back  of  the 
mesenteric  artery,  should  follow  the  gut  along  and  tear  it 
loose  from  its  attachments  so  that  the  traction  exerted  by 


92  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

the  left  hand  will  not  break  it.  The  duodenum  when  pulled 
out  of  the  S -curve  position  should  be  laid  up  over  the  lungs 
still  attached  to  the  stomach  until  the  large  intestine  has 
been  removed.  The  duodenum  is  approximately  1-1.25 
metres  (3'-4')  long  and  in  order  that  the  left  hand  may 
reach  the  end  of  that  intestine  the  arm  must  enter  between 
the  stomach  and  double  colon  as  far  as  the  shoulder.  Dur- 
ing this  operation  the  autopsist  may  stand  astride  the  double 
colon  and  lean  well  forward.  Should  any  pathological 
alteration  of  the  intestine  be  felt  in  passing  the  hand  along 
under  the  duodenum,  the  latter  should  be  left  in  situ  and 
a  very  careful  eiFort  be  made  to  remove  the  colon  and  CcECum 
without  injury  to  this  portion  of  the  small  intestines.  After 
the  duodenum  has  been  laid  over  the  lungs,  complete  the 
preparations  for  removal  of  colon  and  caecum  by  gathering 
up  the  mesentery  from  which  the  small  intestines  have  been 
removed,  pass  a  knife  under  it  and  cut  upward  through  it. 
This  will  expose  the  origin  of  the  fifteen  or  twenty  small 
blood-vessels  which  supplied  this  mesentery  and  the  small 
intestines. 

Double  Colon  and  C^cum, — The  double  colon  and 
caecum  will  now  be  found  extending  from  the  abdomen  at 
right  angles  to  the  line  of  the  back ;  and  the  free  extremity, 
or  pelvic  flexure  of  the  great  colon,  resting  on  the  floor 
( Fig.  80 ) .  The  double  colon  and  the  caecum  have  several 
attachments:  (1)  the  blood-vessels  which  suppty  them; 
( 2 )  the  mesocolon  or  ligamentous  band  which  attaches  them 
to  the  sublumbar  region;  (3)  the  pancreas.  The  first  two 
are  the  principal  structures  which  connect  the  colon  and 
cfecum  with  the  body.  Only  the  large  blood-vessels  should 
be  cut  through.  The  other  structures  should  be  separated 
with  the  fingers.     Great  care  should  be  taken  to  leave  as 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  93 

much  of  the  anterior  mesenteric  artery  with  the  aorta  as 
possible,  so  that  it  may  be  opened  later  and  examined  for 
thrombi  which  are  due  to  embryos  of  the  sderostomum 
hidentatum  and  occur  in  90  per  cent,  of  horses. 

To  loosen  the  colon  and  cacum  from  their  attachments, 
first  grasp  the  stump  of  the  single  colon  close  to  the  great 


Fig  82 — Left  hind  f:ri^pinjt  mo'senteric  vessels  at  point  of  attachment  to  the  double 
colon  and  caecum  Kmfe  held  under  the  mesenteric  blood-vessels  at  the  point  they  should  be 
severed,  thu^  leaving  ■-ix  inches  of  \(s^els  attached  to  the  aorta  for  examinations  later. 

colon  with  the  right  hand  and  draw  it  toward  the  autopsist. 
Force  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand  between  the  pancreas  and 
colon  and  gradually  work  the  pancreas  loose  from  its  posi- 
tion on  the  intestine,  leaving  it  with  the  liver.  Next  grasp 
the  mesenteric  artery  in  the  two  hands  between  the  aorta 
and  the  intestines,  in  the  same  manner  that  one  would  grasp 


94  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

a  cylinder  if  he  were  to  span  its  circumference,  using  the 
thumbs  and  forefingers  of  both  hands.  Tear  the  hgamen- 
tous  bands  and  small  blood-vessels  by  pulling  laterally  from 
the  large  mesenteric  artery.  Do  not  pull  downward  from 
the  aorta  toward  the  intestines  or  the  mesenteric  artery  will 
rupture.  When  the  ligaments  and  smaller  blood-vessels 
have  been  torn  away,  circle  the  mesenteric  artery  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand.  Slide  the  left  hand 
downward  on  the  mesenteric  artery  close  to  the  colon,  pass 
a  knife  under  the  vessels  with  the  blade  close  to  the  gut 
and  cut  upward  through  the  vessels  ( Fig.  82 ) .  This  should 
leave  from  four  to  five  inches  of  mesenteric  vessels  hanging 
from  the  aorta.  When  the  mesenteric  arteries  have  been  cut, 
the  colon  and  ctecum  .will  fall  out  of  the  abdominal  cavity  to 
the  floor.  They  should  be  taken  to  a  clean  space  on  the 
floor  and  opened  according  to  methods  described  later. 

Right  Adrenal. — Grasp  the  stump  of  the  mesenteric 
artery  with  the  right  hand  and  raise  it  upward.  Directly 
beneath  this  blood-vessel  and  closely  applied  to  the  right 
kidney  the  right  adrenal  will  be  found.  Force  the  fingers 
around  it  and  gradually  tear  it  from  its  position  without  the 
use  of  a  knife. 

Right  Kidney. — To  remove  this  organ  force  the  fin- 
gers under  the  perirenal  fat  and  "  shell  "  the  organ  out  in 
the  same  manner  employed  with  the  left  kidney.  Place  a 
knife  under  the  ureter  and  blood-vessels  and  cut  upward 
through  them. 

Stomach. — Force  the  first  two  fingers  of  the  right 
hand  through  the  diaphragm  close  to  the  stomach  above  the 
oesophagus  at  the  point  where  that  organ  penetrates  the 
diaphragm.  When  the  fingers  have  penetrated  into  the 
thorax  grasp  the  oesophagus  and  draw  it  into  the  abdom- 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  95 

inal  cavity  about  six  inches,  apply  a  double  ligature,  place 
a  knife  under  the  oesophagus  and  cut  upward  through  that 
structure.  The  gastrophrenic  ligament  and  gastrohepatic 
omentum  should  be  torn  through  with  the  fingers,  and  the 
stomach,  together  with  the  duodenum,  extirpated. 

LiA^R. — The  liver  may  be  held  away  from  the  dia- 
phragm and  the  strong  ligaments  which  form  its  attach- 
ments cut  through  with  a  knife.  Small  ligaments  may 
be  torn  with  the  fingers.  The  principal  attachments 
of  the  liver  are  the  coronary,  falciform,  round,  right 
lateral,  and  left  lateral  ligaments.  Usually  the  hepatic 
organ  is  allowed  to  remain  in  the  cavity  until  the  exentera- 
tion of  the  abdomen  and  thorax  have  been  effectuated. 
Then  the  liver,  together  with  the  diaphragm  from  which 
it  is  later  dissected,  may  be  extirpated.  To  remove  the 
liver  and  diaphragm  together,  after  the  heart  and  lungs 
have  been  taken  from  the  thorax,  draw  the  diaphragm  tight 
by  applying  traction  with  the  left  hand,  then  circle  it  close 
to  the  ribs  with  a  knife,  starting  close  to  the  aorta.  Great 
care  should  be  taken  not  to  cut  the  aorta  or  anterior  mesen- 
teric artery  during  this  process. 

Pancreas. — The  pancreas  is  removed  with  the  liver. 
This  organ  is  not  frequently  affected  and  does  not  manifest 
the  same  degree  of  importance  as  most  organs  at  the  post- 
mortem table. 

Pericardial  Sac  and  Fluid. — Preparatory  to  open- 
ing the  pericardial  sac  and  examining  the  quantity  and 
character  of  the  pericardial  fluid,  the  surface  of  the  peri- 
cardium, the  knife,  and  the  hands  of  the  autopsist  should 
be  carefully  washed.  This  is  to  prevent  blood  from  any 
of  these  sources  contaminating  the  fluid  and  thus  deceiving 
the  autopsist  as  to  its  true  character. 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


97 


Place  a  longitudinal  incision  through  the  pericardium 
from  the  base  to  the  apex  of  the  heart  ( Fig.  85 ) .  Do  not 
cut  into  the  heart  muscle  or  blood  may  escape  into  the  peri- 
cardial fluid.  Next  draw  one  lip  of  the  incision  aside  with 
the  finger  and  examine  the  character  of  the  fluid.  When  this 
has  been  determined  one  does  not  have  to  be  so  careful  about 


Fk;.  >t     -  xlMnoii  (>>  (  x|M,siii<;  contents  of  pericardial  sac. 

contaminating  the  liquid.  To  determine  the  quantity  place 
the  right  hand  in  the  sac,  grasp  the  apex  of  the  heart  and 
raise  that  organ  upward  completely  out  of  the  sac  (Fig. 
84) .  Have  an  assistant  remove  the  fluid  with  a  pipette  or 
dip  it  out  with  a  cup  kept  for  that  purpose  and  place  it  in 
a  graduate.     After  one  has  done  this  a  few  times  he  can 


98 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


estimate  the  quantity  of  fluid  present  with  a  fair  degi'ee  of 
accuracy  without  measuring  it.    After  the  fluid  has  been 


Fig.  85. — View  of  thorax  after  left  side  has  been  taken  off  and  left  apical  lobe  turned 
back.  Line  of  incision  through  pericardium.  Superior,  anterior  and  inferior  lines  of  incision 
for  ablation  of  heart  and  lungs.  Superior  line  is  through  posterior  mediastinum,  below  the 
aorta  from  the  diaphragm  forward  to  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  upward  through  the  aorta. 
At  this  point  the  left  hand  is  inserted  and  right  apical  lobe  of  the  lung  drawn  out  and  held, 
right  hand  with  knife  crossed  over  the  left  and  the  incision  continued  forward  a  few  inches 
through  the  anterior  mediastinum  above  the  aorta.  Maintaining  the  same  position  the  anterior 
incision  is  made  downward  and  forward  through  all  structures  entering  the  thorax  from  the 
neck.  The  right  apical  lobe  of  the  lung  is  released  and  the  inferior  incision  made  through  the 
inferior  mediastinum  close  to  the  sternum  from  before  to  behind. 

taken  out  or  estimated,  allow  the  heart  to  drop  back  into  its 
proper  position. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  99 

Heaet  and  Lungs. — The  heart,  pericardium,  lungs, 
bronchial  and  mediastinal  lymph-glands,  and  thoracic  por- 
tion of  the  oesophagus  are  excised  together.  The  fii'st  in- 
cision is  made  through  the  posterior  mediastinum  imme- 
diately below  the  aorta,  from  the  diaphragm  forward  to  the 
arch  of  the  aorta.  Turn  the  cutting  edge  of  the  knife 
toward  the  vertebrse  and  cut  through  the  aorta  two  or  three 
inches  from  the  heart.  From  this  point  to  the  first  rib  place 
an  incision  through  the  anterior  mediastinum  immediately 
below  the  vertebrse.  Withdraw  the  knife,  insert  the  left 
hand,  grasp  the  anterior  lobe  of  the  right  lung,  draw  it  out 
and  hold  it  away  from  the  trachea.  Cross  the  right  hand 
over  the  left  and  cut  downward  through  the  trachea,  oesoph- 
agus and  other  structiu'es  that  enter  the  thorax  from  the 
cervical  region.  By  holding  the  apical  lobe  of  the  right 
lung  in  the  left  hand  the  possibility  of  cutting  it  is  avoided. 
The  thoracic  organs  having  been  severed  from  their  supe- 
rior and  anterior  attachments,  one  may  now  cut  through  the 
pericardial  and  mediastinal  attachments  to  the  sternum, 
completing  the  inferior  incision  (Fig.  85).  Readjust  the 
heart  and  lungs  in  their  proper  position  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible. Hold  the  left  forearm  in  a  horizontal  position  and 
point  the  hand  downward  in  such  a  manner  that  the  hand 
is  at  right  angles  to  the  forearm.  Maintain  the  hand  and 
arm  in  this  position,  place  the  hand  between  the  diaphragm 
and  lungs  at  a  point  j  ust  under  the  aorta.  Permit  the  ends 
of  the  fingers  to  constantly  touch  the  ribs  and  keep  the  hand 
in  contact  with  the  diaphragm.  Now  draw  the  hand  from 
the  aorta  to  the  sternum.  When  the  latter  point  has  been 
reached  there  will  be  found  in  the  crook  of  the  left  wrist  the 
posterior  vena  cava  and  phrenic  nerves  (Fig.  86).  Place 
a  knife  under  these  structures  and  cut  upward  through 


100 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


them.  The  thoracic  organs  are  now  free  from  their 
superior,  anterior,  inferior  and  posterior  attachments.  To 
test  this  pass  the  hand  around  the  periphery  of  these  organs. 
To  remove  the  heart  and  hmgs  from  the  thorax,  place  the 


Fig.  86.— View  of  thorax  after  left  side  has  been  removed.  Superior,  anterior,  and 
inferior  incisions  for  ablation  of  heart  and  lungs  have  been  completed.  Blood  has  escaped 
from  cut  vessels,  partially  filling  thoracic  cavity.  Heart  and  lungs  have  gra\'itated  backward 
against  the  diaphragm.  A  knife  has  been  placed  under  the  posterior  vena  cava  and  phrenic 
nerves  to  better  expose  them.      Line  of  incision  for  posterior  incision. 

right  hand  behind  the  heart,  pahii  against  the  myocardium, 
and  gi'asp  the  large  blood-vessels  between  the  heart  and 
lungs.  Raise  the  organs  upward,  balance  the  lungs  on  the 
forearm,  and  carry  them  to  the  tub  (Fig.  87) . 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE 


101 


Blood-vessels. — Place  an  enterotonie  in  the  aorta  at 
the  point  at  which  it  was  severed  and  cut  as  close  to  the 
vertebra^  as  possible.     Open  the  entire  aorta  and  always 


0^       •J'Pf     ip, 


Fig.  87. — Proper  manner  of  grasping  large  blood-vessels  between  heart  and  lungs  in  removing 
them  from  thorax  or  from  sink  to  table. 

open  the  iliac  arteries  as  far  as  the  enterotome  can  be  forced. 
Thrombi  at  the  origin  of  the  iliac  arteries  are  not  uncom- 
mon.    Carefully  open  the  coeliac  axis,  renal,  anterior  and 


102  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

posterior  mesenteric  arteries  with  the  enterotome.  Parasitic 
thrombi  are  present  in  the  anterior  mesenteric  artery  of  90 
per  cent,  of  horses  (Figs.  88,  89). 

Pleura  and  Peritoneum. — The  right  abdominal  wall 
should  be  cut  through  from  the  pubis  downward  to  the 
ribs  to  permit  drainage,  and  the  thoracic  and  peritoneal 
cavities  flushed  out  with  water  and  the  inside  of  the  large 
blood-vessels  washed.    This  facilitates  the  examination  of 


Fig.  88. — View  of  cadaver  after  evisceration  of  thorax,  abdomen,  and  pelvis.  Right 
posterior  abdominal  wall  cut  through,  abdominal  flap  laid  down  and  cavities  washed  out..  Aorta 
mesenteric,  and  ihac  blood-vessels  opened.  Technie  on  neck,  muscles,  right  carpal  and  tarsal 
joints  completed. 

the  ribs  on  the  right  side,  vertebrae,  pleura,  peritoneum,  con- 
dition of  the  large  blood-vessels,  the  inguinal  canal  and  ring 
(Figs.  83,  88,89). 

Lymph-glands. — The  visceral  lymph-glands  should  be 
incised  when  the  technie  is  performed  on  their  corresponding 
organs.  Of  the  parietal  lymph-glands  the  lumbar  glands 
may  be  found  along  the  aorta,  the  internal  iliac  at  the  bifur- 
cation of  the  aorta,  and  the  external  iliac  at  the  bifurcation 
of  the  circumflex  iliac  artery  where  they  should  be  incised. 

Psoas  Muscles. — Discission  of  the  psoas  muscles  should 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE         103 

be  made  in  vertical  lines  half  an  inch  apart  with  a  sharp 
knife  (Fig.  83). 

OvAKiES  AND  Uterus. — Thcsc  organs  may  remain  in 
situ  until  the  organs  of  the  pelvic  cavity  are  removed. 


Fig.  89. — Aorta,  mesenteric  and  iliac  blood-vessels  properly  opened. 

SUMMARY  OF  THORAX  AND  ABDOMEN 

Position:  Place  horse,  ass,  or  mule  on  the  right  side. 

Skin:  Remove  the  skin  only  when  desirable  com- 
pulsory. 

Foreleg:  Place  a  long,  deep  incision  before  and  behind 
the  leg,  raise  it  up  and  sever  it  close  to  the  body. 

Hind  leg:  Start  an  incision  back  of  the  external  angle 
of  the  ilium,  cut  through  the  tensor  fascia  lata,  through  the 
skin  on  the  inner  side  of  the  leg,  into  the  coxofemoral  joint. 


104  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

backward  over  the  ischial  tuberosity,  then  sever  it  close 
to  the  body. 

Penis  or  mammary  gland:  Dissect  the  penis  or  mam- 
mary gland  from  the  abdomen  and  lay  it  over  the  leg.  Do 
not  cut  through  the  penis. 

Xiphoid-pubic  incision :  Make  an  incision  through  belly 
wall  along  the  median  line  from  the  xiphoid  cartilage  to 
the  pubis,  protecting  the  intestines  with  the  fingers. 

Pubic-lumbar  incision :  Cut  through  the  abdominal  wall 
from  the  pubis  to  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  forcing  the  butt  of 
the  knife  into  the  abdomen  first  and  protecting  the  intes- 
tines with  the  two  fingers  of  the  right  hand. 

Position  of  organs:  Note  the  position  of  all  organs  in 
the  thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities.  Observe  the  external 
appearance  of  all  thoracic  and  abdominal  structures. 

Foreign  material:  Determine  the  quantity  and  charac- 
ter of  fluids  and  foreign  substances  in  the  thorax  and 
abdomen. 

Diaphragm:  Feel  of  the  diaphragm  to  determine  the 
vacuity  of  the  thorax. 

Intercostal  puncture :  Puncture  the  thorax  between  the 
sixth  and  seventh  ribs  and  determine  whether  air  enters  or 
escapes  from  the  cavity. 

Preparation  of  ribs  for  section:  (a)  Draw  a  line  with 
the  sharp  edge  of  a  knife  from  the  inferior  end  of  the  first 
rib  to  the  xiphoid  cartilage. 

( b )  Remove  pectoral  muscles  from  the  inferior  portion 
of  the  thorax. 

(c)  Extirpate  a  piece  of  abdominal  wall  back  of  the 
xiphoid  cartilage  along  the  border  of  the  ribs. 

(d)  Clear  away  the  musculature  from  the  superior 
end  of  the  ribs   from  the  first  to  the  seventh  inclusive. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        105 

Clear  away  the  musculature  of  the  back  from  the  seventh 
to  the  last  rib  for  a  space  six  inches  above  the  line  of  the 
back. 

Ribs:  Cut  through  the  ribs  from  the  xiphoid  cartilage 
to  the  inferior  end  of  the  first  rib  and  from  the  superior  end 
of  the  first  rib  to  the  last  rib.  From  the  seventh  costa  back- 
ward to  the  last  rib  place  a  line  of  incision  a  few  inches 
above  the  vertebrge. 

Test  incision  of  ribs:  Press  downward  in  the  ribs  with 
the  heel  of  the  hand  along  the  incision  made  with  the  ax  to 
see  if  all  ribs  have  been  severed. 

Diaphragm :  Have  an  assistant  hold  the  ribs  up  with  a 
hook,  then  cut  through  the  diaphragm  from  the  last  rib 
to  the  xiphoid  cartilage  close  to  its  costal  attachment. 

Remove  side :  Push  the  entire  side  upward  and  allow  it 
to  fall  back  of  the  spine  to  the  floor. 

Thoracic  contents:  Observe  the  presence  of  foreign 
bodies  or  liquid  material  in  the  thorax  and  note  the  position 
and  character  of  thoracic  viscera. 

Omentum :  Tear  aw  ay  the  omentum  with  the  fingers. 

Ligations:  Apply  four  double  ligatures  to  the  intes- 
tines six  inches  apart  after  squeezing  the  intestinal  contents 
in  either  direction  from  the  point  of  ligation:  (a)  on  the 
small  colon  at  its  entrance  to  the  pelvis;  (b)  on  the  small 
colon  at  the  rectoduodenal  ligament;  (c)  on  the  jejunum 
close  to  the  rectoduodenal  ligament;  (d)  on  the  ileum  at 
its  entrance  to  the  c^cum. 

To  ligate  an  intestine  double  a  stout  piece  of  tw^ne  12 
inches  long.  Force  the  loop  under  the  gut.  Bring  it  up 
on  the  opposite  side.  Push  the  two  free  ends  through  the 
loop  and  draw  this  slipknot  tightly  around  the  intestine. 
Divide  the  free  ends  and  carry  them  around  the  gut  in 


106  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

opposite  directions,  finally  bringing  them  to  the  top  again 
where  they  are  tied  with  a  surgeon's  knot. 

Small  colon :  Divide  the  gut  between  the  ligatures,  cut 
through  the  mesentery  close  to  the  body  and  remove  small 
colon. 

Jejunum  and  ileum:  Arrange  jejunum  and  ileum  in 
proper  order  on  their  mesentery  and  cut  between  the  liga- 
tures. Trim  the  intestines  from  the  mesentery  by  pulling 
on  the  intestine  with  the  left  hand  and  cutting  through  the 
mesentery  close  to  the  gut  with  a  knife  held  in  the  right  hand. 
Start  at  the  jejunum  and  pull  and  cut  at  the  same  time. 
In  this  manner  six  feet  of  intestine  may  be  removed  at  each 
incision  through  the  mesentery  without  injury  to  the  gut, 
if  the  intestine  has  been  arranged  evenly  and  freely. 

Epiploic  foramen :  Follow  the  posterior  vena  cava  back- 
ward and  hook  the  finger  into  a  slit  formed  principally  by 
the  pancreas,  portal  vein,  and  posterior  vena  cava. 

Bile-duct :  Seize  the  stomach  by  the  left  extremity,  force 
it  upward  toward  the  spine,  and  examine  the  duct  which 
extends  from  the  liver  to  the  duodenum. 

Spleen:  Separate  and  remove  the  spleen  from  the 
stomach  and  right  kidney  by  severing  the  suspensory  liga- 
ment and  the  gastrosplenic  omentum. 

Left  kidney:  "  Shell  "  the  left  kidney  out  of  its  peri- 
renal fat  with  the  fingers  and  cut  through  the  ureter  and 
renal  blood-vessels  close  to  the  organ. 

Left  adrenal :  Remove  the  left  adrenal  by  slowly  tearing 
it  away  with  the  fingers. 

Duodenum :  Pass  the  left  hand  between  the  stomach  and 
great  colon.  Follow  the  duodenum  to  the  rectoduodenal 
ligament  with  the  left  hand.  Seize  the  duodenum  where 
severed  from  the  jejunum  and  draw  it  backward  under  the 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        107 

great  colon  and  vessels  to  the  stomach.  Then  place  it  over 
the  lungs  where  it  will  not  be  injured  in  removing  the  large 
intestine. 

Great  colon  and  c£ecum:  Separate  the  pancreas  and 
colon  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  holding  the  stump 
of  the  small  colon  in  the  right  hand.  Tear  away  all  other 
attachments  with  the  fingers  except  the  large  arteries. 
Place  a  knife  under  the  large  mesenteric  arteries  and  cut 
upward,  leaving  as  much  of  the  anterior  mesenteric  artery 
with  the  aorta  as  possible. 

Right  adrenal:  Tear  this  organ  loose  with  the  fingers. 

Right  kidney:  Remove  the  right  kidney  in  the  manner 
employed  to  extirpate  the  left  renal  organ. 

Stomach :  Push  two  fingers  through  the  diaphragm  on 
the  right  side  of  the  oesophagus,  pull  that  structure  back  six 
inches,  ligate  and  sever  it.  Tear  the  other  attachments 
loose  with  the  fingers  and  remove  the  stomach  and  duode- 
num together. 

Liver:  Leave  the  liver  until  the  evisceration  of  the 
thorax  has  been  completed,  then  circle  the  diaphragm  close 
to  the  ribs  with  a  knife  and  remove  liver  and  diaphragm 
together. 

Pancreas:  Remove  the  pancreas  with  the  liver. 

Pericardial  sac  and  fluid :  Wash  pericardium,  knife  and 
hands  to  prevent  soiling  of  the  pericardial  fluid.  Incise 
pericardiimi  vertically  from  base  to  apex  and  examine  the 
color  of  the  fluid.  Grasp  apex  of  the  heart  and  lift  that 
organ  out  of  the  sac,  then  estimate  or  measure  the  quantity 
of  fluid  and  replace  the  heart. 

Heart  and  lungs:  Cut  forward  through  the  posterior 
mediastinum  to  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  upward  through  the 
aorta  at  this  point,  and  forward  above  the  heart  through 


108  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

the  anterior  mediastinum.  Draw  the  apical  lobe  of  the  right 
lung  out  of  its  position  to  avoid  injuring  it.  Cut  through 
trachea  and  other  structures  entering  the  thorax  from  the 
neck.  Incise  the  inferior  pericardial  and  mediastinal  attach- 
ments. Kink  the  left  wrist  and  draw  it  along  the  anterior 
face  of  the  diaphragm  to  catch  the  blood-vessels  and  nerves 
which  connect  with  it  and  sever  them  when  located.  Grasp 
the  blood-vessels  between  the  heart  and  lungs  close  to  the 
heart,  balance  the  lungs  on  the  forearm  and  carry  the 
organs  to  the  tub. 

Blood-vessels:  Open  the  aorta,  mesenteric  and  iliac 
arteries  with  an  enter otome. 

Pleura  and  peritoneum:  Cut  downward  through  the 
belly  wall  from  the  pubis  to  the  ribs  and  flush  out  the  inside 
of  the  blood-vessels,  thorax  and  abdomen  with  water.  This 
better  facilitates  examination  of  the  pleura,  peritoneum 
and  the  ribs. 

Lymph-glands:  Incise  the  lumbar,  internal  and  exter- 
nal iliac  lymph-glands. 

Psoas  muscles:  Incise  the  psoas  muscles  vertically  in 
lines  a  half  inch  apart. 

Ovaries  and  uterus :  Allow  ovaries  and  uterus  to  remain 
in  the  abdominal  cavity  until  the  pelvic  cavity  is  exenterated. 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Pelvic  Cavity 
Preparation. — Begin  at  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium 
and  cut  away  all  the  musculature  from  that  bone  to  the 
internal  angle,  then  backward  to  the  ischial  tuberosity.  Re- 
move all  the  musculature  down  to  the  sacrosciatic  ligament. 
Mammary  Gland  or  Penis. — ^Dissect  the  mammary 
gland  away  from  the  pelvis  and  remove  it  from  the  position 
back  of  the  leg  where  it  was  placed  after  dissection  from 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        109 

the  abdomen.  If  the  animal  be  a  male  dissect  the  penis  from 
its  attachment  along  the  pelvis,  taking  care  not  to  injure 
it  at  the  ischial  arch  of  the  pubis.  Draw  the  penis  straight 
back  until  it  extends  in  a  direct  line  from  the  floor  of  the 
pelvic  cavity.  If  the  animal  has  not  been  skinned  place  an 
incision  completely  around  the  penis  and  anus  through  the 
integument,  holding  the  penis  straight  back  to  prevent 
injury  to  it.  Should  the  animal  be  a  female  place  an  inci- 
sion around  the  vulva  and  anus.  The  object  is  to  remove 
all  the  organs  of  the  pelvis  together  and  separate  them  after 
they  have  been  excised.  In  males  when  the  urogenital 
system  is  to  be  removed  intact  the  kidneys  attached  to  the 
ureters,  and  the  testicles  attached  to  the  spermatic  vessels 
are  taken  out  together  with  the  rectum,  urinary  bladder  and 
penis.  In  females  the  kidneys,  urinary  bladder,  rectum, 
ovaries,  uterus  and  vagina  are  removed  together. 

Pelvic  Organs. — To  excise  the  pelvic  organs,  hold  the 
external  genitals  and  rectum  to  one  side,  after  the  incision 
has  been  made  around  them  through  the  skin.  Dissect  the 
organs  free  from  their  peripheral  attachments  to  the  walls 
of  the  pelvis,  holding  the  cutting  edge  of  the  knife  closely 
applied  to  pelvic  bones  to  avoid  injury  to  the  organs.  To 
aid  in  reaching  the  anterior  attachments  cut  carefully 
around  the  sacrosciatic  ligament  from  above,  and  remove 
it  from  its  position  between  the  ischium  and  sacrum.  From 
this  opening  one  may  readily  reach  and  sever  all  attachments 
of  the  pelvic  organs.  One  may  also  work  from  the  abdom- 
inal opening  by  changing  his  position.  In  class-work  other 
students  are  working  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  cadaver  and 
one  must  exenterate  the  pelvis  from  the  posterior  aspect. 
When  all  organs  have  been  loosened  remove  and  place  them 
on  the  table. 


110  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Exenteration  of  the  pelvis  may  be  facilitated  by  removal 
of  the  acetabulum  and  two  inches  of  the  branch  of  each  bone 
which  contributes  to  its  formation.  To  accomplish  this 
saw  through  the  shaft  of  the  ilium,  acetabular  branch  of 
the  ischium,  and  transverse  branch  of  the  pubis  two  or  three 
inches  from  the  cotyloid  cavity.  One  may  also  saw  through 
the  shaft  of  the  ilivim,  and  saw  or  cut  through  the  pelvic 
symphysis  with  the  ax,  then  remove  the  piece  of  pelvis  thus 
freed  (Figs.  76,  83). 

SUMMARY  OF  PELVIC   CAVITY 

Preparation:  Excise  all  musculature  from  the  upper 
side  of  the  os  innominatum  down  to  the  sacrosciatic  liga- 
ment, within  the  triangle  made  by  the  external  and  internal 
angles  of  the  ilium  and  ischial  tuberosity. 

^lammar}^  gland  or  penis :  Remove  the  mammary  gland 
or  dissect  the  penis  from  the  inferior  aspect  of  the  pelvis. 
Draw  the  penis  straight  back.  Place  an  incision  around 
the  external  genitals  and  the  anus  through  the  skin. 

Pelvic  organs:  Carefully  remove  the  sacrosciatic  liga- 
ment and  then  work  the  pelvic  organs  loose  from  their 
peripheral  attachments  through  this  opening  and  from  the 
incision  around  the  genitals  and  anus. 

Pelvic  organs  in  situ:  Saw  through  the  shaft  of  the 
ilium  and  pubic  symphysis,  and  remove  side  of  pelvis. 

Operative  Technic  for  Leg  and  Foot 

Muscles. — The  heavy  musculature  of  the  hind  leg, 
when  that  extremity  is  placed  in  a  horizontal  position, 
should  be  cut  in  parallel  planes  and  examined  (Fig.  83) . 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        111 

PoPLiTEAi.  Lymph-gland. — Make  an  incision  from 
behind  forward  toward  the  femorotibial  articulation.  The 
pophteal  lymph-glands  may  be  located  immediately  back  of 
the  origin  of  the  gastrochnemius  muscle. 

Stifle  Joint. — Flex  the  joint  and  start  an  incision 
around  the  anterior  surface  below  the  patella.  Cut  through 
the  joint  capsule,  lateral,  patellar,  and  crucial  ligaments, 
lay  the  articulation  open  and  separate  the  patella. 

TiBiOTARSAL  JoiNT. — To  opcu  the  tibiotai'sal  joint  hold 
the  foot  backward,  place  the  cutting  edge  of  the  knife 
against  the  anterior  face  of  the  joint  and  cut  directly 
through  the  capsular  and  other  ligaments  of  the  articula- 
tion and  the  tendons  of  the  perforans,  perforatus,  and  gas- 
trochnemius. Remove  the  portion  of  the  leg  below  the 
tibiotarsal  joint  and  place  it  on  a  table  (Fig.  88) . 

Scapulohumeral  Joint. — Cut  into  the  posterior  face 
of  the  joint,  sever  all  ligaments,  and  lay  the  joint  open. 

Axillary  Lymph-gland. — These  glands  are  found  at 
the  junction  of  the  external  thoracic,  subcapsular,  and 
brachial  veins.  The  cubital  lymph-glands  lie  behind  the 
biceps  muscle  on  the  brachial  vessels  and  the  median  nerve. 
They  should  be  incised  in  many  places. 

Carpal  Joint. — Draw  the  foot  forward  and  start  the 
incision  on  the  posterior  face  of  the  articulation.  Cut 
through  tendons  and  ligaments  and  sever  the  leg  at  the 
joint  (Fig.  88). 

Tendons,  Etc. — If  the  skin  has  not  been  removed  be- 
low the  carpal  or  tarsal  joints,  lay  the  leg  upon  its  anterior 
surface  and  make  an  incision  down  the  median  line  of  the 
posterior  surface  from  the  tarsal  or  carpal  joint  to  the 
frog.    Place  a  circular  incision  around  the  foot  just  above 


112 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


the  horny  wall.  Lay  back  the  skin  from  the  margins  of 
these  incisions  and  remove  it.  Separate  the  perforatus 
and  perforans  from  the  tarsal  or  carpal  joint  to  the  frog, 
and  after  the  frog  and  sole  have  been  removed  follow  the 
perforans  to  its  attachments  to  the  os  pedis.  Open  and 
inspect  the  tendon  sheaths  and  burs^e. 

Frog. — Chisel  around  the  outline  of  the  frog,  seize  it 
by  the  base  with  a  strong  iron  pinchers,  pry  downward  to- 
ward the  point  and  remove  the  structure  (Fig.  90) . 


Fig.  00. — Tines  of  incision  for  ablation  of 
horny  sole  and  frog. 


Fig.  Ql.^Lines  of  incision  for  sawing  the  wall 
of  the  hoof. 


Sole. — Make  an  incision  around  the  sole  with  the  chisel, 
following  the  white  line.  Saw  through  it  vertically  and 
horizontally,  thus  dividing  its  surface  into  four  parts.  Place 
a  chisel  in  the  middle  of  the  sole  and  pry  up  the  corner  of 
one  quarter,  then  seize  it  with  the  pinchers  and  bend  it 
toward  the  periphery  of  the  sole  until  it  is  completely 
separated  from  the  foot.  Remove  the  other  parts  of  the 
sole  in  the  same  manner  (Fig.  90) . 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        113 

Wall. — Turn  the  leg  over  so  that  the  anterior  surface 
is  uppermost.  Saw  through  the  horny  wall  vertically  in 
three  places  in  such  manner  that  the  wall  will  be  divided 
into  four  equal  parts.  With  a  knife  separate  the  horny 
and  fleshy  leaves  of  the  wall  at  the  coronary  band.  Make 
this  separation  in  the  middle  of  one  of  the  equal  divisions 
of  the  wall  and  only  deep  enough  to  afford  a  grip  for  the 
pinchers.  Insert  the  pinchers  and  pry  downward  toward 
the  toe  until  that  portion  of  the  wall  is  released.  Remove 
the  other  sections  of  the  structure  in  the  same  manner. 
Examine  the  horny  and  fleshy  leaves.  A  vise  or  an  assistant 
should  hold  the  foot  while  the  frog,  sole  and  wall  are  being 
excised  (Fig.  91). 

Phalangeal  and  Navicular  Joints. — After  the  sole 
and  wall  have  been  removed,  cut  the  perforatus  and  per- 
forans  from  their  inferior  attachments.  Remove  the  navic- 
ular and  sesamoid  bones  and  the  lateral  cartilages,  then 
disarticulate  the  phalanges  by  severing  their  ligaments. 
Examine  the  bones  carefully  for  exostoses,  fractures,  etc., 
and  remove  a  small  portion  of  periosteum  with  the  cross 
chisel. 

SUMMARY  or  leg  AND  FOOT 

Incise  the  muscles  of  the  hind  leg  in  parallel  horizontal 
planes.  Examine  the  regional  lymph-glands.  Disarticu- 
late the  stifle,  tarsal,  scapulohumeral,  and  carpal  joints. 
Open  the  principal  tendon  sheaths  and  bursas  and  separate 
the  perforatus  and  perforans  tendons.  Remove  the  frog, 
sole,  and  wall  of  the  foot.  Excise  the  navicular  and  sessa- 
moid  bones  and  lateral  cartilages.  Finally  disarticulate 
the  phalangeal  joints. 


114  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Operati\^  Technic  for  Musculature,  Bones 
AND  Joints 

Musculature. — As  a  general  rule  muscle  tissue,  like 
the  organs,  should  be  so  incised  that  the  part  may  be  recon- 
structed as  nearly  as  possible.  The  incisions  should  be  long 
and  clean  and  be  made  with  a  sharp  knife.  This  leaves  a 
smooth  surface  to  be  examined.  A  dull  knife  makes  a 
ragged  incision  and  short  incisions  produce  a  wavy  surface 
for  inspection.  Virchow  says  that  a  clean  incision  made 
in  the  wrong  place  is  better  than  a  ragged  incision  made 
in  the  right  place. 

As  the  technic  on  head,  neck,  back,  thorax,  abdomen,  and 
pelvis  is  being  effectuated,  the  muscles  should  be  examined. 
They  should  be  sliced  in  parallel  vertical  or  horizontal  lines. 
For  examining  any  particular  muscle  for  metaplasia,  rup- 
ture, etc.,  it  must  be  dissected  out  along  anatomical  lines. 

Bones. — In  every  autopsy  one  of  the  long  bones  con- 
taining yellow  bone-marrow  should  be  sawed  in  two  parts 
longitudinally  or  split  with  an  ax.  Another  should  be 
sawed  crosswise  in  several  places.  This  facilitates  examina- 
tion of  the  thickness  of  articular  cartilage  and  condition  of 
bone-marrow.  A  few  ribs  should  be  sawed  through  for 
examination  of  red  bone-marrow. 

Bones  of  Legs.^To  examine  bones  for  fractures  it  is 
necessary  to  free  them  from  muscle  tissue.  This  procedure 
depends  upon  the  location  of  the  bone.  To  remove  the 
bones  of  the  legs,  cut  through  the  musculature  down  to  the 
bone  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  long  axis.  Then  re- 
move the  muscle  from  all  sides,  and  cut  all  attachments. 

Os  Innominatum. — After  the  musculature  has  been 
removed  from  the  upper  side  of  the  os  innominatum,  one 
should  seize  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium  with  one  hand 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE        115 

and  the  ischial  tuberosity  with  the  other  and  so  alternately 
pull  and  push  that  crepitation  may  be  readily  heard  or  felt 
if  fractures  be  present.  For  the  examination  of  the  right 
side  of  the  os  innominatum,  sever  the  spine  in  the  lumbar 
region  with  the  saw ;  turn  the  posterior  part  of  the  cadaver 
on  its  left  side,  disarticulate  the  right  hind  leg  at  the  coxo- 
femoral  joint;  remove  muscles  from  iliimi  and  ischium  and 
examine  the  osseous  structures. 

Ribs. — Removal  of  the  upper  side  of  the  cadaver,  and 
washing  out  the  thoracic  cavity  after  evisceration  exposes 
the  ribs  for  inspection.  A  few  ribs  should  be  sawed 
through  for  examination  of  the  red  bone-marrow. 

Bones  of  the  Head. — During  the  technic  on  the 
cranium,  nasal  passages,  and  sinuses,  the  bones  are  so  in- 
cised as  to  facilitate  a  close  examination  of  their  structure. 
The  mandible  should  be  sawed  through  laterally  when  there 
is  any  obvious  enlargement  present. 

Phalanges. — These  bones  should  be  disarticulated 
during  the  technic  on  the  foot,  then  sawed  in  two  vertically. 

Joints. — Joints  to  be  examined  are  disarticulated. 
This  procedure  depends  upon  the  anatomical  position  and 
should  be  followed  out  by  cutting  downward  through  all 
structures  to  the  joint,  then  severing  all  ligaments  and  lay- 
ing the  joint  open.  Tendons  over  the  joints  should  be 
examined  before  they  are  incised.  The  fluid  of  the  articu- 
lation and  the  articular  surfaces  should  be  closely  inspected. 

SUMMARY   of   MUSCULATURE,    BONES   AND   JOINTS 

Musculature :  For  the  examination  of  muscule  tissue  in 
general,  long,  smooth  incisions  should  be  made  either  ver- 
tically or  horizontally.  For  special  examination  individual 
muscles  should  be  dissected  out  for  examination. 


116  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Bones :  In  every  autopsy  at  least  one  long  bone  should 
be  sawed  through  longitudinally  for  examination  of  the 
yellow  bone-marrow,  and  a  few  ribs  severed  for  the  inspec- 
tion of  the  red  bone-marrow.  To  examine  any  particular 
bone  remove  the  surrounding  muscle  tissue,  sever  its  articu- 
lar attachments  and  saw  through  it  in  several  places. 

Joints :  Joints  to  be  examined  are  disarticulated  by  cut- 
ting through  all  surrounding  structures  down  to  the  joint, 
then  severing  all  articular  ligaments,  and  laying  the  joint 
open. 


U>.* 


CHAPTER  VI 
INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS 

Position  and  Skin  of  Cadaver. — Following  a  careful 
external  examination,  which  should  be  conducted  in  the 
same  general  manner  with  all  animals,  the  ruminant  is 
placed  on  the  left  side  (Fig.  92)  and  the  skin  and  legs 
together  removed  from  the  upper  or  right  side.  The  skin 
may  be  completely  removed  or  for  convenience  and  expedi- 
tion the  right  fore  and  hind  legs  may  be  thrown  off  with 
the  integument  of  the  upper  half  of  the  cadaver  when  the 
commercial  value  of  the  hide  has  to  be  considered  (Fig.  93) . 
The  position  of  the  ruminant  at  autopsy  is  the  reverse  of 
that  of  the  horse  for  anatomical  reasons.  When  the  cow 
or  sheep  is  placed  on  the  left  side  the  rumen  is  undermost, 
and  as  the  right  side  of  the  cadaver  is  removed  the  aboma- 
sum,  duodenum  and  other  intestines  are  brought  uppermost 
and  are  accessible  for  ligation  and  inspection. 

Operative  Technic  for  Head,  Neck  and  Back 

Thyroid  Glands. — After  the  skin  has  been  removed, 
or  before,  if  its  commercial  value  is  not  to  be  considered, 
place  an  incision  on  the  median  line  of  the  neck  just  back 
of  the  larynx  down  to  the  rings  of  the  trachea  ( Fig.  92 ) . 
Insert  the  fingers  to  the  side  of  the  latter,  seize,  withdraw, 
and  sever  the  thyroid  glands. 

Parotid  Salivary  and  Subparotid  Lymph-glands. 
— Immediately  below  the  ear  and  back  of  the  maxilla  the 
parotid  salivary  gland  may  be  examined.  The  subparotid 
lymph-glands  are  partially  covered  by  the  upper  anterior 

117 


118 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


t^^ 


a  o 
»2 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        119 

border  of  the  parotid  salivary  glands.  After  both  have 
been  examined  remove  the  latter.  The  left  parotid  struc- 
tui'es  may  be  inspected  after  the  head  has  been  removed. 


Fig.  93. — This  view  Bhows  the  skin  of  the  right  side  together  with  the  right  fore  and 
hind  leg  dissected  back  from  a  single  ventral  median,  incision  from  the  chin  to  the  anus.  The 
legs  and  skin  of  the  right  side  are  next  thrown  over  the  dorsal  side  of  the  animal  and  the  autopsy- 
conducted  without  injury  to  the  hide  which  may  be  removed  later.  This  is  done  only  when 
the  skin  must  be  preserved  for  its  commercial  value.  It  saves  the  time  and  labor  of  the  autop- 
sist  which  would  be  consumed  in  skinning  the  entire  cadaver  or  the  right  legs.  The  udder  is 
separated  from  the  abdomen  and  lines  are  shown  for  the  xiphoid-pubic,  pubic-lumbar  incis- 
ions and  sternal  as  well  as  part  of  dorsal  thoracic  incisions. 


Submaxillary  Lymph-  and  Salivary  Glands. — The 
submaxillary  salivary  glands  may  be  located  in  the  inter- 
maxillary space  opposite  the  angle  of  the  jaw,  and  the  sub- 
maxillary lymph-glands  lie  between  the  sternocephalicus 


120 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


muscles  and  the  submaxillary  salivary  glands.  There  are 
two  in  number,  quite  small  and  sometimes  difficult  to  find 
(Fig.  94). 

Right  Ramus  of  Mandible. — ^For  the  examination 
in  situ  of  many  structures  of  the  head  and  neck  the  right 
ramus  of  the  lower  jaw  is  removed  and  the  jugular  furrow 


Inferior  cervical  1 


Middle  cervical  1.  gs.       | 

Superior  cervical  1.  g. 

Atlantal 


1  _  Retropharyngeal  1.  gs. 


Submaxillary 


Fig.  94. — Skin  of  the  right  side  of  the  head  and  neck  removed  and  thrown  over  the 
dorsal  side.  The  right  fore  leg  was  taken  off  with  the  skin  of  the  body  and  the  scapula  pro- 
trudes above  the  neck.  The  skin  of  the  right  side  of  the  head  is  supported  on  the  right  horn. 
The  right  ramus  of  the  mandible  has  been  removed.  Tongue,  larynx  and  trachea  have  been 
freed  from  the  head  and  neck.  Tonsils  and  lymph  glands  are  exposed.  Right  jugular  vein, 
carotid  artery,  and  vagus  have  been  separated  and  laid  back.  Analogous  structures  on  the 
left  side  are  exposed  by  turning  head  and  neck  over. 


laid  open.  The  right  part  of  the  mandible  is  taken  off  by 
passing  a  knife  under  the  bone  from  the  temporomaxillary 
articulation  to  the  symphysis,  freeing  it  from  all  attach- 
ments between  these  points.  The  next  incision  is  made  from 
the  temporomandibular  articulation  to  the  commissure  of 
the  lips  downward  to  the  teeth.  A  piece  of  lip  two  inches 
long  is  excised  over  the  dental  space  and  the  mandible  sawed 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS       121 

through  just  above  the  symphysis  (Fig.  92).  The  right 
ramus  of  the  lower  jaw  is  now  held  in  place  only  by  the 
temporomandibular  articulation.  Grasp  the  right  side  of 
the  mandible  just  back  of  the  point  at  which  it  was  sawed 
through,  pull  upward  and  backward,  disarticulating  the 
jaw  at  the  temple. 

Tonsils. — Cut  through  the  soft  palate  with  a  knife, 
break  both  great  cornua  of  the  hyoid  bone  with  a  bone  for- 
ceps, and  rotate  the  larynx  slightly  upward.  On  the  outer 
surface  of  the  pharynx  just  anterior  to  the  epiglottis  on 
either  side  there  is  a  bean-shaped  organ  of  yellow  color 
about  the  size  of  a  small  walnut.  By  placing  the  finger  on 
the  inner  side  of  the  pharyngeal  wall  opposite  this  organ 
the  tonsillar  sinus  can  be  located.  The  tonsil  is  sometimes 
mistaken  for  a  lymph-gland  but  on  section  it  presents  lobu- 
lations while  the  lymph-gland  does  not  ( Fig.  94 ) . 

Retropharyngeal  Lymph-glands. — After  locating 
the  tonsils,  place  the  hand  above  and  back  of  the  larynx, 
break  down  the  loose  connective  tissue,  locate  and  withdraw 
both  retropharyngeal  lymph-glands  from  the  same  opening 
(Fig.  94). 

Jugular  Furrow  and  Structures. — Lay  open  the 
jugular  furrow  by  placing  an  incision  through  the  super- 
ficial cervical  muscles  an  inch  above  the  jugular  groove, 
from  the  right  wing  of  the  atlas  to  the  fu-st  rib.  Separate 
and  examine  the  jugular  structures  (Figs.  92,  94) . 

Lymph-glands. — The  atlantal  lymph-gland  is  disc- 
shaped and  lies  just  under  the  lateral  wing  of  the  atlas. 
The  anterior  cervical  lymph-glands  lie  along  the  carotid 
artery  below  and  posterior  to  the  atlantal  gland.  The 
middle  cervical  glands  are  small  and  lie  on  the  lateral  supe- 
rior surface  of  the  trachea  at  about  the  middle  of  that  organ. 


122 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


close  to  the  cartilaginous  rings.  The  posterior  cervical  or 
prepectoral  glands  lie  between  the  first  two  ribs  at  their 
superior  extremities  (Fig.  94). 

Tongue,  Larynx,  Trachea  and  Esophagus. — These 
structures  are  extirpated  together.  To  remove  them  grasp 
the  tongue,  raise  it  upward,  and  sever  its  inferior  attach- 
ments with  a  knife.  Complete  the  incision  through  the 
soft  palate,  and,  since  the  cornua  of  the  hyoid  bone  have 

been  previously  broken, 
draw  the  larynx  upward  and 
outward,  cutting  downward 
behind  it  until  it  is  entirely 
free  from  the  neck.  Continue 
cutting  back  of  the  trachea 
to  the  first  rib,  then  sever  the 
trachea,  oesophagus,  vessels 
and  nerves  close  to  the 
thorax,  and  place  the  ablated 
structures  on  a  table  to  be 
properly  opened  and  in- 
spected later. 

Decapitation. — To  re- 

Yio.  95— Incisions    to   be  made  in  removing       DIOVC  tllC  llCad,  raisC  tllC  clllu 

calvarium  and  opening  nasal  passages.  ^      ,^ 

upward  and  cut  through  the 
muscles  back  of  the  angle  of  the  left  ramus  of  the 
jaw  toward  the  occipito-atloidal  joint.  Disarticulate 
the  head  at  this  point  and  place  it  on  a  table. 

Preparation  of  the  Head. — If  the  skin  has  not  been 
removed  it  can  be  quickly  taken  off  by  placing  an  incision 
down  the  median  line  of  the  face  and  dissecting  laterally 
from  its  edges.  To  free  the  left  ramus  of  the  jaw  from  the 
head,  place  an  incision  from  the  corner  of  the  mouth  to 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        123 

temporomandibular  joint  down  to  the  teeth ;  grasp  the  man- 
dible at  the  interdental  space  and  pull  laterally  until  the 
jaw  is  disarticulated  at  the  temporomaxillary  joint.  Place 
the  head  upon  the  upper  teeth  and  remove  all  musculature 
(Fig.  95). 

ExTiKPATiON  OF  THE  Brain. — To  rcmovc  the  calvarium 
of  the  cow,  sheep  or  goat,  place  the  saw  horizontally  against 
the  head,  after  the  skin  and  muscles  have  been  removed. 


FiQ.  96. — This  shows  relation  of  incisions  to  horns  and  occipital  condyles. 

and  make  an  incision  around  the  base  of  the  skull  imme- 
diately  below  the  horn,  from  the  foramen  magnum  to  a  point 
over  the  nasal  septum  approximately  an  inch  above  the  eye 
(Figs.  95,  96) .  The  line  should  be  between  the  base  of  the 
horn  and  the  external  auditory  meatus  (Fig.  97),  and 
extend  inward  to  the  cranial  cavity.  Place  a  similar  incision 
on  the  other  side  of  the  head.  The  next  incision  is  made 
with  a  saw  between  the  horns,  downward  on  the  median  line 


124  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


Fig.  97 — Showing  position  of  incision  between  horn  and  external  auditory  meatus. 


Fig.  98. — Halves  of  calvanum  sjinad  apart  oxpusing  brain  and  frontal  sinuses. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        125 

of  the  head,  through  the  occipital  prominence  into  the 
cranial  cavity,  from  the  foramen  magnum  to  a  point  over 
the  nasal  septum  ( Figs.  95,  96 ) .  There  is  little  danger  of 
injuring  the  brain,  as  the  saw  would  pass  between  the  hemi- 
spheres of  the  cerebrum  if  it  should  penetrate  a  little  too 
deeply.  The  calvarium  may  now  be  divided  in  halves  by 
prying  the  horns  apart  ( Fig.  98 )  with  the  hands  or  tapping 
them  with  a  mallet  (Martin).  The  meninges  may  be  in- 
cised and  the  brain  raised  out  of  the  cranium  with  the 
fingers. 

Nasal  Passages,  Eye,  Ear,  Etc. — The  sinuses  of  the 
head,  nasal  passages,  nasal  septum,  teeth,  eye,  ear,  and 
spinal  cord  are  handled  in  the  same  manner  as  those  of  the 
horse  (Fig.  95). 

Operative  Technic  for  Thoracic  and  Abdominal 
Cavities 

Front  Leg. — Place  an  incision  back  of  the  foreleg 
from  the  crestline  of  the  back  to  the  sternum,  down  to  the 
intercostal  muscles,  and  a  second  incision  imhiediately  in 
front  of  the  leg  from  the  top  of  the  neck  to  the  inanubrium 
of  the  sternum  ( Fig.  92 ) .  Raise  the  leg  upward  with  one 
hand  and  sever  it  from  the  thorax,  permitting  the  prescapu- 
lar  lymph-gland  to  remain  with  the  limb  (Fig.  93).  Re- 
move the  leg  completely  from  the  cadaver  and  place  it  on 
a  table. 

Hind  Leg.— Make  an  incision  from  a  point  immedi- 
ately back  of  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium  forward 
through  the  tensor  fascia  lata,  then  downward  and  back- 
ward under  the  leg,  horizontally  three  inches  above  the 
median  line  of  the  pubis  or  mammary  gland  (Fig.  92). 
Raise  the  incision  over  the  ischial  tuberosity,  then  lift  the 


126  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

leg  upward  and  cut  directly  into  the  coxofemoral  joint. 
Continue  incising  past  the  joint  through  the  thick  muscles 
of  the  haunch.  The  precrural  lymph-gland  may  be  removed 
with  the  leg  (Fig.  93). 

Mammary  Gland  or  Penis. — Dissect  the  mammary 
gland  together  with  the  supramammary  lymph-glands 
away  from  the  abdomen  by  applying  traction  on  the  udder 
and  cutting  through  its  connective-tissue  attachments  until 
it  is  entirely  free  from  the  body  (Figs.  92,  93).  If  the 
animal  be  a  male,  dissect  the  penis  free  from  the  abdomen 
and  lay  it  over  the  leg  to  be  removed  upon  evisceration  of 
the  pelvic  cavity. 

Xiphoid-pubic  Incision. — To  open  the  abdominal 
cavity  and  remove  the  right  side,  an  incision  must  be  made 
from  the  pubis  to  the  xiphoid  cartilage  through  the  abdom- 
inal wall  following  the  median  line  (Fig.  93) .  Great  care 
must  be  exercised  to  avoid  puncturing  the  intestines  and 
soiling  the  viscera.  Stand  with  the  back  against  the  left 
hind  leg  of  the  cadaver  if  the  latter  be  on  a  table,  place 
the  left  hand  against  the  cadaver  to  steady  one's  own  body, 
then  with  the  knife  held  in  a  full  hand  grip  in  the  right 
hand  press  the  cutting  edge,  near  the  tip,  against  the 
median  line  of  the  belly  six  inches  anterior  to  the  pubis 
and  cut  gently.  Do  not  attempt  to  penetrate  the  entire 
thickness  of  the  wall  with  one  incision,  but  remove  the  knife 
and  test  the  depth  of  the  incision  and  the  thickness  of  the 
wall  w^ith  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  many  times  so  that 
the  finger,  7iot  the  knife,  is  the  first  to  penetrate  the  cavity. 
Enlarge  the  opening  so  that  the  first  two  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  may  enter,  turn  the  knuckles  toward  the  intestines 
and  the  tips  of  the  fingers  against  the  inner  aspect  of  the 
abdominal  wall  one  on  either  side  of  the  median  line.    With 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        127 

the  intestines  thus  protected  turn  the  back  of  the  knife 
toward  the  cadaver,  insert  one-half  inch  of  the  point,  cut 
outward  and  forward,  enlarging  the  incision  by  half  an  inch. 
Continue  this  process  carefully  until  the  sternum  is  reached. 

Pubic-lumbar  Incision. — When  the  xiphoid-pubic 
incision  has  been  completed,  grasp  the  knife  in  the  right 
hand  point  upward,  cutting  edge  away  from  the  autopsist's 
body.  Extend  the  first  and  second  fingers  straight  out 
from  the  hand  holding  the  knife  by  gripping  the  handle 
with  the  third  and  foiu'th  fingers  and  the  thumb.  Now 
force  the  butt  of  the  knife  into  the  peritoneal  cavity  at  the 
posterior  end  of  the  xiphoid-pubic  incision  close  to  the  pubis, 
and  cut  through  the  belly  wall,  from  the  median  line  to  the 
lumbar  region  anterior  to  the  external  angle  of  the  ilium. 
The  first  two  fingers  should  precede  the  cutting  edge  of  the 
knife  to  protect  the  intestines  from  injury  (Fig.  93) .  One 
should  avoid  injury  to  the  spermatic  cord  in  the  male,  and 
later  open  the  inguinal  canal  and  lay  the  cord  and  testicle 
in  the  pelvis  to  be  removed  later  during  the  evisceration 
of  the  pelvic  cavity. 

Vacuity  of  the  Thorax. — To  test  the  vacuity  of  the 
thorax  feel  of  the  diaphragm  and  determine  if  it  be  convex 
toward  the  thorax.  Next  puncture  the  intercostal  muscles 
between  the  fifth  and  sixth  ribs.  To  accomplish  this  make 
a  stab  puncture  one-half  inch  long,  withdraw  the  knife 
quickly  and  insert  the  finger.  The  air  rushing  into  the 
thorax  imparts  a  cold  sensation  to  the  back  of  the  finger 
if  the  thorax  be  a  vacuum. 

Ribs. — Prepare  the  ribs  for  incision  so  that  the  right 
side  may  be  removed  by  taking  the  muscles  off  the  inferior 
border  of  the  thorax.  Next  make  a  line  with  the  cutting 
edge  of  the  knife  from  the  inferior  end  of  the  first  rib  to  the 


128  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

xiphoid  cartilage  (Fig.  93) .  Wash  and  dry  the  hands  and 
the  ax  handle  to  prevent  the  latter  from  slipping,  then  cut 
each  rib,  following  the  line  made  with  the  knife,  using  only 
two  inches  of  the  corner  of  the  ax.  Start  with  the  first  rib 
and  cut  from  right  to  left  toward  the  xiphoid  region. 
When  near  the  ensiform  cartilage  moderate  the  force  of  the 
blows  so  that  the  stomach  may  not  be  injured.  Great  care 
should  be  used  to  prevent  opening  the  pericardial  sac  when 
the  ribs  are  being  severed,  otherwise  it  would  be  impossible 
to  estimate  the  character  and  quantity  of  fluid  present. 

Assume  a  position  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  cadaver, 
trim  the  musculature  from  the  angle  made  by  the  ribs  and 
the  superspinous  processes,  then  cut  through  each  rib  from 
the  last  to  the  fifth,  three  inches  from  the  superior  attach- 
ment to  the  spine,  and  from  the  fifth  to  the  first  inclusive, 
close  to  the  superior  attachment  (Fig.  93).  To  remove 
the  side  cut  the  diaphragm  close  to  the  ribs,  from  the  right 
kidney  to  the  sternum,  seize  the  ribs  with  a  hook  close  to 
the  xiphoid  cartilage,  and  raise  the  side  upward  and  back- 
ward, freeing  it  from  the  cadaver. 

When  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities  have  been 
opened  one  should  carefully  note  the  relative  position  of 
organs,  presence  of  fluids,  clots,  gas,  foreign  bodies,  etc. 
No  organ  should  be  disturbed  until  its  relationship  with 
other  organs  has  been  fully  determined. 

Omentum. — The  omentum  is  carefully  stripped  free 
from  the  stomach  with  the  fingers. 

Intestines. — When  the  side  is  removed  the  abomasum 
rolls  out  of  the  abdomen  immediately  posterior  to  the  ensi- 
form cartilage  and  the  duodenum  extends  almost  vertically 
toward  the  spine  across  the  viscera.  Two  double  ligatures 
are  placed  on  the  duodenum  eighteen  inches  apart,  one  on 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        129 

either  side  of  the  point  where  the  hile-duct  joins  the  gut 
{Fig.  99).  Each  of  the  hgatures  constituting  the  double 
Hgation  is  placed  six  inches  from  the  other,  after  the  intes- 
tinal contents  have  been  forced  in  either  direction.  To 
apply  a  ligature,  as  described  in  ligation  of  the  intestines 
of  the  horse,  one  should  double  a  stout  string  eighteen  inches 
long.  Force  the  loop  end  under  the  gut  and  bring  it  up  on 
the  opposite  side.    Push  the  two  free  ends  through  the  loop 


Fig.  99. — The  right  fore  and  hind  legs  and  the  right  side,  have  been  removed  expos- 
ing thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities.  The  abomasum  has  dropped  out  of  the  abdomen  just 
posterior  to  the  xiphoid  cartilage  and  the  duodenum  passes  upward  on  the  rumen,  past  the 
liver  toward  the  spine.  The  bile  duct  extends  from  the  gall  bladder  to  the  duodenum  and  lines 
indicate  the  points  of  ligation  and  incision  of  that  gut. 

and  draw  the  slipknot  tightly  around  the  intestine.  Divide 
the  free  ends  of  the  twine  and  carry  them  around  the  gut 
in  opposite  directions,  bringing  them  to  the  top  again  where 
they  are  tied  with  a  surgeon's  knot. 

When  the  ligations  have  been  made  the  intestines  are 
incised  between  the  double  ligatures,  and  a  piece  of  duode- 
num is  left  with  the  liver  to  be  removed  when  that  organ 
is  extirpated.    Thus  no  intestinal  contents  are  allowed  to 

9 


130  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

soil  the  viscera  and  possibly  mask  lesions  which  may  be 
present.  Another  double  ligature  is  applied  to  the  rectmn 
at  the  inlet  of  the  pelvic  cavity,  and  the  gut  incised.  Thus 
in  all  three  double  ligatures  are  applied  to  the  intestines 
of  the  ruminant  and  one  to  the  oesophagus  which  will  be 
described  later. 

The  csecum  and  small  intestines  gravitate  into  the  flank 
when  the  side  is  removed.  The  colon  is  arranged  in  coils 
between  the  layers  of  the  mesentery.  To  detach  it,  tear  loose 
the  connective-tissue  attachments  of  that  gut  and  the  duo- 
denum with  the  fingers,  gather  the  mesentery  in  the  hands 
close  to  its  superior  attachments,  then  pass  a  knife  under 
the  mesentery  and  its  vessels  and  cut  upward.  Thus 
loosened,  all  the  intestines  will  usually  slip  out  of  the  abdo- 
men together  between  the  leg  and  the  stomachs.  After 
the  intestines  have  been  removed  one  may  separate  them 
by  starting  with  the  duodenum  and  cutting  them  free  from 
the  mesentery,  then  laying  them  out  on  the  floor.  The 
mesentery  should  be  stretched  out  and  the  mesenteric 
lymph-glands  exposed  for  further  technic  and  examination. 

KroNEYS  AND  Adrenals. — Enucleate  the  right  kidney 
from  the  perirenal  fat  with  the  fingers  and  sever  the  renal 
blood-vessels  and  ureter  by  passing  a  knife  under  them  and 
cutting  upward.  Dissect  the  right  adrenal  free  with  the 
fingers.  It  is  exposed  when  the  kidney  has  been  extirpated. 
The  left  kidney  and  adrenal  are  removed  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. The  renal  lymph-glands  are  left  in  place  but  exposed 
by  stripping  the  fat  away  from  them. 

Stomachs  and  Spleen. — The  extirpation  of  the  stom- 
achs and  spleen  appears  very  difficult  to  the  student  at  first, 
because  of  the  bulk  of  the  rumen.  All  the  attachments  of 
the  stomachs  may  be  readily  broken  with  the  fingers  by 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        131 

applying  a  little  energy.  A  double  ligature  is  placed  on  the 
oesophagus  inmiediately  posterior  to  the  diaphragm,  then  it 
is  incised  by  cutting  upward  transversely  through  it.  The 
stomach  with  the  spleen  still  attached  may  now  be  rolled  out 
of  the  peritoneal  cavity.  The  spleen  should  be  carefully 
dissected  from  the  stomach  and  placed  upon  a  table. 

Liver  and  Gall-bladder. — The  liver,  together  with 
the  gall-bladder  and  piece  of  duodenum,  may  be  removed 
at  this  point  by  severing  the  hepatic  attachments  to  the 
diaphragm,  or  one  may  leave  it  until  the  thoracic  cavity  has 
been  eviscerated  and  then  take  it  out  with  the  diaphragm 
by  cutting  through  that  structure  along  its  periphery. 

Pancreas. — The  pancreas  shoidd  be  left  with  the  liver. 

Pericardial  Sac  and  Fluid. — Wash  the  hands,  knife 
and  pericardium  to  prevent  soiling  the  pericardial  fluid. 
Place  an  incision  from  the  base  to  the  apex  of  the  heart 
through  the  pericardium.  Draw  the  edges  of  the  incision 
apart  and  observe  the  character  of  the  fluid.  Raise  the  heart 
out  of  the  sac  by  lifting  the  apex  upward,  remove,  and  meas- 
ure the  fluid  and  examine  the  inner  aspect  of  the  sac  for 
foreign  bodies.  Replace  the  heart  and  examine  the  pos- 
terior outer  surface  of  the  sac  for  the  same  purpose. 

Heart  and  Lungs. — The  heart,  lungs,  bronchial,  and 
mediastinal  lymph-glands  and  thoracic  portion  of  the 
oesophagus  are  extirpated  together  as  in  the  horse.  The 
first  incision  is  made  through  the  posterior  mediastinum 
from  the  diaphragm  to  the  arch  of  the  aorta.  Cut  upward 
through  the  aorta  and  forward  through  the  anterior  medias- 
tinum. Draw  the  apical  lobe  of  the  left  lung  backward 
from  under  the  right  apical  lobe  with  the  left  hand,  then 
cut  downward  through  the  trachea,  oesophagus,  blood- 
vessels and  nerves  entering  from  the  cervical  region  at  their 


132  VETEIilNARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

entrance  to  the  thorax.  Cut  through  the  pericardial  attach- 
ments to  the  sternum.  Next  crook  the  wrist  and  pass  it 
along  the  anterior  face  of  the  diaphragm  from  above  to 
below,  and  seize  the  posterior  vena  cava  and  branches  of  the 
vagus  which  are  then  severed. 

The  oesophagus  may  be  drawn  into  the  thoracic  cavity 
by  application  of  slight  traction.  To  determine  if  all  attach- 
ments have  been  severed  pass  the  hand  around  the  periphery 
of  the  heart  and  lungs.  To  remove  the  thoracic  organs  pass 
the  left  hand  between  the  heart  and  lungs  palm  toward  the 
heart.  Grasp  the  connecting  structures  between  the  thumb 
and  fingers,  raise  the  hand  to  a  vertical  position,  balance 
the  lungs  on  the  forearm  and  carry  them  to  the  tub  or  table. 

Blood-vessels. — Open  the  aorta  and  iliac  arteries  with 
an  enterotome,  cutting  close  to  the  vertebras  so  that  the 
vessels  will  lie  open. 

Pleura  and  Peritoneum. — Cut  downward  through 
the  muscles  of  the  left  flank  to  permit  drainage  of  the  cavi- 
ties. Flush  the  abdomen,  thorax  and  opened  blood-vessels 
with  water,  then  examine  the  pleura,  peritoneum,  ribs, 
vertebrae,  blood-vessels,  and  inguinal  structures. 

Lymph-glands. — ^The  intercostal  lyjnph- glands  are 
found  at  the  superior  extremities  of  the  intercostal  spaces. 
The  sternal  lyinph-glands  are  situated  at  the  inferior  ex- 
tremities of  the  intercostal  spaces  and  in  the  fat  of  the  peri- 
cardial apex.  The  lumbar  lymph-glands  form  an  irregular 
chain  along  the  abdominal  aorta.  The  re7ial  lymph-glands 
are  bean-shaped  and  are  found  near  the  points  where  the 
kidneys  were  removed.  The  internal  iliac  lymph-glands 
are  five  or  six  in  number  at  the  origin  of  the  iliac  arteries. 
The  largest  iliac  glands  are  about  two  inches  in  diameter, 
rather  flat  on  the  sides,  and  disc-shaped.    They  are  situated 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  RUMINANTS        iss 


134  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

one  on  either  side  of  the  pelvic  inlet.  The  eocternal  iliac 
lymph-glands  occur  near  the  point  of  the  hip.  The  super- 
ficial inguinal  lymph-glands  in  the  male  are  situated  back 
of  the  sigmoid  flexure  on  either  side  of  the  penis.  These 
glands  are  called  the  suprarnammary  lymph-glands  in  the 
female  and  are  situated  at  the  base  of  the  udder  at  its  pos- 
terior margin.  There  are  no  deep  inguinal  lymph-glands 
(Fig.  100), 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Pelvic  Cavity 

Preparation. — Remove  all  musculature  from  that 
triangular  space  between  the  external  and  internal  angle 
of  the  ilium  and  the  ischium  down  to  the  sacrosciatic  liga- 
ment. Dissect  the  penis  from  the  pubis  so  that  it  may  be 
extended  backward  in  a  direct  line  with  the  floor  of  the 
pelvis.  Saw  through  the  shaft  of  the  ilium,  cut  through  the 
pelvic  symphysis  with  the  ax,  then  remove  the  portion  of 
the  pelvis  thus  freed.  After  examining  the  organs  in  situ 
place  an  incision  around  the  anus  and  external  genitals, 
holding  the  penis  straight  back  if  it  be  a  male,  and  cut 
around  the  periphery  of  the  pelvic  organs,  keeping  the  cut- 
ting edge  of  the  knife  toward  the  pelvic  bones  to  avoid 
injury  to  the  soft  structures,  until  all  are  freed. 

Organs. — If  the  animal  be  a  female,  the  ovaries,  vagina, 
uterus,  bladder,  and  rectum  are  removed  together.  If  it 
be  an  entire  male,  the  seminal  vesicles  and  adjacent  glands, 
bladder,  and  rectum  are  extirpated  together  with  the  penis 
and  testicles,  placed  upon  a  table,  and  later  opened  and 
examined. 

The  operative  technic  for  the  leg  and  foot,  muscles, 
bones,  and  joints  is  practically  the  same  for  ruminants 
as  that  applied  to  the  horse. 


CHAPTER  VII 

INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  SWINE 

Dorsal  Position. — Post-mortem  technic  for  the  ex- 
amination of  swine  is  very  similar  to  that  used  on  the  dog 
and  cat.  Small  swine  are  placed  in  the  dorsal  position  and 
very  large  animals  of  this  species  are  placed  in  the  left-side 
position  to  facilitate  the  location  of  the  rectoduodenal  liga- 
ment and  removal  of  intestines.  When  the  dorsal  position 
is  used,  an  incision  is  made  down  the  ventral  median  line 
through  the  skin  and  fat  to  the  sternum  and  abdominal 
muscles,  from  the  point  of  the  chin  to  the  anus,  avoiding 
the  genitals,  as  in  the  dog  (Fig.  101).  From  this  median 
incision  lay  back  the  skin  and  fat  from  the  thorax,  at  the 
same  time  separating  both  forelegs  from  the  body  so  that 
they  lie  flat  on  the  table  at  right  angles  to  the  cadaver.  Cut 
into  the  coxofemoral  articulations  and  lay  the  hind  legs 
outward  from  the  body.  This  position  of  the  legs  main- 
tains the  cadaver  in  the  dorsal  position.  Complete  removal 
of  the  skin  in  either  position  is  unnecessary  (Fig.  102) . 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and  Back 
Extirpation  of  thyroid  glands,  tongue,  tonsils,  larynx, 
trachea  and  cord,  and  the  opening  of  nasal  passages  is 
the  same  as  in  the  dog  and  cat.  To  remove  the  brain,  which 
is  deeply  situated  in  the  pig,  remove  skin  and  muscles  from 
the  head  after  disarticulation  of  the  occipito-atloidal  joint. 
Enucleate  the  eyes  and  make  a  verticle  transverse  incision 
with  the  saw  through  the  centre  of  each  orbit  to  the  cranial 

135 


136 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


cavity.  The  two  lateral  incisions  are  made  as  in  other  ani- 
mals from  the  foramen  magnum  anteriorly  ahove  the  zygo- 
matic crest  to  meet  the  transverse  incision.    With  the  ham- 


'   I 


^?r^€ 


li. 


.^ 


¥ 


Fig.  101. — The  incision 
is  made  just  through  the 
skin,  then  skin  and  legs 
are  laid  back  from  the 
body  together. 


Fig.  102. — Skin  and  legs  have  been  laid  back  from  median 
incision  indicated  in  Fig  101.  The  cadaver  now  remains  in 
dorsal  position  unassisted.  The  abdomen  is  first  opened  by 
one  median  and  two  lateral  incisions.  The  sternum  is  then 
removed  by  two  lateral  incisions. 


mer-hook  the  calvarium  may  now  be  lifted  off  and  the  brain 
removed  with  the  fingers  and  scalpel  after  the  meninges 
have  been  incised  longitudinally. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  SWINE  137 

Opeeative  Technic  for  the  Thoracic  and  Abdominal 
Cavities 

The  peritoneal  cavity  is  opened  by  making  an  incision 
through  the  abdominal  muscles  from  the  xiphoid  cartilage 
to  the  pubis,  after  the  penis  has  been  dissected  from  the 
belly  and  laid  back  over  the  anus.  Transverse  incisions  are 
made  through  the  belly  wall  along  the  posterior  border  of 
the  ribs  (Fig.  102)  and  the  flaps  of  the  abdominal  wall  laid 
outward  (Fig.  103).  Two  lateral  thoracic  incisions  are 
made  and  the  sternum  removed  (Figs.  102,  103). 

Intestines. — The  colon  and  caecum  of  swine  lie  princi- 
pally on  the  left  side  and  therefore  when  the  cadaver  is 
placed  in  the  dorsal  position  these  structures  appear  at  the 
autopsist's  right,  and  the  small  intestines  at  his  left.  To 
locate  the  rectoduodenal  ligament  push  the  small  intestines 
to  the  right,  find  the  rectoduodenal  ligament  close  to  the 
left  kidney,  apply  a  double  ligature  to  the  colon  (abdominal 
rectum)  and  duodenum,  then  cut  through  both  intestines 
between  the  double  ligatures  (Fig.  103).  Draw  the  intes- 
tines upward  and  sever  the  mesentery  and  vessels  close  to 
the  lumbar  muscles,  then  remove  small  intestines,  colon 
and  caecum  together. 

When  one  wishes  to  find  evidences  of  hog  cholera  with- 
out completing  an  autopsy  the  ileocecal  valve  should  be 
located  and  examined  first,  as  that  structure  presents  ulcer- 
ous lesions  if  any  be  present  in  the  cadaver.  The  colon  of 
the  hog  is  arranged  in  coils  which  are  firmly  held  together 
in  such  manner  as  to  make  the  colon  sinuilate  a  bee  hive. 
The  cfecum,  which  is  eight  to  twelve  inches  in  length  by 
three  to  four  inches  in  diameter,  is  at  the  base  of  this  struc- 
ture where  the  diameter  of  the  lumen  of  the  colon  is  the 
greatest.     The  ileum  enters  the  caecum  obliquely  and  is  of 


138 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


quite  small  calibre.  To  locate  the  ileocsecal  valve,  grasp 
the  colon  at  the  apex  of  its  spiral  structure  of  coils  or  that 
point  corresponding  to  the  apex  of  a  bee  hive  and  lift  it 


"/^V 

k 

nfifM^dH^ 

,'-■  iM 

W^    ^  A 

"ts 

•■'  ^m 

Duodenum 

K         m 

BteA-^-J 

;toduodenal 

■HMf 

ligament 

:  ^) /vT^'ii^B 

Csecum 

> 

nf — IMHT       '  xa 

^ 

^^ 

Small   intestines 


I?'  u^' — -^^^^^  opening  abdomen  and  thorax  by  making  incisions  indicated  in  Fig. 
102,  all  the  intestines  are  pushed  to  the  aucopsist's  right,  out  of  the  left  side  of  the  abdomen, 
the  rectoduodenal  ligament  exposed,  duodenum  and  abdominal  rectum  ligated  and  incised  on 
either  side  of  it  as  indicated,  and  the  small  intestines,  colon  and  caecum  removed  together  and 
separated  later.      Rectum  is  removed  with  pelvic  organs  and  duodenum  with  the  stomach. 

upward.  With  the  other  hand  examine  the  entire  circum- 
ference of  the  base  of  the  structure  until  the  ileimi  is  located 
at  its  entrance  to  the  cscum.    Penetrate  the  ileum  with  an 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  SWINE  139 

enterotome  and  follow  it  through  to  the  ileocsecal  valve 
(Fig.  104). 

Duodenum  and  Bile-duct. — The  duodenum  is  opened 
with  an  enterotome  and  the  ampulla  of  Vater  exposed. 
Squeeze  upon  the  gall-bladder  until  bile  flows  into  the  intes- 
tine, then  open  the  bile-duct  to  the  gall-bladder  with  a 
sharp-pointed  scissors. 


part  of 


Fig.  104. — When  the  ileo-caecal  valve  is  of  particular  interest,  the  colon,  caecum  and 
part  of  the  ileum  are  separated  from  the  small  intestines,  the  csecum  opened  and  the  valve 
exposed. 

Spleen. — The  spleen  of  the  hog  is  long  and  narrow. 
It  should  be  severed  from  the  stomach  and  removed. 

Stomach. — Draw  the  stomach  back  from  the  dia- 
phragm, squeeze  the  oesophagus  to  prevent  the  escape  of 
stomach  contents,  then  sever  the  oesophagus  and  remove  the 
stomach,  duodenum  and  pancreas  together. 

Liver. — Place  the  hand  back  of  the  liver,  draw  it  away 
from  the  diaphragm  and  cut  downward  through  attach- 


140  A^ETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

ments  and  blood-vessels,  freeing  the  organ  from  the  abdom- 
inal cavity. 

Kidneys. — Raise  the  kidneys  upward  and  sever  their 
attachment  close  to  the  lumbar  muscles. 

Heart  and  Lungs. — To  open  the  thoracic  cavity  cut 
through  the  diaphragm  at  its  attachment  to  the  sternum, 
after  exenteration  of  the  abdominal  cavity,  then  with  knife 
or  cartilage  shears  cut  each  asternal  cartilage  immediately 
above  its  costal  articulation  (Fig.  102)  and  expose  the 
viscera  (Fig.  103) .  Determine  the  character  and  quantity 
of  fluid  if  any  be  present  in  the  thorax.  Place  a  longitudinal 
incision  through  the  pericardium  and  examine  the  character 
and  quantity  of  pericardial  fluid.  To  extirpate  the  thoracic 
viscera  grasp  the  oesophagus  and  trachea  anterior  to  the 
heart  and  cut  through  them  and  the  vessels  and  nerves 
entering  the  thorax  from  the  neck  opposite  the  second  rib. 
Raise  the  heart  upward,  forcibly  stripping  the  mediastinum 
from  its  attacliments,  and  remove  heart  and  lungs  together. 

Operatr^  Technic  for  the  Pelvic  Cavity 

Excise  all  muscles  from  the  pelvic  symphysis  and  cut 
downward  through  the  symphysis  with  knife  or  chisel  into 
the  pelvic  cavit5\  In  young  animals  the  pelvis  may  be 
spread  apart  with  the  hands,  in  old  animals  a  piece  of  the 
floor  of  the  pelvis  two  inches  wide  may  be  taken  out  with  a 
saw.  To  remove  the  pelvic  organs,  place  an  incision 
through  the  skin  around  the  penis  or  vulva  and  anus,  hold- 
ing the  penis  straight  back,  then  sever  the  peripheral  attach- 
ments of  the  pelvic  organs  from  the  inside  of  the  pelvis 
and  remove  them  together. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  SWINE  141 

Left  Side  Position. — To  open  the  thoracic  and  ab- 
dominal cavities  with  the  cadaver  lying  on  the  left  side  fol- 
low the  same  technic  as  used  on  ruminants.  When  the 
right  fore  and  hind  legs  and  the  right  side  have  been  taken 
off,  the  colon  will  be  located  under  the  other  viscera  and 
the  small  intestine  will  be  uppermost.  The  rectoduodenal 
ligament  may  be  located  close  to  the  left  kidney  and  the 
intestines  ligated  and  quickly  removed.  Extirpation  of 
other  organs  is  accomplished  in  the  same  general  manner 
as  in  the  dorsal  position. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  DOG  AND  CAT 

For  class-work  one  student  preferably,  and  not  more 
than  two,  should  be  assigned  to  the  autopsy  of  a  small  ani- 
mal. When  two  students  are  assigned  to  a  case  together 
one  should  do  the  cutting  and  the  other  act  as  his  assistant, 
holding  the  cadaver  while  the  skin  is  being  removed,  weigh- 
ing organs,  and  handing  instruments  to  the  autopsist.  If 
two  students  attempt  to  cut  at  the  same  time  injury  is  pos- 
sible to  either. 

Position. — The  cadaver  is  placed  in  the  dorsal  position 
tail  toward  the  autopsist  and  is  maintained  in  that  position 
until  the  exenteration  of  all  cavities  has  been  effectuated 
(Fig.  105).  If  the  cadaver  be  too  large  it  may  be  turned 
with  the  side  toward  the  autopsist,  anterior  extremity  to 
the  left,  with  the  animal  still  maintained  in  the  dorsal 
position. 

Skin. — Place  an  incision  through  the  skin  on  the 
median  line  from  the  tip  of  the  chin  to  the  rectum,  avoiding 
the  penis.  Make  a  second  incision  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  penis  through  the  skin  (Fig.  105),  raise  the  organ  up- 
ward, and  dissect  it  free  from  the  abdomen,  then  lay  it  back 
on  the  tail  so  that  it  is  in  a  direct  line  with  the  floor  of  the 
pelvis.  Use  great  care  to  prevent  cutting  into  or  through 
the  penis  (Fig.  106). 

At  right  angles  to  the  median  incision  cut  through  the 
skin  on  the  inner  aspect  of  each  posterior  limb  to  the  tarsal 
joint.  To  remove  the  integument  begin  at  the  point  of  the 
jaw  and  from  either  margin  of  the  median  incision  dissect 

142 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  DOG  AND  CAT      143 

the  skin  away  from  the  cadaver  down  to  the  back,  cutting 
the  forelegs  free  from  the  thorax  so  that  they  He  flat  upon 
the  table.    After  the  skin  has  been  removed  from  the  inner 


I'lG.  105. —  Median 
line  of  incision  through 
the  skin  from  which  skin 
and  legs  are  laid  back 
from  the  body.  Penis  to 
be  drawn  back  over  the 
tail. 


Fig.  106. — Skin  and  legs  laid  back  from  body ,  penis  drawn  back 
over  the  tail.  Xiphoid-pubic  and  two  xiphoid-lumbar  incisions 
are  made  to  open  the  abdomen.  Two  lateral  thoracic  incisions 
to  rernove  sternum.  One  short  median  incision  in  neck  to  remove 
thyroid  glands  and  two  internal  mandibular  incisions  to  draw 
out  the   tongue,   coxofemoral   joints  opened. 


half  of  each  hind  leg  cut  into  both  coxofemoral  articulations 
and  lay  the  hind  extremities  flat  upon  the  table.  The  ante- 
rior and  posterior  limbs  now  placed  at  right  angles  to  the 


144  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

body  maintain  it  in  the  dorsal  position  and  facilitate  further 
technic.  If  the  animal  be  a  female  remove  the  mammary 
glands  with  the  skin  (Fig.  106). 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Abdominal  Cavity 
To  open  the  abdominal  cavity  make  a  xiphoid-pubic  in- 
cision through  the  abdominal  wall  (Fig.  106).  Start  the 
incision  with  a  small  stab  puncture  immediately  posterior 
to  the  sternmn.  Insert  the  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand, 
spread  them  apart,  and  raise  the  abdominal  wall  upward 
away  from  the  viscera.  With  the  organs  thus  protected  cut 
through  the  abdominal  muscles  between  the  fingers  along 
the  median  line  to  the  pubis.  If  any  fluid  be  present  exam- 
ine it  by  spreading  apart  the  edges  of  the  incision.  Next 
remove  the  fluid  with  pipette  or  cup  and  determine  the 
quantity.  To  expose  the  abdominal  viscera  make  an  in- 
cision on  either  side  from  the  ensiform  cartilage  along  the 
posterior  border  of  the  ribs  to  the  back  (Fig.  106)  and  lay 
the  flaps  of  the  belly  wall  outward  on  the  table  (Fig.  107) . 
Omentum  and  Intestines. — The  exenteration  of  the 
peritoneal  cavity  is  begun  by  raising  the  omentum  upward 
and  trimming  it  away  from  the  stomach.  Seize  the  colon 
at  the  pelvic  inlet,  squeeze  the  contents  in  either  direction, 
apply  a  double  ligature  two  inches  apart  (Fig.  107),  place 
a  knife  under  and  cut  upward  through  the  gut.  Grasp  the 
duodenum  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  pancreas,  apply  a 
double  ligature  and  sever  in  the  same  manner.  When  the 
intestines  are  empty  or  the  contents  of  firm  consistency, 
ligation  may  be  omitted.  To  remove  the  intestines,  gather 
them  in  the  left  hand,  raise  them  upward  from  the  lumbar 
region  as  far  as  possible,  then  sever  the  mesocolon  and 
mesenteric  vessels. 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  DOG  AND  CAT     145 

Bile-duct. — Before  the  stomach  is  extirpated  that  por- 
tion of  the  duodenum  remaining  attached  to  it  is  opened 


Fig.  107. — Tongue  and  larynx  drawn  back.  Sternum  removed.  Flaps  of  abdomen 
laid  back.  Omentum  laid  over  cadaver's  left  side.  Points  of  ligation  and  incision  indicated 
on  duodenum  and  rectum.  Liver  partly  overlaps  stomach.  Heart  and  lungs  slightly  displaced 
posteriorly. 

with  a  sharp-pointed  scissors  to  the  point  where  the  great 
curvature  of  the  stomach  begins,  and  the  ampulla  of  Vater 
is  exposed.    To  determine  if  there  be  any  obstruction  in  the 

10 


146  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

bile-duct  squeeze  upon  the  gall-bladder  until  the  bile  flows 
freely  from  the  intestinal  opening  of  the  structure,  then 
open  the  bile-duct  from  the  duodenum  to  a  point  near  the 
gall-bladder  with  the  sharp-pointed  scissors. 

Stomach,  Spleen  and  Pancreas. — Remove  the 
stomach  by  seizing  the  oesophagus  wnth  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  left  hand  close  to  the  diaphragm,  draw 
it  back  and  cut  through  it,  continuing  to  hold  the  stomach 
end  of  the  oesophagus  to  prevent  the  possible  escape  of 
liquid  contents  of  the  stomach.  Break  through  the  gastric 
attachments  with  the  fingers  and  remove  the  stomach, 
spleen,  pancreas  and  duodenum  together. 

Lrter. — Place  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand  between 
the  liver  and  the  diaphragm,  draw  the  liver  back  and  cut 
downward  through  its  attachments  and  the  posterior  vena 
cava. 

Kidneys  and  Adrenals. — With  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger palpate  the  fat  immediate^  anterior  to  the  kidneys 
until  the  adrenals  are  located.  Raise  adrenal  and  kidney 
upward  and  sever  their  attachments  close  to  the  lumbar 
muscles.  In  females  the  ovaries  may  be  detached  from 
the  lumbar  position  but  left  with  uterine  horns  to  be  re- 
moved later  with  the  uterus. 

Operati\t:  Technic  for  Pelvic  Cavity 
Cut  all  muscle  away  from  the  pelvic  symphysis  until 
it  is  clean.  Then  cut  downward  through  it  with  a  knife  if 
the  animal  be  young  or  with  a  chisel  if  the  bones  be  hardened 
with  age.  Insert  two  fingers  of  each  hand  in  the  pelvic 
inlet  and  pull  laterally  until  the  pelvis  is  separated  an  inch 
or  more  at  its  symphysis.  The  pelvic  organs  may  be  re- 
moved  together   and   separated    later.     Draw   the    penis 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  DOG  AND  CAT      147 

straight  back  and  place  an  incision  through  the  skin  com- 
pletely around  the  anus  and  penis  or  in  the  female  incise 
the  skin  around  the  vulva.  Free  the  organs  from  their 
peripheral  attachments  to  the  pelvis  by  cutting  around 
them  with  a  knife,  using  care  to  keep  the  cutting  edge 
toward  the  pelvic  bones  to  avoid  injury  to  the  soft  struc- 
tures. Ovaries,  uterus,  vagina,  bladder  and  rectum  in  the 
female,  and  penis,  testicles,  prostate  and  Cowper's  gland, 
bladder  and  rectum  in  the  male  are  extirpated  together. 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Thoracic  Cavity 
Sternum. — To  remove  the  sternum  incise  the  dia- 
phragm at  its  peripheral  attachment  to  the  sternum.  Cut 
each  asternal  cartilage  with  the  curved  blade  cartilage 
shears  immediately  above  its  costal  articulation  (Fig.  106) . 
The  cartilages  may  be  readily  severed  with  a  knife  if  the 
animal  be  young.  Examine  the  articulations  of  ribs  and 
asternal  cartilages  for  the  rosary  appearance  of  rickets. 
Determine  character  and  quantity  of  fluid  if  any  be  present. 
Heart  and  Lungs. — In  ablation  of  the  heart  and  lunffs 

o 

grasp  the  trachea  and  oesophagus  immediately  anterior  to 
the  heart  and  sever  them  at  their  entrance  to  the  thorax. 
Next  draw  the  heart  and  lungs  upward  and  forcibly  tear  the 
mediastinum  completely  free  from  its  spinal  attachment. 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Head,  Neck  and  Back 
Thyroid  Glands. — Make  a  short  incision  through  the 
sternohyoideus  muscle  on  the  median  line  of  the  neck  down 
to  the  tracheal  rings  just  posterior  to  the  larynx  (Fig.  106) . 
Lay  the  muscles  back  from  the  trachea  on  either  side  of  the 
incision  thus  made  and  remove  the  thyroid  and  parathyroid 
glands. 


148  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Tongue,  Tonsils,  Lakynx,  Trachea  and  CEsopha- 
Gus. — Excise  the  muscles  in  the  submaxillary  space  close 
to  each  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw,  from  the  mandibular  sym- 
physis to  the  angles  of  the  l-ami  (Fig.  106).  These  inci- 
sions must  be  made  completely  through  the  muscles  into 
the  oral  cavity  and  should  meet  exactly  at  their  anterior 
extremities  in  order  to  free  the  tongue  from  the  mandible. 
After  completing  the  incisions  described,  insert  the  forefin- 
ger of  the  left  hand  between  the  tongue  and  mandible  and 
draw  the  tongue  out  of  the  oral  cavity  between  the  rami 
of  the  lower  jaw.  Hold  the  tongue  back  and  cut  through 
the  soft  palate  and  great  rami  of  the  hyoid  bone,  then  draw 
tongue,  tonsils,  larynx,  trachea  and  oesophagus  upward  and 
backward  toward  the  thorax  (Fig.  107),  removing  them 
together  from  the  cadaver. 

Nasal  Passages. — Place  the  cadaver  in  the  ventral 
position,  remove  skin  and  musculature  from  the  head,  and 
cut  away  the  soft  portion  of  the  nostrils.  Saw  transversely 
across  the  face  at  the  base  of  the  nose  in  front  of  the  eyes. 
Place  the  sharp  edge  of  the  side  chisel  against  the  anterior 
orifices  of  the  nasal  passages  and  cut  backward  to  the  trans- 
verse incision.  In  small  animals  the  nasal  passages  may 
be  opened  with  cartilage  or  bone  shears.  In  following  the 
incisions  described  the  frontal  sinus  and  the  cribif orm  plates 
of  the  ethmoid  bone  are  exposed  (Fig.  108) . 

Brain  and  Cord. — To  take  out  the  brain  and  cord 
together,  complete  the  removal  of  the  skin  from  the  cadaver 
and  excise  all  musculature  from  the  head  and  back  (Fig. 
108).  Break  off  all  the  superspinous  processes  with  the 
bone  shears  and  then  with  the  same  instrument  nip  through 
the  vertebra  between  the  internal  angles  of  the  ilium  until 
the  meninges  of  the  cord  are  exposed.     If  the  animal  be 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  DOG  AND  CAT     149 

young  and  the  bone  not  too  hard  one  may  open  the  entire 
canal  and  cranium  with  the  bone  shears,  which  have  short, 
thick,  straight  blades.  To  do  this  place  the  point  of  the  left 
blade  in  the  canal  above  and  to  the  right  of  the  cord,  cut, 
and  at  the  same  time  twist  the  handle  upward  to  the  right. 


Fig.  108. — Figure  at  the  left  shows  the  skin  and  musculature  removed  from  nose,  cal- 
varium  and  top  of  spine,  preparatory  to  removing  the  nasal  bone,  calvarium  and  top  of  spinal 
canal.  Figure  at  the  right  shows  nasal  bone,  calvarium  and  top  of  spinal  canal  removed  ex- 
posing nasal  passages,  brain  and  spinal  cord. 


Then  place  the  right  blade  in  the  canal  above  and  to  the 
left  of  the  cord  and  twist  to  the  left.  By  continuing  this 
process  the  entire  upper  half  of  the  spinal  canal  may  be 
removed  and  the  cord  exposed.  When  the  foramen  mag- 
num is  reached  the  calvarium  may  be  removed  by  nipping 
to  the  right  and  left  with  the  bone  shears,  following  the  base 


150  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

of  the  skull  on  either  side.  It  may  also  be  removed  by 
placing  the  point  of  a  small  side  chisel  in  the  foramen  mag- 
num and  cutting  the  bony  wall,  following  the  same  line 
forward  just  above  the  zygomatic  crest  on  either  side  and 
across  the  parietal  bone  anteriorly  to  meet  the  two  lateral 
incisions.  With  considerable  practice  one  may  become  quite 
expert  at  removing  the  calvarium  with  a  small  hatchet 
without  injury  to  the  meninges  or  brain.  The  same  three 
lines  are  followed,  one  on  either  side  of  the  parietal  bone 
above  the  zygomatic  crest  from  the  foramen  magnimi  for- 
ward to  the  temporal  part  of  the  frontal  bone  and  one  across 
the  parietal  bone  to  join  the  two  lateral  incisions.  On 
small  animals  these  incisions  may  be  effectuated  by  three 
slight  blows  with  a  sharp  hatchet.  When  the  bones  of  the 
spinal  canal  are  very  hard,  as  in  old  animals,  a  curved 
rachiotome  is  used  to  remove  the  cord.  One  must  pene- 
trate the  canal  with  the  bone  shears  or  saw  through  it  trans- 
versely near  the  posterior  end,  then  introduce  the  probe 
end  of  the  rachiotome  into  the  canal  above  and  to  one  side 
of  the  cord,  place  the  cutting  edge  against  the  bone  and 
strike  sharply  on  the  head  of  the  rachiotome  with  a  wooden 
or  rawhide  mallet.  An  incision  approximately  an  inch  long- 
is  made,  then  the  instrument  is  transferred  to  the  opposite 
side  of  the  canal  and  a  like  incision  made.  By  continuing 
this  process  the  upper  half  of  the  spinal  canal  can  be  re- 
moved and  the  excision  of  the  meninges  and  cord  be  accom- 
plished with  forceps  and  scalpel  (Fig.  108) . 

After  the  calvarium  has  been  removed  the  meninges 
may  be  examined,  incised  longitudinally,  and  the  brain 
lifted  out  by  careful  manipulation  with  fingers  and  a  scalpel. 
When  rabies  is  suspected  one  should  be  cautious  in  working 
about  the  teeth,  brain  and  cord.    If  the  head  is  to  be  sent 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  DOG  AND  CAT      151 

to  a  laboratory  for  examination,  excise  it  close  to  the  thorax 
to  facilitate  location  of  the  ganglia.  The  ganglia  nodosum 
and  the  superior  cervical  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  nerve 
are  those  most  frequently  examined.  To  locate  them  lay 
open  the  jugular  furrow  and  follow  the  vagus  and  sympa- 
thetic nerves,  which  are  encased  within  a  common  sheath,  to 
the  base  of  the  cranium.  Cut  the  ganglia  across  at  the  point 
where  the  nerves  emerge  from  the  cranium,  and  remove 
them.  A  single  or  double  blade  rachiotomy  saw  may  be 
used  to  remove  the  cord. 


CHAPTER  IX 

INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  MOUSE, 
GUINEA-PIG,  RABBIT,  FOWL  AND  ELEPHANT 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Mouse,  Guinea-pig,  and 
Rabbit 

The  small  animals  are  stretched  out  in  the  dorsal 
position  and  secured  by  pins  run  through  the  feet,  or  by 
twine  or  small  chains  attached  to  the  legs  and  margins  of 
the   pan   or    post-mortem    board.     An    incision    is    made 


Fig.  109. — Sternum  freed  by  two  lateral  thoracic  incisions  and  laid  over  the  right 
side.  Heart  and  lungs  exposed.  Abdominal  flaps  turned  back.  Spleen  drawn  straight  out  to 
the  left  side  of  cadaver.  Intestines  drawn  to  the  right  side.  Liver,  stomach  and  left  kidney 
exposed.  Testicles  visible  on  either  side  of  base  of  the  tail.  Uterus  masculinus  lies  above  the 
testicles  and  resembles  the  two  horns  of  a  ram. 

through  the  skin  along  the  median  line  from  the  tip  of  the 
jaw  to  the  anus,  usually  after  wetting  the  hair  with  5  per 
cent,  carbolic  acid  solution.  The  skin  is  laid  back  from 
this  incision  on  either  side  and  the  forelegs  freed  from  the 
thorax.    The  abdominal  cavity  is  opened  with  a  longitudinal 

152 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION 


153 


2i» 


I- 

I: 


154  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

incision  through  the  belly  muscles  from  sternum  to  pubis, 
and  transverse  incisions  along  the  posterior  border  of  the 
ribs  to  the  back.  The  thoracic  cavity  is  opened  by  incising 
the  asternal  cartilages  above  their  costal  articulations  with 


Fig.  111. — Autopsy  of  a  rabbit. 


scalpel  or  scissors  and  removing  the  sternum.  Exenteration 
of  the  various  cavities  is  often  unnecessary,  but  when  de- 
sired may  be  accomplished,  following  the  technic  of  the 
dog  and  cat  (Figs.  109,  110,  111). 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  155 

Operative  Technic  for  the  Fowl 
Saturate  the  fowl  with  5  per  cent,  carbohc  acid  or  creo- 
line  solution  and  remove  the  feathers  from  the  ventral 
surface.  Place  the  cadaver  in  the  dorsal  position,  disarticu- 
late the  legs  at  the  coxofemoral  joint,  and  lay  them  out- 
ward from  the  body.  Disarticulate  the  wings  at  the  cora- 
coid-scapulohimieral  joint.  Open  the  abdomen  with  a 
longitudinal  incision  from  the  point  of  the  sternum  to  the 
anus  and  transverse  incisions  along  the  posterior  border 
of  the  ribs.  To  remove  the  breast  and  open  the  thorax 
incise  the  diaphragm  at  its  peripheral  attachments  to  the 
sternum,  cut  forward  through  the  ribs  with  a  knife  or  scis- 
sors, and  disarticulate  the  sternum  at  the  glenoid  cavities. 
When  removing  the  breast  be  careful  to  avoid  injury  to 
the  ingluvies  or  crop  (Fig.  112). 

After  examination  of  the  organs  in  situ  the  entire 
digestive  canal  may  be  extirpated  intact.  To  accomplish 
this  make  a  longitudinal  incision  through  the  skin  on  the 
median  line  of  the  neck,  from  the  point  of  the  mandible  to 
the  thorax,  and  carefully  dissect  the  integument  away  from 
the  ingluvies  or  crop  (Figs.  112,  113).  Cut  through  the 
skin  and  muscles  close  to  the  inner  side  of  the  mandibular 
rami,  draw  the  tongue  and  larynx  out  of  the  oral  cavity,  cut 
through  the  hyoid  bone,  and  draw  the  tongue,  larynx  and 
oesophagus  backward.  Dissect  the  ingluvies  free  from  the 
neck,  then  detach  the  oesophagus,  proventriculus  or  true 
glandular  stomach,  gizzard  or  muscular  stomach,  and  intes- 
tines from  their  positions  and  excise  the  rectum.  The  en- 
tire digestive  tube  may  be  placed  on  a  table,  the  intestines 
disengaged  from  the  mesentery  and  the  entire  tube  opened 
with  a  sharp-pointed  scissors.  The  spleen  is  oval  or  nearly 
round  and  easily  detached.    The  testicles  of  the  male  are 


156  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

quite  large  and  quickly  located.     The  liver  may  be  freed 
from  the  diaphragm  in  the  usual  manner  and  the  kidneys. 


YiG    112 The  inoision   on  the  median   line  of  the   neck  is  made  first.     The  cervical 

structures  are  exposed  and  the  crop  dissected  free  from  the  breast  and  drawn  forward.  The 
coxc.femoral  joints  are  laid  open  by  incisions  between  the  legs  and  body.  The  abdomen  is 
ooened  by  one  median  and  two  lateral  incisions  and  the  flaps  turned  back.  The  lateral  incis- 
ions are  continued  forward  through  the  ribs  to  the  coracoid-scapulo-humeral  joint,  and  the 
sternum  removed. 

which  are  deeply  situated  between  the  ribs,  may  be  dis- 
sected out  with  the  handle  of  a  scalpel.  The  ovary  of  the 
female  often  contains  many  ova  and  must  be  carefully 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION 


157 


manipulated  to  prevent  injury  to  it  or  maj^  not  be  removed 
at  all.     The  oviduct  should  be  taken  out  and  opened  the 


ftternum  removed 


Crop 


Small  intestines 


Fig.  113. — After  making  the  incisions  indicated  by  the  red  lines  in  Fig.  112.  the  crop 
is  freed  from  the  breast,  wings  and  legs  spread  out  from  the  body,  flaps  of  the  abdomen  laid 
back,  sternum  removed,  organs  examined  in  situ,  intestines  drawn  out  of  the  abdomen  and 
arranged  as  indicated  and  the  crop  is  laid  over  the  right  wing.    The  cavities  are  then  eviscerated. 

same  as  an  intestine.     The  trachea,  lungs  and  heart  are 
extirpated  together  by  pulling  upward  on  them  and  sepa- 


158 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


rating  the  lungs  from  the  back  to  which  they  are  attached, 
by  using  the  handle  of  a  scalpel.     Remove  a  femur  and 


Heart. 


First  part  of  cesophagus 


Ingluvies  or  crop 


Second  part  of  oesophagus 

Duodenum 

Pancreas 

Glandular  stomach 

Muscular  stomach 


Kidneys 


Fig.  114. — Unopened  organs  of  a  chicken  after  evisceration.  Digestive  tract  is  intact, 
other  organs  separate.  Jejunum  and  ileum  extend  from  caudal  end  of  pancreas  to  cseca. 
Structures  are  later  opened  and  examined  in  the  usual  manner. 

break  it  transversely  to  expose  the  bone-marrow    (Figs. 
113,  114). 

The  following  anatomical  peculiarities  should  be  ob- 


INTERNAL  EXAMINATION  159 

served :  Chickens  have  no  Hps,  teeth,  epiglottis  or  laryngeal 
vocal  cords.  The  trachea  is  composed  of  complete  carti- 
laginous rings.  The  last  ring  is  slightly  dilated  and  a  mem- 
branous layer  is  shown  at  tlie  origin  of  the  bronchi,  the 
vibration  of  which  produces  sound.  The  lungs  normally 
adhere  to  the  arch  of  the  thoracic  cavity.  The  female 
usually  has  but  one  ovary,  the  other  atrophying  while  the 
fowl  is  young.  The  ovary  presents  many  ova  in  various 
stages  of  development.  The  oviduct  is  large  and  flexuous 
with  an  unfringed  opening  near  the  ovary.  The  yolk 
enters  the  oviduct  and  within  the  oviduct  becomes  sur- 
rounded by  an  albuminous  covering  and  later  by  a  protec- 
tive calcareous  shell.  The  chicken  has  a  proventriculus, 
succentric  ventricle  or  glandular  stomach,  a  muscular 
stomach  or  gizzard,  and  two  cseca.  The  spleen  is  red  in 
color  and  round,  oval,  or  disc-shaped. 

Operatr^  Techxic  for  the  Elephant 

An  elephant  should  be  placed  on  its  right  side  at  autopsy 
to  facilitate  the  removal  of  the  intestines.  After  the  skin 
has  been  removed  the  abdomen  should  be  opened  with 
xiphoid-pubic,  pubic-lumbar  incisions  through  the  belly 
muscles  as  in  the  horse.  The  intestines  may  be  removed 
together  after  incising  the  duodenum  and  rectum,  and  may 
be  separated  later.  The  other  abdominal  viscera  may  be 
ablated  as  those  of  the  horse.  As  the  skeleton  is  valuable, 
the  ribs  are  not  cut  through  to  open  the  thorax.  The  exen- 
teration of  that  cavity  is  accomplished  by  removing  the 
diaphragm. 

The  elephant  is  not  a  ruminant  and  does  not  have  four 
stomachs.  The  digestive  apparatus  is  very  similar  to  that 
of  the  horse.     The  lungs  of  the  elephant  present  no  lobes 


160  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

except  a  right  and  left.  These  are  pyramidal  in  shape, 
with  the  base  anterior.  The  stomach  simulates  that  of  the 
dog  more  than  that  of  the  horse.  The  left  sac  is  not  covered 
by  flat,  white  epithelium  continued  from  the  oesophag-us 
as  in  the  horse,  but  like  the  right  sac  is  entirely  covered 
by  pink  mucus  secreting  velvety  tissue.  The  liver  is  bilo- 
bate,  presenting  a  right  and  left  lobe.  The  elephant,  like 
the  horse,  has  no  gall-bladder.  The  kidneys  are  divided  into 
lobides  which  are  not  as  prominent  as  in  the  ox  but  are 
verv  distinct  on  section. 


CHAPTER  X 
TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS 

The  foregoing  discussion  of  the  internal  examination 
of  different  animals  deals  with  the  exenteration  of  cavities 
after  examination  of  the  relationship  of  organs,  presence 
of  fluids,  foreign  bodies,  etc.  In  the  autopsy  room  students 
working  on  the  various  parts  of  the  large  animals  should 
first  eviscerate  the  cavities  and  remove  certain  parts,  follow- 
ing the  technical  methods  above  described,  using  not  more 
than  one  hour  of  the  time  allowed  for  the  work.  The  second 
hour  or  remainder  of  the  period  should  be  used  in  preparing 
the  organs  for  examination  by  the  application  of  further 
technic,  and  in  carefully  and  sj^stematically  describing  each 
structure  and  lesion.  The  students  of  each  group  should 
open  and  describe  the  organs  extirpated  by  them.  When 
all  parts  have  been  prepared,  one  of  the  students  who  was 
assigned  to  the  head  and  neck  should  begin  a  description  of 
the  respiratory  tract,  starting  with  the  nostrils,  nasal  pas- 
sages and  sinuses,  and  following  the  system  to  the  thorax. 
He  should  not  miss  any  anatomical  part  of  the  respiratory 
system.  All  other  students  should  give  strict  attention 
to  his  description  and  make  mental  notes  to  be  used  later  in 
the  general  discussion  to  follow. 

AVlien  the  respiratory  organs  have  been  described  as 
far  as  the  thorax,  one  of  the  students  assigned  to  that  part 
should  take  up  the  work  and  describe  the  remainder  of  that 
system,  together  with  the  visceral  and  parietal  pleura. 
When  these  descriptions  have  been  completed  the  student 
should  make  a  pathologic-anatomical  diagnosis  on  each 
individual  structure  described  or  state  that  in  his  opinion 

11  161 


162  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

the  part  presents  no  pathological  alteration.  The  vascular 
system  should  then  be  described  by  the  alternate  student 
on  the  thorax  and  abdomen.  He  should  describe  the  blood 
as  it  flowed  from  the  axillary  vessels  when  the  foreleg  was 
excised,  the  pericardium,  heart,  spleen,  large  blood-vessels 
and  their  principal  branches,  and  render  a  pathologic- 
anatomical  diagnosis  on  each. 

After  completing  the  description  of  the  respiratory 
and  vascular  systems,  the  second  student  on  the  head  and 
neck  should  take  up  the  digestive  system  including  salivary 
glands,  from  the  lips  to  the  thorax,  where  one  of  the  students 
assigned  to  the  thorax  and  abdomen  should  continue  to  de- 
scribe the  digestive  tube  to  the  rectum,  including  the  acces- 
sory organs  of  digestion,  and  conclude  with  a  pathologic- 
anatomical  diagnosis  of  each  structure.  The  first  student 
assigned  to  the  pelvis  should  describe  the  rectum  and  anus 
and  render  diagnosis.  The  second  student  assigned  to  the 
pelvis  should  next  describe  the  genito-urinary  system,  be- 
ginning with  the  kidneys  and  terminating  with  the  external 
genitals.  He  should  also  describe  the  adrenals  at  this  time. 
A  diagnosis  should  follow  the  description.  The  alternate 
student  assigned  to  the  head  and  neck  should  describe  the 
thyroid  and  thymus  glands,  eye,  ear,  and  the  brain  and  cord 
together  with  their  meninges.  The  students  assigned  to 
the  ductless  glands,  skin,  subcutaneous  and  intermuscular 
connective  tissue,  blood,  muscles,  bones,  joints,  tendons,  and 
pododerm,  should  next  describe  those  structures  and  diag- 
nose pathological  conditions  found.  The  organ  lymph- 
glands  should  be  described  with  their  corresponding  parts. 

After  all  descriptions  have  been  completed  and  a  patho- 
logical diagnosis  made  on  each  structure,  a  general  discus- 
sion should  be  held  and  the  instructor  so  interrogate  the 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         163 

students  as  to  stimulate  them  to  logical  deductions  based  on 
the  description  of  lesions  found.  They  should  try  to  deter- 
mine the  primary  and  secondary  lesions  and  the  effect  of 
those  lesions  upon  the  physiological  function  of  the  imme- 
diate and  distant  organs,  the  pathogenesis,  and  finally  the 
cause  of  death. 

If  the  autopsy  is  done  in  the  field,  one  should  follow  the 
same  general  system  of  description,  diagnosis,  conclusion 
and  note  taking.  That  is,  he  should  begin  at  the  head  and 
describe  the  respiratory  system  to  its  termination,  next  the 
blood- vascular  s^^stem,  lymphatic,  digestive,  urogenital,  and 
nervous  system,  eye,  ear,  ductless  glands,  skin,  muscles, 
bones,  cartilages,  tendons,  and  pododerm.  By  following 
this  routine  one  is  not  apt  to  overlook  any  organ  or  part 
that  may  be  of  vital  importance,  which  will  surely  be  the 
case  if  he  is  not  systematic. 

The  description  of  an  organ,  whether  mental,  written, 
or  given  orally  before  a  class,  should  consist  of  a  syste- 
matic routine  in  which  some  or  all  of  the  following  points 
should  be  considered,  i.e.,  position,  size,  weight,  shape,  color, 
odor,  consistency,  incision,  incision  fluid,  cut-surface  and 
contents.  One  should  avoid  the  use  of  the  word  normal 
and  unaltered  as  they  create  a  disposition  to  slight  the  work 
and  make  one  a  poor  observer.  Even  if  the  part,  more 
especially  the  viscera,  be  normal  one  may  describe  it  in 
very  few  well-chosen  words,  which  may  readily  indicate  that 
no  pathological  alteration  is  present. 

If  an  autopsy  does  not  call  for  the  inspection  of  certain 
parts  which  are  obviously  not  involved,  one  should  state 
that  those  parts  were  not  examined.  The  word  normal  may 
be  accepted  in  a  report  from  an  experienced  pathologist  in 
whose  judgment  and  knowledge  one  may  place  implicit 


164 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


confidence,  but  the  beginner  should  consider  himself  pre- 
sumptuous to  use  it.  One  must  have  much  experience  at 
the  post-mortem  table  to  be  able  to  accurately  determine 
the  difference  between  that  which  is  normal,  that  which  is 
pathological,  and  that  which  presents  the  varying  stages 
of  post-mortem  decomposition. 


A  Comparison  of  Some  British  and  Metric  Units 


9/5  C°  +32. 
5/9  F°  =32. 


Degrees  Fahrenheit 
Degrees  Centigrade 
Capacity .... 

'1  inch  =25.4  millimetres 
Ifoot  =304.8  millimetres 

1  yard    

1  mile  =1609.3  metres 
5  miles 


Length . 


=   2.54    centimetres. 

=  30.48  centimetres. 

=  91.44  centimetres. 

=    1.609  kilometres. 

=   8      kilometres  (nearly). 


1  metre  =  1000  millimetres     =  39.37  inches. 

1  centimetre  =  1/100  metre    =   0.39  inch. 

1  kilometre  =  1000  metres       =   0.62  mile. 
To  convert  millimetres  into  inches,  X  .039.     Converse,  X 
To  convert  metres  into  yards,  X  1.09.     Converse,  X  .914. 


25.4. 


Weight. 


1  grain  =  0.064  grammes  =  64.8  milligrammes. 
1  ounce  (avoir.)  =  28.35  grammes  =  457.5  grains. 
1  pound  (avoir.)   =453.60  grammes  =  3^  kilogramme  (appro.x.). 

1  cwt =     50.8  kilogrammes. 

1  ton =  1016.    kilogrammes. 


1  kilogramme  =  1000  grammes  = 

1  gramme = 

1  milligramme  =  1/1000  gramme       = 

To  convert  grammes  into  ounces  X  0.0352. 

To  convert  kilogrammes  into  pounds,  X  2.2. 


2.2  pounds  (avoir.). 
15.432  grains. 

0.0154  grain  =  1/165  gr.  (nearly). 
Converse,  X  28.35. 
Converse,  X  0.454. 


Capacity 


1  fluidounce 

=   28.4    cubic  centimetres 

1  pint 

=  568.0    cubic  centimetres 

1  gallon 

=     4.54  litres. 

Ipeck 

=      9.08  litres. 

1  bushel 

=   36.32  litres. 

1  cubic  inch 

=    16.38  cubic  centimetres 

1  cubic  foot 

=    28.33  litres. 

1  litre  =  1000  cubic  centimetres  = 


1.76  pints  (imperial)  =  61  cu.  im. 

1  gramme  of  distilled  water  at  its 


1  cubic  centimetre  =  0.061  cubic  inch  = 
greatest  density. 

1  cubic  metre  =  1000  litres  =  35.3  cubic  feet. 
To  convert  litres  into  pints,  X  1.76.     Converse,  X  .568. 
To  convert  litres  into  gallons,  X  0.22.     Converse,  X  4.543. 
To  convert  litres  into  cubic  feet,  X  0.03532.  Converse,  X  28.33.   (After  F.Smith.) 


Fig    115— Representation  of  certain  familiar  objects,  with  scales  in  millimeti 

lesions  found  at  post-mort 


ties,  useful  for  comparison  in  describing  the  size  and  form  of 
•  Cattell). 


Fahrenheit.  Cemigrade. 


Inches 

Ceniimefres 

— 

— 

=r 

— 

= 

— 



— 

i/i 

- 

— 

- 

— 

= 

= 

= 

— 

= 

- 

— 

— 

= 

J2 

— 

=: 

— 

— 

- 

— 

^ 

E 

= 

— 

= 

- 

= 

— 

- 

— 

— 

=: 



— 

= 

o 

— 

— 

— 

- 

— 

p= 

— 1 

:= 

7 

— 

= 

= 

- 

— 

— 

— 

= 

— 

2 

— 

= 

- 

m 

= 

iz 

= 

" 

— 

- 

— 

= 

— 

HZ 

-r 

— 

rr 

1  _ 

- 

— 

r= 

E 

— 

= 

— 

zr 



- 

— 

= 

— 

— 

= 

— 

= 

Fig.  116. — Scale  for  accurate  measurement.       ^O- 
(F.  Smith.) 


Xftfr  bolls 

' 

'CC° 



— 

— 

ton- 



= 

~ 

^ 

— 

rr 



— 

— 



— 

zr: 

— 

— 

— 

J1C 

E 

— 

IZ 

_ 

— 

.->/1° 

,„„<, 

^ 

— 

„«• 

— 

- 

i 

. 

p 

jO 

— 

= 

_ 

,^»     ^^° 

VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


In  describing  structures  one  may  compare  the  size  of 
an  organ  or  lesion  with  certain  well- 
known  objects,  such  as  a  pin's  head,  hen's 
egg,  man's  fist,  child's  head,  etc.,  but 
should  not  too  frequently  state  that  an 
organ  is  a  little  larger  or  smaller  than 
normal  (Fig.  115).  Exact  measm'c- 
ments  should  be  given  in  centimetres 
(Fig.  116)  and  metres  and  weights  de- 
termined in  grammes  and  kilogrammes. 
When  possible  the  gross  weight  of  a  cad- 
aver should  be  obtained  before  the 
autopsy  is  begun  to  be  used  in  comparison 
with  organ- weights. 

Tongue,  Larynx,  Trachea, 
OESOPHAGUS  AND  ToNsiLS. — Extend 
these  structures  upon  a  table  with  the 
tongue  pointing  toward  the  autopsist.  In- 
cise the  tongue  longitudinally  in  several 
places,  then  pass  a  knife  under  the  isth- 
mus of  the  fauces  and  cut  upward  imme- 
diately anterior  to  the  epiglottis,  exposing 
the  tonsils.  In  the  dog  and  cat  the  tonsils 
are  eliptical  and  quite  prominent;  in  the 
lary^nx!  xMlhTJ.ld^^so-  COW  thc  tousilkr  sinus  is  exposed  and  may 
fi'ucir  indeed™  and"^ flaps  bc  followcd  tliTough  to  thc  tousil  which 

laid  to  the  sides,  exposing     .  i»     .  1  r  rm 

rudimentary       tonsils,     is     lOCatcd     OUtSldC     OI      thC     laUCCS.  i  HC 

Larynx,  trachea  and  oeso- 

LVi"eX^nlne°Vxpotg  tousils  of  thc  hoYSG  arc  rudimentary  and 
™rdran'd*'ope''n!ngT\o  llc  at  thc  basc  of  tlic  touguc  where  many 

laryngeal  ventricles.  •    •!  i  i  i 

crypts  are  visible.  They  are  about  two 
inches  long  and  one  inch  wide,  showing  many  depressions 
like    a    Peyer's    patch.      The    oesophagus    is    opened    by 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         167 

passing  the  probe  end  of  an  enterotome  into  the  anterior 
orifice  and  cutting  through  the  dorsal  wall  of  the  entire 
cervical  portion.  After  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
oesophagus  has  been  examined,  pass  the  enterotome  into  the 
glottis  and  cut  through  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  larynx, 
and  continue  the  incision  through  the  cervical  portion  of  the 
trachea.  Spread  the  larynx  and  trachea  open  and  examine 
the  thyroid,  cricoid  and  arytenoid  cartilages,  vocal  cords, 
ventricles,  annular  cartilages,  and  mucous  membranes 
(Fig.  117). 

Thyroid  and  Parathyroid  Glands. — The  parathy- 
roid glands  lie  on  the  anterior  surface  of  the  thyroid  glands 
of  the  horse,  dog,  and  cat,  and  near  the  posterior  end  in  the 
cow.  They  are  closely  applied  to  the  thyroids  and  are 
removed  with  them.  To  incise  the  thyroid  gland  hold  it 
between  the  thimib  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand 
narrow  edge  upward.  Cut  downward  through  the  organ, 
severing  it  in  halves.  The  thyroid  gland  of  small  animals 
may  be  placed  upon  a  table  and  incised  longitudinally. 

CEsophagus. — The  technic  of  the  cervical  portion  of  the 
oesophagus  was  described  with  that  of  the  larynx  and 
trachea  with  which  it  was  removed.  The  thoracic  portion 
is  opened  with  an  enterotome  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  technic  is  performed  upon  the  heart  and  lungs,  as  that 
part  of  the  oesophagus  is  extirpated  with  these  organs. 

Bronchi,  Lungs,  and  Lymph-glands. — To  separate 
the  heart  from  the  lungs  grasp  it  by  the  apex,  hold  it  up- 
ward, and  sever  the  large  blood-vessels.  After  the  heart 
has  been  severed  from  the  lungs,  place  the  latter  upon  a 
table  with  the  dorsal  aspect  upward,  trachea  toward  the 
autopsist.     Insert  an  enterotome  in  the  trachea  and  cut 


168  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

through  the  dorsal  surface  to  the  bronchi.  Lay  open  the 
bronchi  in  the  same  manner.  The  visceral  pleura,  which  is 
normally  smooth  and  shinj^  should  be  carefully  observed 
for  adhesions,  white  patches,  and  other  changes.  Next 
palpate  the  lungs  thoroughly  for  nodules,  areas  of  consoli- 
dation, etc.  Turn  the  trachea  away  from  the  autopsist  and 
cut  each  lobe  of  the  lung  into  sections  by  making  longi- 
tudinal incisions  an  inch  or  two  apart  through  the  entire 
thickness  of  the  lung.  Scrape  the  surface  of  the  cut  sections 
with  the  sharp  edge  of  a  knife  and  if  foam  can  be  collected 
upon  the  blade  lung  oedema  is  indicated.  After  this  test 
has  been  made  grasp  each  section  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers  at  the  anterior  end  of  the  lung  and  slide  the  hand 
along  to  the  posterior  end  of  the  section.  Should  any 
nodules  be  present  they  may  readily  be  felt  as  the  thumb 
and  fingers  pass  over  them.  In  most  cases  of  glanders  one 
need  only  to  pass  the  hand  over  the  visceral  pleiu-a  and  apply 
slight  pressure  to  determine  the  presence  of  nodules  which 
feel  like  shot  of  various  sizes  embedded  in  the  tissue.  When 
the  lung  presents  a  firm  consistency  a  very  small  piece  of 
it  should  be  excised  with  a  sharp-pointed  scissors  and  placed 
in  a  glass  of  water.  If  the  piece  sinks  some  form  of  pneu- 
monia or  atelectasis  is  indicated.  When  the  lung  is  soft 
but  small  fountains  of  mucus  can  be  expressed  from  the 
cut  surface  a  small  piece  of  tissue  should  be  excised  at  those 
points  with  sharp-pointed,  fine  scissors  and  tested  in  water. 
The  bronchial  lymph-glands  may  be  located  anterior 
to  each  bronchus  at  its  origin  from  the  trachea  in  the 
obtuse  angle  made  by  the  trachea  and  each  bronchus.  The 
anterior  mediastinal  lymph-glands  are  located  in  the  ante- 
rior mediastinum  along  the  trachea  and  the  posterior  glands 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         169 

are  situated  in  the  posterior  niediastinum  along  the  dorsal 
wall  of  the  oesophagus  and  in  dogs  between  the  bronchi  in 
the  acute  angle  made  by  those  tubes  at  their  origin.  These 
glands  should  be  cut  longitudinally  into  thin  sections 
(Fig.  118). 


Fig.  118. — Lungs  after  opening  trachea  and  bronchi  and  making  parallel  longitu- 
dinal incisions  through  the  parenchyma.  Each  section  is  passed  between  the  thumb  and  fingers 
in  examination  for  nodules.  Bronchial  lymph  glands  are  in  the  obtuse  angles  and  mediastinal 
lymph  glands  in  the  acute  angle  of  the  tracheal  bifurcation. 


Pericardium  and  Pericardial  Fluid. — The  opening 
of  the  pericardial  sac  and  care  of  the  pericardial  fluid  of 
large  animals  was  described  in  the  discussion  of  evisceration 
of  the  thoracic  cavity.  The  heart  and  lungs  of  small  ani- 
mals are  removed  without  opening  the  pericardial  sac.  Be- 
fore performing  the  technic  on  the  heart  of  small  animals, 
a  sharp-pointed  scissors  is  passed  through  the  pericardium 
near  the  apex  and  a  vertical  incision  made  toward  the  base 


170  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

of  the  organ.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  contaminate  or 
lose  the  fluid  until  its  quantity  and  character  can  be 
determined. 

Heart. — The  heart  may  be  opened  with  autopsy  knife, 
scalpel,  enterotome  or  sharp-pointed  scissors,  depending 


fK  ^'  •  ; — ^l'  *°  series.  Proper  position  of  the  heart  at  autopsy.  Right  side  toward 
tne  autopsist  s  right.  Apex  proximal  and  base  distal  to  the  autopsist.  The  first  incision  ia 
made  through  the  wall  of  the  right  auricle  and  ventricle  from  the  base  toward  the  apex  at  the 
right  ot  the  coronary  sulcus.  A  similar  incision  is  made  through  the  wall  of  the  left  ventricle 
and  auricle  to  the  left  of  the  sulcus. 

upon  the  size  of  the  organ.  Place  the  heart  of  a  large  ani- 
mal upon  the  table,  apex  toward  the  autopsist,  right  side 
of  the  heart  to  the  autopsist's  right  and  the  left  side  to  his 
left.  The  right  ventricular  wall  is  thinner  than  the  left  and 
the  apex  of  the  heart  is  formed  by  the  left  ventricular  wall. 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         171 

When  placed  in  this  position  the  terminal  portion  of  the 
coronary  artery  lies  almost  vertically  from  the  base  to  the 
apex  of  the  ventricles  and  directly  over  the  edge  of  the 
median  septum.  The  first  incision  is  made  longitudinally 
parallel  to  and  one  inch  to  the  right  of  the  coronary  artery 
from  base  to  apex  through  the  wall  of  the  right  ventricle 


Biscuspid  valves 


Median  septum         Tricuspid  valves 


Fig.   120.— No.  2  in  series.     Right  and  left  cavities  of  the  heart  opened  after  completing 
incisions  indicated  in  Fig.  119.     Tricuspid  and  bicuspid  valves  exposed. 

(Fig.  119) .  One  should  hold  the  knife  in  a  full  hand  grip 
to  make  this  incision  and  cut  downward  through  the  right 
ventricular  wall,  taking  care  to  cut  no  deeper  than  the 
thickness  of  the  wall.  When  the  wall  of  the  right  ventricle 
has  been  incised  from  base  to  its  lower  end  near  the  apex, 
turn  the  knife  with  the  cutting  edge  upward  and  force  the 
point  under  the  tricuspid  valves  at  the  superior  end  of  the 
incision.     Cut  upward  through  the  tricuspid  valves  and 


172  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

continue  the  incision  through  the  auricular  wall  in  a  direct 
line  with  the  incision  just  made  through  the  wall  of  the 
ventricle.  Next  lay  the  right  auricle  and  ventricle  open,  cut 
the  cord^e  tendinje  and  examine  the  contents.  Wash  out 
the  auricle  and  ventricle  with  water  and  examine  the  tricus- 


FiG.  121. — No.  3  in  series.  The  entire  heart  as  seen  in  Fig.  120  is  here  inverted.  The 
right  side  is  now  toward  the  autopsist's  left  and  the  left  side  toward  his  right.  The  incision 
at  the  left  is  continued  upward  along  the  median  septum  through  the  right  ventricular  wall  to 
the  pulmonary  artery  and  that  structure  opened  exposing  pulmonary  semilunar  valves  Fig. 
122.  The  incision  at  the  right  is  continued  upward  along  the  median  septum  through  the  left 
ventricular  wall  which  is  laid  to  the  right  and  the  aorta  opened,  exposing  its  semilunar  valves 
Fig.  123. 

pid   valves,   columnse   carucE,   parietal   endocardium,   and 
venous  openings  into  the  right  aiu'icle  (Fig.  120) . 

To  open  the  left  ventricle  make  a  similar  parallel  inci- 
sion one  and  one-half  inches  to  the  left  of  the  coronary 
artery  from  the  base  of  the  heart  to  the  apex  (Fig.  119). 
One  must  cut  deeply  as  the  left  wall  may  be  two  inches  thick. 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         173 

With  this  incision  completed  turn  the  knife  with  the  cutting 
edge  upward,  force  it  under  the  biscuspid  valves  and  cut 
upward  through  them  at  the  superior  end  of  the  incision 
just  completed.  After  incising  the  bicuspid  valves,  con- 
tinue the  incision  through  the  wall  of  the  left  auricle  in  a 


Semilunar 

valves  of  the 

pulmonary  , 


'iiC' 


■:m'^''- 


Fig.    122. — No.  4  in  series.     Heart  in  same  relative  position   as   in  Fig.   121.     The   first 
don  (left)  in  Fig.  121  has  been  completed,  right  ventricular  wall  laid  outward  to  the  left 
and  pulmonary  semilunar  valves  exposed. 

direct  line  with  the  left  ventricular  incision.  Lay  open  the 
left  auricle  and  ventricle  and  proceed  as  with  the  right  side 
of  the  heart  (Fig.  120). 

In  opening  the  pulmonary  artery  and  aorta  for  exam- 
ination of  their  semilunar  valves,  next  turn  the  heart  com- 
pletely over  so  that  the  right  side  is  at  the  autopsist's  left 


174  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

and  the  left  at  his  right  (Fig.  121).  With  the  left  hand 
grasp  the  thin  right  ventricle  wall,  which  is  now  at  the  autop- 
sist's  left,  raise  it  upward  and  observe  the  junction  of  the 
wall  with  the  median  septum.  With  a  knife  or  enterotome 
cut  through  the  wall  of  the  right  ventricle  close  to  and 
to  the  left  of  the  septum  from  the  inferior  end  of  the  incision, 
upward  toward  the  base  of  the  heart  (Fig.  121).  When 
close  to  the  pulmonary  artery  withdraw  the  knife  and  invert 
the  artery  at  its  origin  just  enough  to  observe  the  points 
at  which  each  cup  of  the  semilunar  valves  joins  its  neighbor. 
Cut  between  the  two  cups  so  as  to  keep  each  intact,  then 
cut  through  the  wall  of  the  artery  and  lay  it  open.  Wash 
the  inside  of  the  artery  and  examine  valves  and  intima 

(Fig.  122). 

To  open  the  aorta  grasp  the  apex  of  the  heart  with  the 
left  hand  and  raise  it  upward.  With  a  knife  cut  vertically 
through  the  left  ventricular  wall  close  to  and  to  the  right  of 
the  septum  (Fig.  121)  until  the  wall  is  almost  completely 
free  from  it.  Raise  the  bicuspid  valve  upward  and  expose 
the  aortic  opening.  The  points  at  which  the  cups  of  the 
aortic  semilunar  valve  join  each  other  are  visible  without 
inverting  the  aorta.  Insert  the  knife  in  the  aortic  opening 
with  the  cutting  edge  upward.  Place  the  cutting  edge  close 
to  the  handle  on  a  point  between  two  cups  of  the  valve  and 
cut  upward  a  quarter  of  an  inch,  then  keeping  the  knife 
firmly  in  the  incision  cut  outward  to  the  right,  avoiding 
injury  to  the  semilunar  valves  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
which  lie  directly  above  those  of  the  aorta  when  the 
heart  is  in  this  position,  and  expose  aortic  semilunar  valves 

(Fig.  123). 

Examine  the  origin  of  the  coronary  artery,  aortic  semi- 
lunar valves,  thickness  of  the  aortic  wall,  and  the  intima. 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS 


175 


With  small  scissors  open  the  entire  coronary  artery.  Incise 
the  myocardium  with  long  smooth  incisions,  examine  sur- 
face of  cut  sections,  and  press  the  thumb  into  the  muscle  to 
determine  the  consistency. 

The  heart  of  small  animals  may  be  opened,  following 


Aortic  semilunar 


Fig.  123. — No.  5  in  series.  Heart  in  same  relative  position  as  shown  in  Fig.  122.  This 
illustration  shows  the  second  incision  (right)  described  in  Fig.  121  completed  and  the  left  ven- 
tricular wall  laid  to  the  right,  median  septum  rotated  to  the  left  and  aorta  opened  exposing  its 
semilunar  valves. 


the  same  lines,  but  small,  sharp-pointed  scissors  should  be 
used,  and  the  heart  may  be  held  in  the  palm  of  the  hand. 

Various  hydrostatic  and  pneumatic  tests  are  used  in 
determining  the  competency  of  the  valves,  but  their  value  is 
not  now  considered  of  such  importance  as  it  once  was. 

An  incision  is  first  made  into  the  left  auricle,  and  any 


.^ 

a 

=a 

S  ■ 

j3 

a 

& 

>> 

ll 

g 
J2 

a! 
an 

1 

Ca   0.6 

body  w 
Conical. 

Reddish 
Firm. 

"Hi^ 

■s|^"g    ; 

CO  a-g 

ti 

5§-S 

_S 

per  cent 
body  wei 
st    globu 
X   blunt 

ish  browi 

1 

||i| 

■3 

:iJ 

lli.l 

PQ 

Pi 

o   <:      KtL 

Il-P 

1 

1    1 

§s2-2 

Sg^g 

s 

s  .t 

a 

< 

s 

Pericardium  a 
to  sternum  f; 
rib  to  xiphoi 
lage.    Long 
lique. 

>> 
>  . 

1'^ 

Ca  0.4-0.5  pi 
body  weight 

Apex    b'ur 
notched. 

Reddish  brow 

Firm 

O 

^^^4  i 

er    and    nar- 
a    the    horse, 
base  to  apex 
m.  at  base  ca 
um.    at    cor. 
m. 

J3 

median  pli 
Opposite 
Contact  w 
on  left  si 
ered  by  lu 

>> 

n 

i> 

.  M 

O 

to  left  of 
1  in  horse. 

5th  ribs, 
racic  wall 
ht  side  CO 

elatively  Ion 
rower    than 
Height    from 
ca  17  cm.    Di 
12    cm.      Cir 
groove  ca  38 

1^ 

go 

g 

Ph 

lim 

i6i 

Q 

§ 

« 

o   c 

tft^ 

^5d.||5 

ronary  groove  to  apex 
m.  at  coronary  groove 
rcum.  at  cor.  groove 
eight  L.  V.ca  18  cm. 
ca  15  cm.      Diam.  L. 
liam.  R.  V.ca  6.6  cm. 
,  V.  ca  5  cm.     Diam.  , 
cm.    Diam.  ventricu- 
3.5  cm.    Length  L.A.I 
ngth  R.  A.  ca  11  cm. 
a  7  cm.     Diam.  R.  A. 
m.  auricle  walls  ca  0.5 

i 

downward,  ba 
eft.  Two-fifth 
e-fifths  to  the  1 
sally  and  oppo 
ribs.     Apex  ab 

sternum   close 

is 

lill^o 

.s 

^1 

W 

ong  axis  direc' 
ward,  and  to  tl 
the  right  and  t 
Base  directed 
3d,  4th,  5th,  6 
last   segment 
diaphragm, 
ength  from  coi 
ca25cm.   Dia 
ca  22  cm.     Ci 
40-70  cm.      H 
Heighth  RV. 
V.ca 6  cm.    D 
Diam.  wall  L. 
wallR.V    ca2 
lar  septum  ca  i 
ca  10  cm.     Le 
Diam.  L.  A.  c 
caScm.    Dia: 
to  1.5  cm. 
a  1  per  cent,  of 

13 

Is 

■  3 

:  oo 

J 

J 

o   o 

rtfe 

•<;'" 

c 
.2 

> 

.2 
.2 

■  i 

f^H 

•s 

a 

1    i 

^        og 

o  a 

£ 

S 

& 

^ 

S 

(3 

sa 

TECHNIC  AND  DESCRirilON  OF  ORGANS  177 

post-mortem  clots  are  carefully  removed  from  the  left 
chambers  through  it.  Another  incision  large  enough  to 
admit  the  nozzle  of  a  half-inch  tube  is  made  into  the  ven- 
tricle near  its  apex  and  in  the  line  of  that  required  for  laying- 
it  fully  open.  The  tube  is  joined  to  the  bellows  and  air 
driven  intermittently  into  the  ventricle  by  means  of  it,  the 
aorta  having  been  meanwhile  closed.  The  valve  will  be 
seen  to  open  and  close,  according  as  the  air  is  asjjirated 
or  driven  out  of  the  bellows.  A  like  procedure  is  adopte.d 
for  the  demonstration  of  the  tricuspid.  To  test  the  aortic 
valve,  the  incision  before  described  as  necessary  to  lay 
open  the  left  ventricle  is  continued  up  as  close  to  the  valve 
as  possible  without  injuring  it.  The  tube  is  tied  into  the 
aorta,  and  the  action  of  the  valve  is  watched  from  below. 
The  same  method  is  used  to  test  the  competency  of  the 
pulmonary  artery  valve  (Hamilton). 

The  same  general  procedure  may  be  used  with  water, 
excluding  the  bellows.  A  slice  of  the  apex  is  cut  off,  open- 
ing both  ventricles  so  that  water  may  be  poured  into  each 
ventricle  separately  to  test  the  auriculoventricular  valves 
after  the  large  arteries  have  been  closed.  In  testing  the 
semilunar  valves  the  arteries  should  be  trimmed  down  so 
that  the  valves  are  visible,  then  the  vessel  filled  with  water 
and  the  action  of  the  valve  noted  from  below  after  opening 
the  ventricle. 

Spleen. — Take  the  measurement  of  the  spleen  of  the 
horse  in  centimetres  along  both  legs  of  the  right  angle  and 
the  hypotenuse  (Fig.  124).  Make  several  incisions  longi- 
tudinally through  the  organ  and  measure  the  thickness 
(Fig.  125).  On  cut  section  the  spleen  pulp,  Malpighian 
corpuscles,  trabecul^e  and  capsule  are  examined.  The 
spleen  of  other  animals  is  incised  and  inspected  in  the  same 

12 


Fig.  124. — Spleen  of  a  horse.     Dotted  lines  for  measuring  the  orpan  on  both  legs  of  the  right 
angle  and  the  hypotenuse  of  the  triangle.    Solid  lines  for  incisions  through  the  organ. 


-After  incisions  have  been  made  through  the  spleen,  exposing  cut  surface  for  exami- 
nation of  trabeculse,  pulp,  and  Malpighian  corpuscles. 


o 

on 

tK 

■si 

» 

13 

o  ao  o        p";^           5' 

B  o  B  r-        E»  2.            S 

j-i  S  2        -oto            . 

•t) 

S   •          (t  o- 

-• 

P 

o 

o 

a 

B 

cr* 

u 

0 

O 

Q; 

m 

cpo      oo         ^ 

w 

!l.    frflSI 

'1  'ssir 

o  o 

W 

Is 

<"  o  2  S^ 

B 

Jgps 

3ii 

a> 

oi-o 

p  ^S- 

.   c 

3  o  ti;2 

S-gS 

■     7  B 

!  "0 

■   .B'<.3 

cpo        WO            o 

t- 

a-       B^          8= 

2. 

"-•  li    ° 

a; 

'^            g 

2, 

o 

(C 

w 

p 

o 

g 

B 

? 

Cal3 

Ca  15 

Some' 

Grayi 

Soft . 

►,0 

c  5 
Bg 

B  " 

w 

c"         ^ 

X 

B 

a 

to              -1 

P 

a 

P' 

o 

•a 

B 

m 
c 

3 

1 

p" 

1 

o 

o 

is 

gx 

1 

•'^11 

5° 

o 

o 

il: 

s 

TO 

S  3  ° 

1 

m  - 

b" 

Kf'           H 

<i 

M 

S-to"         o 

P  p 

o  2, 

^■p-     s 

5.3. 

g-rt? 

^         c 

B  2 

s     ? 

.^1 

'  1 

1 

^ 

& 

a 

(W 

•0 

0 

1 

B 

Oval,      roui 
disc-shape 

Red. 

Soft. 

b" 

S  o'p' 

K2. 

1, 

.^s. 

g 

o  B 

180  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

manner  and  the  length  and  maximum  width  at  each  end 
taken  in  centimetres. 

The  cut  surface  of  a  normal  spleen  is  flat,  pulp  brownish 
red,  Malpighian  corpuscles  invisible  or  only  very  faintly 
visible,  trabecule  visible  as  a  meshwork  of  fine  white  lines, 
and  the  capsule  is  adherent  and  tough.  In  passive  con- 
gestion the  cut  surface  is  convex,  pulp  black  and  jam-like, 
trabeculse  and  Malpighian  bodies  invisible.  Local  areas  of 
passive  congestion  simulating  hemorrhagic  infarcts  consti- 
tute multiple  spleen  tumors.  They  are  oval  or  round,  blue 
or  black  swellings  the  size  of  a  walnut  or  larger  and  on  sec- 
tion are  black  and  jam-like.  In  follicular  hyperplasia  of 
the  spleen  the  pulp  is  brownish  red,  trabecule  visible,  and 
Malpighian  corpuscles  are  distinctly  visible,  as  numerous, 
elevated,  tapioca-like,  round  white  bodies  in  the  pulp.  The 
spleen  is  usually  congested  in  the  course  of  nearly  all  septi- 
caemias and  following  chronic  diseases  of  the  heart,  lungs 
and  liver.  It  is  enlarged  in  leukemia,  pseudoleukemia  and 
amyloid  degeneration.  It  may  undergo  atrophy  from 
chronic  interstitial  splenitis,  or  show  simple,  or  brown 
atrophy,  tumors,  etc. 

Stomach. — The  stomach  should  be  opened  with  an 
enter otome  by  incising  the  wall  on  the  great  curvature  from 
the  oesophageal  opening  to  the  duodenum.  When  the 
latter  structure  remains  attached  to  the  stomach  the  incision 
should  be  continued  through  it  to  the  terminal  ligation  and 
the  openings  of  the  bile  and  pancreatic  ducts  should  be 
examined.  The  contents  of  the  stomach  are  removed  and 
separated  and  the  mucous  membrane  thoroughly  washed 
and  closely  inspected  (Fig.  126). 

With  ruminants  one  should  use  an  enterotome  and  open 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         181 

the  abomasum  on  its  great  curvature,  beginning  at  the 
duodenum  and  continuing  through  the  natural  opening  into 
the  omasum.  When  this  opening  has  been  examined  sever 
the  omasum  in  halves  with  a  knife.  Next  pass  an  entero- 
tome  through  the  opening  from  the  omasum  to  the  reticu- 


FiG.  126.— Line  of  incision  in  opening  stomach  and  duodenum 

lum,  incise  the  wall  of  that  structure  and  lay  it  open.  The 
contents  should  be  removed  and  the  mucous  membrane  in- 
spected for  foreign  bodies.  The  opening  from  the  reticulum 
is  next  located  and  the  rumen  opened  by  a  transverse  inci- 
sion through  its  wall.  The  contents  of  the  rumen  and  the 
mucous  membrane  are  then  closely  observed. 


A^ 

"i 

.i 

a 

1 

^fi 

O-                   : 

(fl  g 

■^  6 

c8 

S   3 

a 

O" 

o 

o  3 

03.15 

il 

S 

tf^ 

o- 

PL,-" 

r^ 

a 

,     .  »3  8    . 

a 

H 

3 

rt 

o                  : 

M       '^ 

i 
& 

a 

<! 
X 

o 

11 

•g:3o 

.§5-0  is  : 

02           M              : 

Is 

CO  " 

E 

i 
s 

iii 

11 

cat- 

gSago 

fl 

■a 

fl 

1                ^ 

3         : 

Is 

§•!■ 

2.S  § 

h 

<: 

o 

O 

et, 

e^ 

S         • 

o 

ilM 

1 

ia!ll 

C3 

1         : 

|fl"g 

s 
i 

i? 

OS'S "2*^  S 

§ 

O 
B3 

^og-cc. 

c3" 

-O..C3 

§ 

_3. 

5 

0. 

il 

-ao-g 

fl 
I 

o 

3 

'3 

.2" 

^ 
» 
> 

1 

O 

rt 

g:8 

pSS3 

|S 

§ 

S 

fl 
•c 

a 
3 

v'oA 

0 

3~; 
^1 

fl° 

il 

1  >> 

So. 

»a. 
-§1 

2 

0 

m 

< 

is 

p 

i 

ill 

""  fl 

si 

"S  S  S-S  g 

§ 

^2 

s^ 

1 

a 
u 

2^ 
il 

<0 

^a    g«  . 

fciJ3--i  £  3'-fl 

1  ^ 

O 

w 

w 

£ 

1  ; 

1   d 

a 

I 

£ 

1  -s 

rs 

f^ 

h 

't         > 

-S 

1  £ 

w 

P 

i^ 

d 

6     '^ 

i 

, 

s^ 


5  o  srS  e= 


^  o  P  5-S^^  S-H^       &- 
-  jq  Jf"!  ■    erg  2.5'      — 

5  S  *<  S     «>  S  5 


£5  TO        S-~£r.' 


C-K    P    g. 

2  B  P  • 


><  p  r  7  3  S  a-P  •<■ 


k-se: 


•rt  IN  n 


d 


i-iilli 

,  o  E=  o  o  ; 
; ^^P  p , 


o     t. 


c  2 


p  a  &"  g 

lit'-' 

p"  ■  2  o? 
a.       o-o 

ore  m 
ai       ■jjj&.p 

5'    P     2, 
c  e  g 
2  ° 


p-  5->o  & 
"ig^ots     gp^ 


o  g 


11.1 1&- 

■  r"  p  g.=^  „ 

i  as.?' 


"I' 
'§  m  P 


•'^  S  TO   p  H^  I  § 


tC-XB  "O  tTP  P 

TO  iT—  c  (D  trra 

°  TO  ffi  ■  S  3  2, 

^c^  p  5-_ 

•   -•  p.     a> 


184  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Intestines  of  the  Horse. — The  small  intestine  is 
separated  from  the  mesentery  at  the  time  it  is  removed. 
It  should  be  opened  with  an  enterotome,  washed,  and  laid 
out  with  mucous  membrane  upward.  The  duodenum  re- 
mains with  the  stomach  and  is  opened  at  the  time  that  organ 
is  prepared.  The  double  colon  and  caecum  are  laid  upon 
the  floor  and  unfolded.  The  caecum  is  laid  to  the  right  of 
the  colon,  apex  toward  the  loop  end  of  the  later.  To  open 
the  great  colon  and  csecum  insert  an  enterotome  in  the 
terminal  end  of  the  colon  and  cut  through  the  wall  of  the 
fourth  portion  or  stomach-like  dilation  of  that  structure, 
toward  the  ligamentous  bands  which  hold  together  its  two 
great  lengths.  Continue  the  incision  a  little  above  the  liga- 
ment to  the  loop  end  of  the  colon,  thus  completing  the  inci- 
sion through  the  fourth  and  third  portions.  At  the  loop 
turn  back  and  cut  close  to  the  ligamentous  band  through 
the  wall  of  the  second  and  first  portions  of  the  colon.  Cut 
through  the  csecocolic  opening.  Incise  the  wall  of  the 
ceecimi,  beginning  at  the  great  curvature  of  the  head  and 
continuing  down  the  side  to  the  blind  point  of  that  struc- 
ture. Insert  the  enterotome  into  the  stump  of  the  ileum 
and  cut  through  it  into  the  caecum  exposing  the  ileoc^ecal 
valve  (Fig.  127).  Lay  back  the  intestinal  walls  from  the 
incisions  and  expose  the  contents.  When  the  contents  have 
been  observed  grasp  the  margin  of  the  incision  through  the 
wall  of  the  great  colon  and  raise  it  upward  gently,  allowing 
the  contents  to  fall  to  the  floor.  Later  scrape  the  remaining 
ingesta  from  the  gut  with  a  knife  blade  and  wash  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  colon  and  caecum,  then  lay  the  structures 
out  on  the  floor  with  the  mucous  membrane  upward.  An 
attendant  should  be  present  during  the  procedure  and  re- 
move the  ingesta  to  a  refuse  can  and  flush  the  floor  with 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         185 


Fig.  127. — Double  colon  and  caecum,  origin  of  single  colon  and  termination  of  ileum  at 
the  point  it  enters  the  csecum.  Lines  of  incision  for  opening  them.  Proper  position  for  autopsy 
viewed  from  above. 


151 


2  aSaS^  S5a.Sii^  s  s°^ 


go-So  3"  a      *o  «  n-i!-^  !3J2- 

■-  o-cj-3  S +j  t.    --g  o  ^  2-d  "o      ^  St3 

g  So  g^-^      S'S  a     -^  'S.SlI  S  S  ^  J 

^•9|^oO-S^g^fl^°<g'  o-lt^. 
.  S2  ca+^*^S>S4'Oo  •  tnisosj 
o^^S      m  I'S:^  3  a"^  >«""  £-3  og.S  ' 


5^"^  fti^  £~.2,a     "i:^  2  g  ="  *=^.S  ai:  =,.2 


'^Xu^ 


m  Mo 
5  o   I 


-S  o  o.a  Q-g 


i-i  «  c  3^ 

ts  S  o  &— 

"loll 


|||"i 


2:5  ^M  2,?:  &  11 


•3 -2 1';  1111-;$: 


0-3  <B  g^":^'p'«  - 

H3   O.?-^   (5 


g-^     O     C     Q     ; 


ft  (S  O  .-  in:3  t.>5a)g' 
^^^  C--«.j-;  S"^  g-S  ftM 
d  g  fl  ^^^  o  4^  o  o  __^  o  ".2  g  ; 

.ft2>J3  H  S  P.P.^J3M.2i2  S  ( 


dm* 


rf      O 

S^3 


^'^' 


3  O^ 


g  a  S  S  a  ' 
•S  S  C  o  S  : 


■-3-2 


3  2 


■s2°l2 


■3  ft: 


3  3 


3  °  .>        « 
-"?  bo^  E:^  3-0 

2  0)  «  s  e 


0~   CI 


188  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

water  as  soon  as  the  intestinal  contents  have  been  exam- 
ined. The  rectum  should  be  dissected  from  the  vagina  and 
opened  with  an  enterotome. 

Intestines  of  Ruminants. — The  intestines  of  rumi- 
nants are  first  separated  from  the  mesentery.  This  is  most 
satisfactorily  accomplished  with  a  knife.  Grasp  the  duo- 
denum with  the  left  hand  and  raise  it  upward  from  the 
floor.  With  a  knife  in  the  right  hand  cut  downward  through 
the  mesentery  close  to  the  intestine  until  the  separation  is 
complete.  The  loops  of  the  colon  may  be  torn  free  with 
the  fingers.  Spread  the  mesentery  out  flat  upon  the  table 
and  incise  the  mesenteric  lymph-glands.  To  open  the  intes- 
tine insert  an  enterotome  in  the  duodenum  and  cut  through 
the  mesenteric  side  of  the  gut  to  the  ctecum.  Open  the 
caecum  to  its  blind  end  and  then  open  the  colon.  The  rectum 
is  dissected  from  the  vagina  and  opened  in  the  same  manner. 
The  intestinal  contents  should  be  carefulty  examined,  then 
the  mucous  membrane  washed  with  water  from  a  hose  or 
by  passing  the  gut  through  a  tub  of  water.  When  thor- 
oughly cleaned  it  is  laid  out  upon  the  floor  with  the  mucous 
membrane  upward  for  further  observation.  The  intestinal 
canal  of  sheep  is  about  twenty-six  times  the  length  of  the 
body. 

Intestines  of  Swine. — As  with  ruminants  the  small 
intestines  are  separated  from  the  mesentery,  opened,  washed 
and  laid  out  flat  with  mucous  membrane  upward.  The 
mesentery  is  spread  out  and  the  mesenteric  lymph-glands 
incised.  In  structure  the  colon  appears  to  be  first  doubled, 
then  arranged  in  spiral  coils,  forming  a  wide  base  and  a 
narrow  apex  which  is  formed  by  the  loop  of  the  double  colon 
(Fig.  104) .    To  disengage  the  coils  dissect  out  the  loop  end 


Shape 

Weight 
Color 

Position 

Size 

3 

K 
1 

i 

Serosa  White  andshiny. 

Muscularis    grayish 

pink.     Mucosa  pale 

grayish  pink. 
Serosatough.  Mucosa 

soft.    Wall  pliable. 

Cnntfinta    mawkish 

To    right    of    median 
plane  on  right  side 
of  rumen. 

Ca  40  m.  (130')  long. 
Ca  5-6  cm.  (2") 
diameter.  Entirein- 
testinal  canal  20 
timeslengthof  body. 

Tube 

[ 

Forward  to  visceral 
surface  of  liver. 
Forms  S.  curve  un- 
der right  kidney. 
Passes  back  nearly 
to  ex.  angleof  ileum. 
Turnsforward  along 
side  of  terminal  part 
of  colon  and  joins 
jejunum  under  R. 
kidney. 

Ca  1  m.  (3-4')  long. 

Tube.     Bile  duct  en- 
ters ca  60  cm.   (2') 
from  pylorus.    Pan- 
creatic duct   enters 
ca    30    cm.    further 
back. 

D 

c 

1 
p 
c 
B 

Arranged  in  close 
folds     on    right 
face    of    ventral 
sac  of  rumen. 

Jejunum    38    m. 
(124')  long.     Il- 
eum 1  m.  (ca  3') 
long. 

Tube 

a. 

Begins  opposite  lower 
part     of     11th    rib. 
Extendsup  andback 
against  right  flank. 
Blind  free  end  near 
or  in  the  pelvic  inlet. 

Ca    50-60    cm.    (20- 
24")  long.     Ca  10- 
12  cm.  (4-5")  diam- 
eter.      Holds    9-10 
Htres 

Long    blind    sac     no 
sacculations. 

SerosWhitea.  Muscu- 
laris   grayish    pink. 
Mucosa  gray. 

Contents  fecal  odor. .  . 
Pea  soup-like  fluid .  .  . 

• 

c 
B 

Same  as  caecum. 

Contents  fecal  odor. .  . 
Pea  soup-like  fluid .  . . 

Arranged    in    double 
elliptical     coils     at- 
tached to  each  other 
by  connective  tissue, 
between   the   layers 
of  the  mesentery,  to 
the  right  of  the  ru- 
men. 

Ca  10  m.   (35')  long. 
Ca  5  cm.  (2")  diam- 
eter.      Hold    25-30 
litres. 

Tube.     Coiled 

9 

PH 
I.H 

9 
I 

i 

a 

1 

Pelvic  inlet  to  anus. 

Ca    15-25   cm.    (6- 
10")  long. 

Tube. 

c 
B 

190  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

of  the  doubled  colon  at  the  apex,  then,  cut  through  the 
mesentery  around  the  coils  between  each  layer  down  to  the 
base.  After  the  coils  have  been  cut  free  from  each  other 
lay  the  doubled  colon  out  straight  and  with  the  fingers  or  a 
knife  separate  the  two  lengths  of  gut,  beginning  at  the  free 
extremities  wliich  previously  constituted  the  base  and  con- 
tinuing to  the  loop  which  w^as  formerly  the  apex  of  the 
coiled  structure.  The  colon  may  now  be  laid  out  straight 
and  opened,  washed  and  prepared  for  examination  as  other 
intestines.  The  cfecum  takes  its  origin  at  the  point  where 
the  diameter  of  the  colon  is  the  greatest.  The  enterotome 
should  be  passed  through  the  ileum  into  the  caecum,  thus 
opening  the  ileoctecal  valve. 

Intestines  of  the  Dog  and  Cat. — The  intestines  may 
best  be  removed  from  the  mesentery  without  the  use  of 
knife  or  scissors.  Grasp  the  duodenal  end  of  the  intestines 
between  the  thumb  and  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  the 
mesentery  ojDposite  this  point  with  the  thimib  and  fingers  of 
the  left  hand,  then  apply  traction  gently  and  pull  them 
apart.  Nearly  the  entire  intestine  may  be  separated  from 
the  mesentery  at  the  first  application  of  traction.  Lay  the 
intestine  out  on  a  table  and  open  it  with  an  enterotome,  cut- 
ting through  the  side  of  the  mesenteric  attachment  to  avoid 
injury  to  the  lymph  follicles  which  lie  opposite  the  attach- 
ment of  the  mesentery.  Open  the  caecum  with  a  sharp- 
pointed  scissors.  Scrape  off  the  bulk  of  intestinal  contents, 
then  pass  the  entire  opened  intestine  between  the  first  two 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  held  with  the  first  finger  upward 
and  the  palm  toward  the  body.  In  doing  this  draw  the  gut 
away  from  the  autopsist  and  maintain  the  mucous  mem- 


9 
I 

Weight 
Shape 

Color 

I 

- 

Serosa  gray  or  white. 

Muscularis    grayish 

pink.     Mucosa  gray 

or  pink. 
Serosa  tough.  Mucosa 

soft.     Walls  pliable. 

Arrangedinclose  coils 
and  lie  on  left  side 
and  floor  of  abdo- 
men, from  stomach 
to  pelvis,  some 
against  right  flank. 

Ca  15-20  m.  (50-65') 
long.  2-4  cm.  in 
diameter. 

Tiihp    coiled 

p' 

1 

Ca  60  cm.   (2')  long. 
Mesentery  1-6  cm. 
long. 

Bile  duct  enters  2.5-5 
em.  (1-2")  from  py- 
lorus     .  Pancreatic 
duct  10-15  cm.  (4- 
6")  beyond  it. 

D 

c 

re- 

P 
C 

Ca   15-19  m. 
(ca    16-21') 
long.       Me- 
sentery   18- 
20  cm. (7-8") 
long. 

3p: 

c 
B 

Upper  part  of 
right    flank, 
blind     end 
close  to  pel- 
vic inlet. 

Ca  20-30  cm. 
(8-12")long. 
8-10  cm.  (3- 
4")diameter 

CyUndrical... 

c 
B 

Inrightflank  attached 
by  mesentery  to  sub- 
lumbar  region. 

4-5     m.     (15')     long. 
Ca  8-10  cm.  (3-4") 
at  caecum  decreasing 
to  4-5  cm.  (1.5-2") 
in  diameter. 

Tube      arranged      in 
three   double   spiral 
coils.     Has  appear- 
ance of  bee  hive. 

9 

o 
p 

: 
3 

r 

1 

0 

L 
< 

1      1 

surrounded  by  fat. 
Ca  10-15  cm  (4-6") 

c 

3 

1 
1 

c 
o 

•r 

i 

3 

H 

i 

s 

i 

0 

1 

iJ!            : 

1  :|i 

iJ^  li 

S 

t-l 

z 

1 

1 

o 

s 

E 

s 

Q 

s 
s 

1 

1 

s 

3 

a 
1 

3 

Q 

PQ 

III  2|ii  _ 
ill  sig?  T 

li  i.i  n 

M        m     O     >H 

1 

(1 

■J 

^                      1 

1  ^ 

(^ 

I 

TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         193 

brane  upward.  Observe  the  mucous  membrane  and  Payer's 
patches  before  and  after  the  gut  has  been  drawn  through 
the  hand.  Spread  the  mesentery  out  upon  the  table  and 
incise  the  mesenteric  lymph-glands. 


Fig.  128. — Liver  properly  incised.     It  is  then  inverted  and  incisions  made  in  the  large  blood- 
vessels and  bile  ducts. 

Liver. — The  liver  is  separated  from  the  diaphragm 
when  these  structures  are  extirpated  together  and  laid  upon 
a  table  with  the  anterior  or  convex  side  upward.  The  thick- 
ness is  measured  by  placing  a  rule  in  a  vertical  position 

13 


Against  the  diaphragm, 
in  front  of  the  stomach. 

Comparatively  large. 

0.1-1.5  kg.  5  per  cent, 
body  weight. 

6-7  lobes.  Left  lateral, 
left  central,  right  cen- 
tral, right  lateral,  cau- 
date, papillary  and 
quadrate.    Edges  thin. 

Red. 

Firm. 

> 

s 

Against  diaphragm.  On 
right  side  back  to  13th 

•rib.  On  left  back  to  8th 
rib.  Ventrally  back  to 
umbilicus. 

Comparatively  large 

Ca  2  kg.  (ca  4.5  lbs.)  0.4 
per  cent,  body  weight. 

5    lobes,    caudate,    right 
lateral,     right     central, 
left  central,  left  lateral. 
Edges  thin. 

Grayish  red  due  to  exces- 
sive interstitial  connec- 
tive tissue.  Aciniplainly 
visible. 

Very  firm 

l-l 

i 

o 

s 

& 

1 

So 

|i 
111 

< 

Ca  0.5-0.7  kg.  (ca  1.5  lbs.) 

Two  principal  lobes  and 
prismatic  blunt  pointed 
caudate     lobe.       Edges 
thin. 

RprlHish   hrnwn 

a 

Q 

Against    the    diaphragm 
almost   entirely    to   the 
rightof  themedianplane 

Not  as  large  but  thicker 
than  that  of  horse. 

3-6  kg.  (ca  7-13  lbs.)  ca 
0.5  per  cent,  of  body 
weight. 

Caudate  lobe  only  one 
distinct. 

w 

Against     the     abdominal 
surface     of     diaphragm 
most  of  it  a  little  to  the 
rightof  themedianplane. 

10  cm.  (4")  above  abdom- 
inal floor  to  level  of  the 
kidney. 

Ca  5  kg.  (12  lbs).  In 
young  animals  it  is  6-8 
kg.  (ca  13-18  lbs.). 

3  lobes,  right,  left  and 
middle  which  slope 
smoothly  from  thick 
center  to  thin  edges.  No 
gall  bladder. 

RfidHiah   hrnwn 

1                 ' 

1      1 

c 

> 

.t 

t 

i 

i 

a 

TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS         195 

beside  the  organ  and  then  balancing  a  knife  in  a  horizontal 
position  upon  the  thickest  part  of  the  liver.  The  thickness 
in  centimetres  is  read  at  the  point  at  which  the  knife-blade 
meets  the  rule.  The  liver  is  then  cut  in  thin  sections  by 
making  long,  smooth  incisions  through  it  with  a  sharp  knife 
(Fig.  128) .  The  capsule  is  stripped  off  by  seizing  it  with 
the  thmnb-nail  at  the  margin  of  one  of  the  incisions.  By 
so  doing  one  may  determine  whether  an  acute  or  chronic 
process  be  present.  The  consistency  is  determined  by 
pressing  the  fingers  through  the  parenchyma.  The  organ 
is  inverted  and  the  gall-bladder,  when  present,  together 
with  the  bile-duct  should  be  opened  with  a  sharp-pointed 
scissors,  or  a  knife. 

The  factors  of  description  should  be  followed  closely  in 
dealing  with  the  liver.  If  the  organ  be  swollen  the  margins 
are  usually  rounded  instead  of  sharp.  When  degenerated 
the  consistency  is  friable  instead  of  firm  when  pressed  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  fingers.  In  chronic  processes  the  cap- 
sule is  adherent,  due  to  the  increase  of  interstitial  connec- 
tive tissue  which  attaches  to  the  capsule.  In  acute  cases 
exudate  and  degenerated  epithelium  tend  to  soften  and 
weaken  the  interstitial  connective  tissue  at  its  capsular 
attachment  so  that  it  strips  with  ease.  On  section  a  nutmeg 
appearance  is  commonly  seen  in  degenerative  processes,  and 
in  passive  congestion  blue  blood  is  contained  and  runs 
from  the  cut  surface.  Normally  the  liver  has  no  odor  but 
in  post-mortem  decomposition  it  is  present. 

Pancreas. — The  pancreas  is  not  frequently  the  seat 
of  pathological  alterations.  One  should  test  the  consistency 
of  the  organ  with  the  fingers  and  make  several  long  inci- 
sions through  it. 


ucts. 
num 

-2") 

^-g%" 

■^F.^ 

1 

-go^^ 

"■S  a  2  S^- 

is|l 

s 

-iJ|f|s 

.Srqs  a  > 

'_J   o  c^   O  M-   t-  • - 

K 

>                    Ctn 

I 

— 

ss 

«) 

t;s 

as 

5l,     1 

(^ 

o_5i 

i1 

ill    1 

dS 

^■^ 

u)£a        ^  ^ 

S 

H 

o  g  £         ^  £ 

g 

■i^   C3 

< 

3    ""         >-S 

% 

<< 

-►^                            1 

Ph 

3 

>j 

1 

43 

o 

0. 

;5 

't 

'S 

fe 

m 

03 

i2 

o 

■2 

1 

ClI) 

I 

< 

P 

w 

1 

^__ 

^*i   3   tc     • 

!l 

OC'^ 

•  o   C   o  t^ 

(1< 

|| 

ii 

S 

f'  o  o.-t: 

o 

Oj   o 

~^o 

go   3  0.^ 

S 

•2*^ 

d  1 

r  .^--s     ^ 

2 

O 

i 

■< 

O 

oa             Kta 

"3  a" 

bC 

72  So          :|" 

C  0 

si 

J 

e 
1 

6 

iljl     i 
?=!    II 

T3  0. 

!« 

oi  E  o  &  S             "  S  3 

< 

o 

OH                    «fe 

>> 

a 

m 

.2 

Mtt                    fe 

.2 

1 

2 

•|5                    |g     -§§1 

Ph 

ix 

^K 

a 

O 

C 

Oi 

TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS 


197 


Kidney. — To  prepare  the  kidney  of  a  large  animal 
place  the  organ  upon  the  table  on  one  of  its  flat  surfaces. 
Place  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  upon  the  kidney  and  press 
downward  with  sufficient  force  to  keep  the  organ  steady 
and  in  one  position.  The  ends  of  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand 
should  extend  away  from  the  autopsist  and  toward  the 
convex  margin  of  the  organ.    With  a  knife  held  horizon- 


FiG.  129. — Correct  position  of  hands,  knifp  and  kidney,  for  opening  that  organ,     \iewed  from 

above. 

tally  make  one  smooth  incision  through  the  kidney  from 
the  convex  margin  through  the  parenchyma  to  the  hilus, 
severing  the  kidney  in  halves  so  that  it  may  be  laid  open 
like  a  book  (Fig.  129).  Lay  the  organ  open,  wash  the 
cut  surfaces,  and  strip  the  capsule  with  the  thumb-nail 
(Fig.  130). 

The  kidney  of  small  animals  is  held  between  the  thumb 
and  fii'st  finger  of  the  left  hand  dorsal  side  upward.     To 


198  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

section  the  organ  cut  downward  from  the  dorsal  surface 
through  the  kidney  to  the  pelvis  of  the  organ,  dividing  it 
in  halves. 

Normally  the  capsule  is  smooth,  thin,  transparent,  and 
loosely  attached  to  the  parenchyma.  In  chronic  inflamma- 
tory processes  it  is  firmly  adherent  due  to  junction  with 
increased  interstitial  connective  tissue.  At  the  point  of 
separation,  in  stripping  the  capsule,  a  white  line  is  visible 


Fig.  130 — Kidney  opened  like  a  book  after  completing  the  incision  indicated  in  Fig.  129. 

and  a  crackling,  tearing  sound  is  heard  as  the  capsule  is 
pulled  from  the  intertubular  connective  tissue.  In  acute 
inflammatory  processes  the  capsule  strips  with  ease,  due  to 
softening  of  the  interstitial  connective  tissue  at  its  capsular 
attachments. 

After  stripping  the  capsule,  describe  the  cortex,  inter- 
mediate zone,  medulla,  and  pelvis.  Normally  the  cortex 
of  the  kidney  of  large  animals  may  very  faintly  show 
myriads  of  tiny,  round,  red  bodies  which  are  the  glomeruli. 
In  hyperemia  and  acute  inflammation  these  bodies  stand 


Bg 


<^5 
o  o  3 


?-^5 


=^.:3 


2333-! 


hcJCC 

11 


H]^'" 


°  C   P  »  (R 

=  3  s  g-g: 

,  S  '^  "^  !^ 


lg> 


o  '^ 


crop 

2.  w 
'"'S  3 
^^3 


Balp  a-g- 

<;  ^   ^   COC 


200  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

out  prominently,  larger  than  a  pin-head  all  over  the  cortex, 
which  also  shows  alternating  red  and  yellow  lines.  The  red 
lines  are  the  hypera^niic  blood-vessels  in  the  interstitial 
connective  tissue,  and  the  yellow  lines  the  degenerated  epi- 
thelium of  the  tubules.  The  intermediate  zone  is  dark  red, 
since  being  composed  of  great  numbers  of  arciform  blood- 
vessels the  zone  is  capable  of  containing  relatively  more 
blood  during  hyperajmia  of  the  kidney  and  therefore  ap- 
pears darker.  The  medulla  is  swollen,  dark  red  or  yellow, 
translucent,  and  striated  with  dark  red  lines  which  are 
dilated  blood-vessels.  In  acute  inflammatory  processes 
the  pelvis  may  show  slimy,  turbid,  mucopurulent  material. 
In  chronic  inflanmiatory  jjrocesses  the  cortex  may  show 
thick,  white  lines,  which  are  composed  of  increased  inter- 
stitial connective  tissue,  or  the  whole  cut  surface  may  be 
white  and  fibrous  and  the  capsule  white,  opaque,  and  pitted 
with  areas  which  become  depressed  by  contraction  of  the 
intertubular  connective  tissue  at  points  of  contact  with  the 
capsule. 

Adrenals. — The  adrenal  is  held  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  with  the  narrow  edge  upward.  The 
organ  is  divided  into  halves  by  cutting  downward  through 
the  narrow  edge.  The  adrenals  seldom  show  many  patho- 
logical changes.  They  undergo  degeneration  very  rapidly, 
in  which  condition  the  cortex  is  very  yellow  and  friable  or 
soft  and  the  medulla  is  soft  and  macerated.  In  the  horse 
the  surface  nearly  always  presents  oval  nodules  from  the 
size  of  a  pin-bead  to  that  of  a  pea.  These  are  hypernephro- 
mata  and  seldom  of  any  consequence. 

Vagina,  Uterus,  Ovaries,  and  Urinary  Bladder. — 
The  rectum  is  dissected  from  the  vagina  and  opened  with 
an  enterotome.     The  vagina,  uterus,  ovaries  and  bladder 


ooo 
S;  1' 
:  :  <5 

g 

1 

^ 

Position 

Size 

p 

3 

Anterior  inner  border  of 
kidneys. 

Ca  9-10  cm.  (3.6-4")  long. 

Ca  3-4   cm.    (1.2-1.6") 

wide.     Ca  1-5  cm.  (.4- 

2")  thick. 
Ca28-56  grams  (ca  1  -2 oz.) 
Elliptical,  flattened  on  the 

sides. 

Reddish  brown 

K 

a 

3 

Right    adrenal   has   deep 
notch  in  border  of  base. 
Left    adrenal    is    heart 
shaped. 

Right  adrenal  on  anterior 
inner    aspect    of    right 
kidney.       Left    adrenal 
on    inner    face    of  pos- 
terior   vena    cava,    two 
inches   anterior   to    left 
kidney. 

O 

3 

S 

1 

Right  adrenal  on  anterior 
inner    aspect    of    right 
kidney.       Left    adrenal 
across  left  renal  vein  not 
in  contact  with  the  kid- 
ney. 

Ca    3-4    cm.     (1.2-1.6") 
long.     Ca  1-2  cm.   (.4- 
.8")  wide. 

M 

m 
f 

Id- 

t3                         > 

'           II 

3 

i 

3 

>< 

? 

. 

a                      3 

r-. 

20a 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


are  laid  out  on  the  table  with  the  dorsal  aspect  upward,  as 
they  would  appear,  as  nearly  as  possible,  in  the  standing 
animal.    Pass  an  enterotome  into  the  vagina  and  cut  along 


Vagina 


131. — Vagina,  u.  bladder,  body  os,  and  right  horn  of  the  uterus  and  right  ovary  opened, 
left  horn  and  ovary  not  opened. 


the  median  line  through  the  dorsal  wall  to  the  cervix.  In- 
sert the  probe  end  of  the  enterotome  into  the  cervix,  incise 
it  and  cut  through  the  dorsal  wall  of  the  uterus.    Lay  open 


Consistency . 

Odor 

Contents...  . 

Weight 

Shape 

Color 

I 

Attached  to  lumbar  wall 
of  abdomen  and  lateral 
walls  of  pelvis  by  broad 
ligaments. 

Body   15   cm.    (6")    long. 
10  cm.  (4")  thick.     Non 
gravid     horns    25     cm. 
(10")      long.        Gravid 
horns   80-90   cm.    (32"- 
36")  long.    Cervix  5  cm. 
(2")  long,  4  cm.  (Ca  1.5 
thick.     Non  gravid  wall 
4  mm.,  gravid  4.5  mm. 
thick. 

Non  gravid  1-1  M  kg.  (2.2 
lbs.)      Gravid  4  kg.  (8.8 
lbs.) 

Cylindrical  body  branch- 
ing  anteriorily  to  form 
two     cylindrical     horns 
like    letter    Y.      Horns 
blunt. 

Serosa   white    and   shiny. 
Muscularis  pink.     Mu- 
cosa brownish  red  except 
neck  which  is  pale. 

Serosa  tough.  Muscularis 
firm.     Mucosa  soft. 

\ 

Almost     entirely     within 
abdomen. 

Body  ca  2-3  cm.  (1-1.5") 
long.    In  young  animals 
walls     5     mm.      thick. 
Gravid     walls    8     mm. 
thick.      Non    gravid    2 
mm.   thick.     Cervix  ca 
8-10   cm.    (3-4")    long. 
Ca  2  cm.  thick. 

Gravid  9  kg.  (ca  20  lbs.) 

Body  cylindrical  and  pre- 
sents 2  cylindrical  horns 
which  curve  downward, 
forward,     inward,     and 
upward    and    taper    at 
ends.     Mucosa  presents 
80-130     cotyledons     in 
rows.       Cotyledons    in 
non  gravid  uterus  ca  IS- 
IS mm.  long,  ca  8  mm. 
wide,  ca  2-4  mm.  thick. 
In  gravid  uterus  10-12 
cm.  (4-5")  long,  3-4  cm. 
(ca  1.2-1.5")  wide,  2-3 
cm.      (.8-1.2")      thick. 
Covered  by  crypts. 
Serosa  pale  gray  or  white. 
Muscularis  pink.     Mu- 
cosa reddish  pink. 

Serosa  tough.  Muscularis 
firm.     Mucosa  soft. 

9 

No    intravaginal    projec- 
tion or  08  uteri.     Neck 
long.         Body       short. 
Horns  very  long,  flexu- 
ous and  taper  at  ends. 
All  cylindrical. 

Serosa  white.  Muscularis 
pink.     Mucosa  pink. 

Serosa  tougTi.  Muscularis 
firm.     Mucosa  soft. 
Folded  transversely. 

Body  ca  5  cm.  (2")  long. 
Horns    very    long    and 
flexuous.      Gravid   wall 
1.5   mm.    thick.      Neck 
ca    15-20    cm.    (6-8") 
long. 

V 

^ 
^ 

Pi 

|| 

5- 

Body  and  horns  cylindri- 
cal.     Horns  form   a   V 
extending    toward    the 
kidneys.    Gravid  uterus 
shows  dilatations  or  am- 
pullae of  horns. 

body  weight. 

Body  and  horns  cylin- 
drical.    Mucous  mem- 
brane     shows     88-96 
cotyledons.    4  rows  of 
11-12  in  each  row. 

Samfi. 

thick. 

< 

3 
3 

1 

204 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


the  uterine  horns  in  the  same  manner  and  cut  the  ovaries 
in  halves,  following  the  technic  applied  to  the  kidneys  of 
small  animals.  The  Fallopian  tubes  may  be  opened  with 
a  sharp-pointed  scissors.  After  examination  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  vagina  pass  the  probe  end  of  an  enterotome 
into  the  urinary  meatus  and  open  the  urethra  and  urinary 
bladder.  The  ureters  may  be  opened  with  a  sharp-pointed 
scissors  (Fig.  131). 

Brief  Descriptive  Table  of  Normal  Ovary 


Factors 

Mare 

Cow 

Sow 

Bitch 

Position 

Sublumbar  region  ca  10 

Alittle  above  the 

Same    as    in 

In  contact  with  pos- 

cm. (4")  back  of  cor- 

middle   of    the 

cow. 

terior  pole  of  cor- 

responding     kidney 
and  5  cm.  (2")    from 

lateral  margin  of 
pelvic  inlet.    Ca 

responding  kidney. 

corresponding  horn  of 

40-45  cm.   (16- 

uterus. 

17")  from  vulva 
in  medium  size 
cow. 

Size 

In  old  animals  ca  7-8 
cm.      (2.5-3")     long. 

Ca  3-4  cm.  (1.2- 
1.6")  long.    Ca 

Pea  to  pecan  size. 

Ca3-4cm.  (1.2-l.G") 

2     cm.       (0.8") 

thick.         Larger      in 

thick. 

young  animals. 

VTeight 

40-80   grams,    (ca  1.5- 
3  oz.) 

Ca    15-20   grams 
(0.5-0.75  oz.) 

Shape 

Bean  shape 

Oval.    Pointed  at 
uterine  end. 

Mulberry  like. 

Oval,  elongated  and 
flattened.    Surface 
may    show    round 
elevations  due   to 
projection  of  Graf- 
fian follicles. 

Color 

White  or  gray 

White 

White 

White  or  yellow. 

Consistency  . 
Odor 

Firm 

Firm 

Firm 

Firm. 

Contents 

.  Graffian  follicles  as  ves- 

Various size  fol- 

Numerous 

On    section   numer- 

icles up  to  1  cm.  (0.4") 

licles   and  cor- 

Graffian fol- 

ous round  corpora 

in  diameter  near  and 

pora    lutea    o  r 

licles  project 

lutea  may  be  seen 

protruding   from   the 

yellow  bodies. 

from  surface 

at  periphery. 

surface.      Corpus   ru- 

producing 

brum,  blood  clot  filling 

mulberry 

ruptured  Graffian  fol- 
licle.    Corpus  luteum 

shape. 

of  pregnancy  is  yellow 

due     to     prohferated 

transformed      follicle 

cells   replacing   blood 

clot  in  ruptured  folli- 

cle.    Corpus  albicans 

is    a    scar    which    re- 

places corpus  luteum 

if   impregnation   does 

not  take  place. 

Udder  of  the  Cow. — After  the  udder  has  been  dis- 
sected from  the  cadaver  a  longitudinal  incision  is  made 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS        205 

on  the  median  line  between  the  two  divisions  of  the  udder, 
from  the  base  downward  completely  dividing  the  organ  into 
two  lateral  halves  (Fig.  132) .  Each  half  is  then  laid  upon 
its  median  surface,  teats  toward  the  autopsist.  It  is  then 
divided  longitudinally  by  cutting  horizontally  from  the 
base  through  the  parenchyma,  milk  cistern,  and  teat  canals 


^. 


/    \ 


f 


Fig.  132. — The  udder  di\'ided  into  its   two    lateral    halves.     Part   of  tissue   out   away  to 
expose  supramammary  lymph  glands.    The  left  half  is  to  the  left  and  the  right  half  to  the  right. 

toward  the  obducent  so  that  each  half  may  be  laid  open  like 
a  book.  Thus,  when  the  left  half  is  laid  open  toward  the 
autoj)sist,  the  left  ariterior  quarter  is  toward  the  left,  and 
left  postenor  quarter  toward  the  right.  When  the  right 
half  is  opened  the  right  anterior  quarter  is  toward  the  right 
and  the  right  posterior  quarter  toward  the  left  (Fig.  133). 
Each    supramammary    lymph-gland    is    severed    longitu- 


206  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

dinally.  One  is  almond  size  and  lies  slightly  anterior 
to  the  other.  The  second  is  approximately  7X5X1  cm. 
(Sven  Wall). 

The  incision  of  the  udder  under  physiological  conditions 


.  I^i^,  133. — The  left  half  of  the  udder  is  toward  the  left  and  the  right  half  toward  the 
"u^  ■•  u  ^■''d  ^'^^^  shows  the  left  anterior  quarter  toward  the  left,  left  posterior  quarter  toward 
the  right  with  small  piece  of  its  tissue  removed  to  expose  left  supramammary  lymph  gland. 
The  right  half  shows  right  anterior  quarter  toward  the  right  and  right  posterior  quarter  toward 
^^  u  j^'*  i.^f'?^''i"-5"'^''  of  its  tissue  removed  to  expose  right  supramammary  lymph  gland. 
Each  udder-half  is  laid  open  like  a  book  exposing  cut  surface  of  parenchyma  and  milk  cisterns. 
Before  opemng,  each  half  is  laid  with  its  median  surface  downward  upon  the  table,  lateral  sur- 
face upward,  abdominal  margin  distal  and  teats  proximal  to  the  autopsist 

is  more  or  less  succulent,  as  milk  appears  upon  section.  The 
cut-surface  of  the  udder  bulges  so  that  it  is  convex.  It 
shows  a  fine  network  of  connective  tissue,  which,  like  a  very 
fine,  thin,  framework,  surrounds  an  indefinite  number  of 
lentil  to  pea  size,  rounded,  delicate  lobulae  in  which  the  milk 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  CF  ORGANS        207 

filled  tubule  are  just  barely  visible  as  minute,  white  milk 
points.  During  the  lactation  period  the  lobulee  are  grayish 
white  and  during  the  dry  period  yellow.    The  consistency 


Fig    134. — Showing  urethra,  bladder,  seminal  vesicles,  etc.,  Itdd  open. 

is  soft  and  elastic  on  pressure  but  very  tough  and  resistant 
to  tearing.  The  cisterns  and  the  teat  canals  contain  more 
or  less  milk  and  the  mucous  membranes  are  white  and  uni- 
form (SvenWall). 


208 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


Penis,  Seminal  Vesicles,  Cowper's  and  Prostate 
Glands,  Urinary  Bladder,  and  Testicles. — The  rec- 
tum which  is  removed  from  the  pelvic  cavity  with  the 
genitals  is  dissected  free  and  laid  open  with  an  enterotome. 
The  penis  and  adjacent  structures  are  laid  upon  the  table 
ventral  side  upward.     The  prepuce  is  cut  away  from  the 


Ejaculatory  ducts 


Ducts  of 
urethral  glands 

Ducts  of 
Cowper's  glands 


Ureteral  orifices 

Prostate 

Prostatic  ducts 

Cowper's  gland 

Ducts  of 
urethral  glands 


Fig.  135 — Urethra,  bladder,  seminal  vesicles  and  vasa  deferentia  laid  open,  showing  orifices 
of  gLinds,  etc. 


penis  and  laid  open.  The  probe  end  of  the  enterotome  is 
inserted  in  the  urethral  opening  of  the  penis  and  passed 
backward  through  the  ventral  wall  of  the  urethra  to  the 
end  of  the  organ,  and  continued  through  the  wall  of  the 
urinary  bladder.  The  openings  of  the  seminal  vesicles  of 
the  horse  may  be  easily  located  and  these  structures  opened 
with  an  enterotome.  The  prostate  and  Cowper's  glands 
are  small  in  the  gelding.    In  canines  the  prostates  are  well 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS 


209 


developed  and  in  old  dogs  are  sometimes  very  large.  The 
testicles  should  be  severed  in  halves,  following  technic  simi- 
lar to  that  of  the  kidney  (Figs.  134,  135) . 

Brief  Descriptive  Table   of  Normal  Testicles 


Factors 

Horse 

Ox 

Pig 

Dog 

Position 

Size   .. 

In  scrotum  in  inguinal 
region.        Long     axis 
nearly      longitudinal. 
Epididymis     overlaps 
external     surface     of 
anterior  dorsal  border. 

Ca  10-12  cm.  (4-5") 
long.  Ca6-7cm.  (2.5 
-2.8")  high.  Ca  4-5 
cm.   (1.6-2")  wide. 

Ca  300  grams  (10.5  oz.) 
Sisson.  Left  160 
grams  (5.5  oz.),  right 
140  grams  (5  oz.) 
Schmey. 

Ovoid 

Gray 

In  scrotum  further 
forward,    in    in- 
guinal      region, 
than  in  the  horse. 
Long    axis    ver- 
ticle. 

Ca  10-17  cm.  (4- 
6.8")  long.  Ca 
6-9  cm.  (ca  2.5- 
3.6"). 

Ca  250-500  grams 
(8.8-17.6  oz.). 

Oval          

On  posterior 
aspect  of 
body  close  to 
the  anus  in 
scrotum 
not  sharply 
defined. 

Very  large. .  . 

Ovoid 

Gray 

Posterior    aspect    of 
the  body  half  way 
between  anus  and 
inguinal  region. 
(No   seminal  vesi- 
cles in  dog). 

Relatively  small. 
Round  or  oval. 

Weight 

Shape 

Color     

Pale  yellow 

Gray. 

Firm 

Soft 

Odor 

Contents  .  . 

Brain  and  Meninges. — After  the  brain  has  been  re- 
moved it  is  placed  upon  a  table  with  the  dorsal  side  upward, 

Table  of  Weights  of  Normal  Brain 

Weight:  Horse  Ca  650'grammes  =0.12  per  cent,  of  body  weight. 
Ox  Ca  280  grammes  =0.096  per  cent,  of  body  weight. 
Swine  Ca  120  grammes  =0.1  per  cent,  of  body  weight. 
Sheep  Ca  120  grammes  =0.17  per  cent,  of  body  weight. 
Goat    Ca  130  grammes  =0.26     per  cent,  of  body  weight. 

C  Martin) 


Absolute  weight 

Relation  to  body 
weight 

Relation  of  cord 
to  brain 

Horse    517-770  grammes 
Ass        334-392  grammes 
Ox          490-530  grammes 
Sheep    109-143  grammes 
Goat      124-130  grammes 
Swine      98-162  grammes 
Dog         54-180  grammes 
Cat          21-  35  grammes 
Rabbit      8-  14  grammes 

1  :  400-700 
1  :  250-450 
1  :  600-770 
1  :  130-400 
1  :  130-300 
1  :  162-970 
1  :     25-350 
1  :     22-180 
1  :  110-440 

1  :  2.27 
1  :  2.4 
1  :  2.3 
1  :  2.18 
1  :  2.6 
1  :  2.6 
1  :  5.14 
1  :  3.75 
1  :  2 
Ellenberger  and 
Baum. 

medulla  oblongata  extending  toward  the  autopsist  and  the 
olfactory  lobes  extending  in  the  opposite  direction.    Spread 
the  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum  slightly  apart  and  with  a 
14 


210 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


sharp  brain  knife  make  a  longitudinal  incision  in  the  inner 
side  of  each  hemisphere  (Fig.  136).  Lay  open  the  lateral 
ventricles  and  expose  the  choroid  plexus,  caudate  nucleus, 
and  hippocampus.     The  next  incision  is  made  downward 


Fig.  136. — The  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum  are  slightly  spread  apart  and  two  longi- 
tudinal incisions  made  through  the  corpus  callosum  into  the  lateral  ventricles.  A  longitudinal 
median  incision  is  made  through  the  cerebellum  into  the  fourth  ventricle.  The  olfactory  bulbs 
are  incised  laterally. 

on  the  median  line  between  the  hemispheres  of  the  cere- 
brum and  through  the  centre  of  the  cerebellum,  dividing  the 
entire  brain  in  halves.  After  examination  of  these  struc- 
tures in  cross  section,  make  transverse  incisions  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  apart  through  each  hemisphere  of  the  cerebrum, 
and  inspect  the  cut  surfaces  (Fig.  137). 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS        211 

Spinal  Cord  and  Meninges. — The  cord  is  laid  upon 
the  table  dorsal  surface  upward  and  the  meninges  incised 
with  a  sharp-pointed  scissors  along  the  entire  length  of  the 
structure.    Transverse  incisions  a  quarter  of  an  inch  apart 


Choroid  plexus  of 
fourth  ventricle 
Fourth  ventricle 

Cerebellum 


Choroid  plexus  of 
lateral  ventricle 


Caudate  nucleus 


Fig.    137. — The  lateral  and  fourth  ventricles  opened,   corpus  callosum   and  septum  pellucidum 
removed  and  hemispheres  of  cerebrum  incised. 

are  made  through  the  cord  from  the  anterior  to  the  pos- 
terior end  and  the  cross  sections  examined  (Fig.  138). 

Eye. — After  enucleation  of  the  eye  grasp  that  organ 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger.  Place  the  thumb  in 
the  cornea  opposite  the  pupil  and  the  finger  over  the  stump 
of  the  optic  nerve  (Fig.  139).  With  a  sharp-pointed 
scissors  cut  through  the  wall  of  the  eyeball,  following  the 


212  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


ES 


li 


•go 
2^ 


S 


TECHNIC  AND  DESCRIPTION  OF  ORGANS 


213 


equator  (Fig.  140).  Next  remove  the  lens  and,  with  the 
organ  thus  prepared,  the  several  internal  structures  may 
be  examined. 

Ear. — When  parts  of  the 
tympanic  and  petrous  portion 
of  the  temporal  bone  have  been 
removed,  the  oblong  piece  of 
bone  should  be  placed  upon  a 
solid  block  of  wood  so  that  the 
external  auditory  meatus 
appears  upward.  Have  an 
assistant  hold  the  bone  in  place 
with  a  strong  iron  pinchers. 
Place  the  cutting  edge  of  a 
chisel  over  the  external  auditory 
meatus  and  strike  sharply  upon 

the  head  of  the  chisel.  This  process  will  sever  the  bone  in 
such  manner  as  to  expose  the  several  parts  of  the  middle  and 


Fig.  139. — Position  of  hands,  scissors, 
and  eye  in  opening   the   latter  on  its 


Fig.  140. — Equatorial  line  of  in- 
cision for  opening  the  eye.  Stump 
of  optic  nerve  and  cornea  over  the 
pupil  used  as  poles. 


Fig.  141. — Meinbrana  tympani 
and  manubrium  of  malleus  after 
splitting  the  petrous  temporal 
bone. 


internal  ear.    The  drum  and  the  ossicles  may  be  removed 
with  forceps,  needle,  scissors  and  scalpel  (Fig.  141). 


CHAPTER  XI 
POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT 

Definition. — A  post-mortem  protocol  is  a  detailed 
written  description  of  the  post-mortem  findings.  It  may  be 
entered  as  a  permanent  record  in  a  book  kept  for  that 
purpose,  loose  leaf  or  card  index  systems,  or  prepared  as 
a  communication  suitable  for  mailing.  In  the  latter  case  it 
should  be  headed  as  a  letter  and  have  the  autopsist's  signa- 
ture affixed.  The  protocol  should  consist  of  five  parts,  i.e., 
pre-autopsy  data,  external  examination,  internal  examina- 
tion, pathologic-anatomical  diagnosis  and  epicrisis. 

A  post-mortem  report  is  a  brief  extract  of  a  protocol 
and  usually  consists  only  of  the  pathologic-anatomical  diag- 
nosis and  the  cause  of  death,  together  with  the  clinical  case 
and  autopsy  numbers  (Fig.  142).  When  called  upon  to 
render  a  medicolegal  post-mortem  report,  one  should  be 
very  brief  to  prevent  confusion  of  the  jurors  with  a  mass 
of  technical  terms,  yet  one  must  be  very  thoroughly  pre- 
pared on  everjr  angle  of  the  case  at  hand  and  permit  the 
detailed  information  to  be  drawn  out  through  interrogation 
by  the  lawyers.  One  should  state  that  he  had  made  an 
autopsy  on  the  cadaver  of  a  certain  animal,  giving  its 
description  and  the  owner's  name,  and  found  death  to  be 
due  to  a  certain  condition,  as,  for  example,  shock  and 
intoxication  following  rupture  of  the  stomach. 

Pre-autopsy  Data. — This  should  include  all  infor- 
mation that  may  in  any  way  pertain  to  the  autopsy.  The 
ante-mortem  changes  or  clinical  aspect,  mode  of  termina- 
tion, happenings  between  the  time  of  death  and  the  time 

214 


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT 


215 


o  c 

>  u. 

I-  o 

£  i 

>  a 


e 
S 

I  I 


< 

2 
<     bi 

^  e 
11 

Q-   i 


c 

' 

\ 

\ 
I 

i 
■    1 

5      .2 


II 


.1  i 


i 
I  ^ 

s   J 

II 


II      a 


.1 

z  3 


I     JU 


216  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

of  autopsy,  description  of  cadaver,  time,  place,  date, 
weather,  and  position  of  cadaver  at  the  time  of  death  and 
at  the  time  of  autopsy,  are  necessary  to  facilitate  judgment 
of  conditions  which  may  be  found  post  mortem,  as  well  as 
the  name  and  address  of  every  one  who  may  be  in  any  way 
connected  with  the  necropsy,  as  it  may  be  necessarj^  to 
communicate  with  one  or  all  of  them  after  the  examination. 

External  Examination. — An  examination  of  the 
cadaver's  exterior  is  made  before  any  part  is  incised.  It 
consists  of  close  inspection  of  the  natural  openings,  visible 
mucous  membranes,  extremities  and  skin  for  signs  of  death, 
post-mortem  decomposition  or  pathologic  conditions  which 
may  serve  as  a  guide  to  internal  morbid  processes. 

Internal  Examination. — The  internal  examination 
consists  of  a  careful  description  of  each  organ  or  part  in 
terms  that  can  be  readily  understood  by  those  who  are  not 
veterinarians.  The  description  should  include  considera- 
tion of  the  position,  size,  weight,  shape,  color,  odor,  con- 
sistency, incision,  incision  fluid,  contents  and  cut  surface 
of  the  various  structures.  One  should  avoid  use  of  the  word 
normal  as  two  men  might  not  agree  on  that  which  is  normal 
and  abnormal.  He  should  not  attempt  to  describe  by  volun- 
teering his  opinion  of  the  process  under  consideration  as  in 
the  use  of  such  terms  as  hemorrhagic,  degenerated,  in- 
flamed, pneumonic,  necrotic,  etc.  They  are  diagnostic,  not 
descriptive,  and  do  not  constitute  exact  pathologic  data 
except  in  proportion  to  the  efficiency  of  the  autopsist  as  a 
pathologist.  Use  of  the  descriptive  factors,  position,  size, 
weight,  shape,  color,  odor,  consistency  incision,  incision 
fluid,  contents  and  cut  surface,  however,  creates  a  word 
picture  from  which  another  pathologist  may  diagnose  the 
condition  without  knowing  the  opinion  of  the  autopsist. 


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT  217 

This  practice  makes  one  a  keen  observer,  while  the  use  of 
the  word  normal  causes  one  to  become  careless  and  to  slight 
the  work.  One  cannot  apply  all  the  factors  of  description 
to  every  structure,  but  in  describing  such  parts  one  should 
consider  them  and  select  those  most  suitable.  The  internal 
examination  should  include  a  description,  not  only  of  the 
thoracic  and  abdominal  organs,  but  all  those  structures 
under  the  skin  which  cannot  be  examined  externally  or 
without  incising  the  integument. 

.  Pathologic-anatomical  Diagnosis. — The  patho- 
logic-anatomical diagnosis  should  consist  of  a  summary 
of  the  descriptions  of  the  external  and  internal  examina- 
tions arranged  in  list  form  and  composed  of  specific  diag- 
nostic terms.  These  diagnoses  of  the  pathology  of  each 
anatomic  part  should  follow  in  the  same  order  in  which  the 
organs  were  described.  Thus,  having  finished  the  de- 
tailed descriptions,  one  reviews  that  of  the  first  organ 
or  part  and  determines  whether  it  be  intact  or  diseased. 
If  normal  nothing  is  placed  in  the  pathologic-anatomical 
diagnosis ;  if  a  morbid  process  be  present  the  proper  diag- 
nostic term  which  signifies  that  pathologic  condition,  as 
acute  catarr'hal  rhinitis,  is  placed  on  the  first  line  of  the 
pathologic-anatomical  diagnosis  at  the  left  hand  mar- 
gin. Then  the  next  organ  described  is  considered  and  the 
proper  diagnostic  term  is  placed  on  the  second  line  at  the 
left  margin  immediately  below  the  first  pathologic-anatomi- 
cal diagnosis,  and  so  on  until  the  summary,  free  from  de- 
scriptive or  explanatory  terms,  is  complete  and  arranged 
as  a  concise  list  of  all  the  morbid  processes  present. 

Epicrisis. — Up  to  the  present  point  the  post-mortem 
protocol  is  a  chronicled  statement  of  facts  as  free  as  pos- 
sible from  the  element  of  personal  equation.    The  epicrisis 


218  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

is  the  autopsist's  personal  written  opinion  of  the  entire  case. 
In  paragraph  form  he  states  his  opinion  as  to  the  primary 
lesion,  its  cause  and  development,  the  secondary  and  ter- 
tiary lesions  and  their  occm-rence  and  relationship  to  the 
primary  lesion,  and  the  entire  animal  economy.  The  epi- 
crisis  is  in  fact  the  autopsist's  idea  of  the  pathogenesis  of  .the 
case  and  the  cause  of  death,  together  with  a  statement  con- 
cerning the  importance  of  certain  possibly  co-existing 
lesions  which  have  little  or  no  relation  to  that  chain  of  lesions 
which  led  to  the  animal's  death. 

Advantage  of  Construction. — This  construction  en- 
ables the  recipient  of  the  protocol  or  examiner  of  the  post- 
mortem record  to  diagnose  the  morbid  processes  from  the 
descriptions  in  the  external  and  internal  examinations. 
These  he  may  check  against  those  of  the  autopsist  as  found 
in  the  pathologic-anatomical  diagnosis.  Then  he  may  again 
check  the  autopsist  in  his  epicrisis. 

Suggestions  on  Protocol. — The  following  outline  for 
a  post-mortem  protocol  may  be  followed  when  writing 
autopsies  in  permanent  bound  record  books.  It  may  be 
printed  on  loose  leaves  as  a  form  to  be  filled  in  and  filed  in 
a  loose  leaf  system.  It  may  also  be  printed  on  the  left 
hand  margin  of  as  many  fairly  wide  sheets  as  necessary 
in  order  to  leave  one  or  more  empty  lines  after  each  head 
and  subhead.  These  sheets  may  be  fastened  together,  form- 
ing a  booklet  containing  a  complete  post-mortem  protocol 
outline,  which  should  be  used  by  students  in  special 
pathology. 


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT 


219 


Dear  Sir: 

I  have  the  honor  to  submit  the  following  post-mortem  protocol. 

Pre-autopsy  Data 


Autopsy:  Tag  No 

Authority     Clinic  No 

Autopsist Clinical  History: 


Assistant    

Witnesses 

Time    

Place    

Date 

Position  of  cadaver    .  .  . 

Weather 

Autopsy  No 

Owner: 

Name 

Address    

Description    of   Animal: 

Species     

Breed 

Sex     

Age    

Color    

Markings     

Size    

Weight     


Clinical  Diagnosis: 
Treatment: 
Mode  of  Death: 
If  died: 

Time    

Place    

Date     

Description  of  agonal  stage. 

Position  after  death 

Weather     

If  destroyed: 

Authority     

Destroyer    

Witnesses    

Method    

Time    

Plaee     

Date     

Position  before 

Position  after 


220 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


External  Examination 

Natural  openings   Skin  in  general  . . 

Visible  mucous  membranes Skin  in  region  of: 


Eyes     

Condition  of  nutrition 

Rigor  mortis 

Abdomen    

Mammary  gland 

Legs     

Feet 

Hair     


Head  .  .  , 
Neck  .  .  , 
Thorax  .  , 
Abdomen 
Back  .  .  . 
Legs  .  . 
Tail    .  .  .  , 


Internal  Examination 


Abdominal  cavity: 

Foreign  matter 

Position  of  diaphragm 
Position  of  organs    .  .  . 


Thoracic  cavity: 

Foreign  matter   .  .  . 
Position  of  organs 


Respiratory  System 

Nasal  passages:  Lungs: 

Sinuses     Weight     

Septum    Shape     

Turbinated  bones    Color    

Ethmoidal   cells    Consistency 

Lachrymal   duct    Odor     

Mucous  membranes    Incision   

Guttural  pouches    Contents     

Pharynx     Incision    fluid    

Larynx    Cut  surface 

Trachea   Pleura    

Bronchi    Mediastinum    

Lunge:  Bronchial   lymph-glands    . 

Position    INIediastinal    lymph-glands 

Size:  Diaphragm    

Inspiration     

Expiration 


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT 


221 


Blood-vascular  System 

Pericardium     Iliac  arteries 

Pericardial    fluid    Anterior  mesenteric  arteries 

Heart:  Other  arteries 

Position Vena  cava  and  branches    .  .  . 

Size    Blood 

Weight     Bone-marrow     


Shape     

Color    

Consistency 

Odor     

Contents     

Incision    

Incision    fluid    

Cut  surface 

Tricuspid  valves  .... 
Bicuspid  valves  .... 
Pulmonary  valves   .  .  . 

Aortic   valves    

Parietal    endocardium 

Columnae    carnae    .... 

Aorta   


Spleen : 

Position 

Size    

Weight     

Shape     

Color    

Consistency   .  .  . 

Odor     

Incision    

Incision    fluid    . 
Cut    surface    .  . 

Capsule    

Pulp 

Malpighian  bodi 
Trabecule    .... 


Lymphatic  System 
Receptaculum  chyli    Lymph-glands : 


Thoracic  duct 

Other   lymph-vessels    

Organ    lymph-glands   usually    dt 

scribed  with  organs : 
Lymph-glands : 

Submaxillary     

Subparotid     

Retropharyngeal     


Atlantal 

Anterior   cervical 
Middle   cervical 


Superficial  cervical  or  prescap- 
ular    

Posterior  cervical  or  prepec- 
toral   

Intercostal     

Sternal     

Anterior   mediastinal    

Brochial     

Posterior  mediastinal 

Axillary     

Lumbar    


222 


VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 


Lymph-glands :  Lymph-glands : 

Renal Gastric     .  .  . 

Internal   iliac    Hepatic    .  .  . 

External  iliac Cceliac    .... 

Superficial    inguinal    or    supra-  Mesenteric 

mammary     Precrural     . 

Ischiatic     Popliteal    .  . 

Anal     

Digestive  System 

Mouth :  Intestines : 

Hard   palate    Large  colon 

Soft  palate   Small  colon 

Posterior  nares Rectum    .  .  . 

Lips Liver : 


Cheeks 

Gums    

Teeth 

Tongue     

Tonsils     

Salivary  ducts 

Salivary   glands: 

Parotid    

Submaxillary     

Sublinguial    

(Esophagus    

Stomach 

Rumen 

Reticulum    Gall-bladder 

Omasum     Bile-duct    .  . 

Abomasum     ;      Pancreas    .  . 

Intestines:  Omentum  .  . 

Small  intestines    Mesentery    . 

Caecum Peritoneum 

Uro-genital  System 
Kidney :  Kidney : 

Position    Weight  .  . 

Size    Shape    .  . 


Position    

Size    

Weight 

Shape     

Color    

Consistency 

Odor     

Incision    

Incision    fluid    

Contents     

Cut   surface    

Capsule    

Hepatic   lymph-gland 


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT  223 

Kidney :  Uterus : 

Color    Color    

Consistency     Consistency     

Odor Odor     

Incision    Incision    

Incision    fluid    Incision    fluid    

Contents     Contents     

Cut  surface Cotyledons     

Capsule    Mucous  membrane    

Cortex    ,,,,=  .....      Vagina     

Intermediate    zone    Vulva 

Medulla Mammary    gland    

Pelvis , Supramammary  lymph-gland    .  .  . 

Perirenal   fat    Teats     

Renal   lymph-gland    Cowper's   glands    ' 

Ureters     ,  .  , Prostate  glands     

Urinary  bladder Seminal  vesicles    

Ovaries    Spermatic  cord 

Fallopian    tubes    Inguinal  canal    

Uterus :  Umbilicus    

Position    Testicles     

Size    Scrotum      

Weight     Penis    

Shape     Prepuce    


Cerebrospinal  System 

Brain :  Brain : 

Position   Incision   fluid    .  . 

Size    Cut    surface.   .  .  . 

Weight    Various  parts    .  . 

Shape Cerebral  meninges 

Color    Spinal  cord 

Consistency     Spinal  fluid 

Odor     Spinal  meninges   .  . 

Contents     Peripheral  nerves   . 

Incision    


224  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Organs  of  Sight  and  Hearing 

Eyes :  Eyes : 

Palpebrae  or  eyelids :  Lens    

Superior Vitreous  body 

Inferior    Retina    

Tertia    Optic   papilla    

Conjunctiva     Choroid    coat    

Cornea     Optic  nerve 

Sclera     

Aqueous  humor Ear : 

Iris     Auricula     

Granula    iridis    External  auditory  canal 

Pupil    Middle  ear    , 

Ciliary  muscles     Internal   ear    


Ductless  Glands 

Thymus    Pituitary 

Thyroid Pineal    . 

Parathyroid     Adrenal 


Bones,  Muscles  and  Accessory  Structures 

Subcutaneous  connective  tissue    .  .       Hoof: 

Intermuscular  connective  tissue .  .  Wall     ,  .  .  • 

Muscles    Periople 

Fascia    Coronary  band    

Tendons    Horny    laminae    

Bursae    Fleshy   laminae    

Tendon    sheatha    or    vagina    ten-  Sole    

dinis Frog     

Joints     Lateral    cartilages    

Bones Museum  specimens  and  numbers , 

Histologic    specimens    and    num 
bers    


POST-MORTEM  PROTOCOL  AND  REPORT  225 

PATIIOLOGIC-ANATOMICAIi    DIAGNOSIS 

1.  14. 

2.  15. 

3.  16. 

4.  17. 

5.  18. 

6.  19. 


20. 


8.  21. 

9.  22. 

10.  23. 

11.  24. 

12.  25. 

13.  26. 

Epicrisis 


Signature. 

Literature  Used 

Kitt:  Pathologische  Anatomic  der  Haustiere. 

Kitt:  Die  anatomische  Untersuchung  des  Gehirns  unserer  Haustiere. 

Schmey:  Sectionstechnik  der  Haustiere. 

Cattell:  Post-mortem  Pathology. 

Czokor:  Lehrbuch  der  gerichtlichen  Tierheilkunde. 

Dexler:     Zur     Praparationstechnik    der    Organe    des    Zentralnerven 

systems. 
Zsckokke  :  Sektionstechnik  und  Protokoll. 
Buch:  Praktikum  der  pathologischen  Anatomic 
Stoss:  Anleitung  zu  den  Sektionen  und  Praparierubungen  an  unsercn 

Haustieren, 
Nauwerck:  Sektionstechnik. 


226  VETERINARY  POST-MORTEM  TECHNIC 

Orth  :  Pathologisch-anatomische  Diagnostik. 

Clement,  A.  W. :  Veterinary  Post-mortem  Examinations. 

Busse:  Das  Sektions-Protokoll. 

ViRCHOw:  Die  Sectionsteclmik  im  Leichenhause  des  Charite  Kranken- 

hauses. 
Frank  :    Die  Vornahme  von  Sektionen  bei  unseren  Haustieren,  insbeson- 

dere  bei  Pferden. 
Sisson:  Veterinary  Anatomy. 

Ellenberger  und  Baum:  Vergleichende  Anatomic  der  Haustiere. 
Chauveau:  Comparative  Anatomy  of  the  Domesticated  Animals. 
Leisering  und  ]Muller:  Vergleichende  Anatomic  der  Haustiere. 
Smith,  F.  :  A  Manual  of  Veterinary  Physiology. 
Mohler  and  Eichhorn:  A  Text-Book  of  Meat  Inspection  by  Edel- 

mann. 
Pickens:  Report  of  the  'Sew  York  State  Veterinary  College  at  Cornell 

University,  1914-15. 
Martin:  Lehrbuch  der  Anatomic  der  Haustiere. 
Hamilton  :  Text-book  of  Pathology,  vol.  i,  p.  9- 
Wadsworth  :    Post-mortem  Examinations. 


INDEX 


Abdomen  of  dog,  144 

summary  of  technic  of  horst 

103 
technic  of  horse,  70 

of    ruminants,    125 
of  swine,   137 
Adrenals  of  dog,  146 

descriptive  table  of,  201 
of  horse,  left,  91 

right,  94 
of  ruminants,  130 
technic  of,  200 
Algor  mortis,  45 
Autopsy,  1 

authority   for,   5 
complete,  1 
date  of,  5 
dress  for,  7 
incomplete,   2 
light  for,  5 
notes  on,   10 
object,  2 
place  for,  6 
position  of  cat,  142 
of  dog,    142 
of  horse,   52 
of  ruminants,   117 
of  swine,  135 
room,   18 
table,  18 
time  for,  5 
witnesses  of,  7 


Back  of  dog,  147 

of  horse,  5(3 

of  ruminants,  117 

of  swine,  135 
Basin,  20 
Bile-duct  of  dog,  145 

of  horse,  90 

of  ruminants,   129 

of  swine,  139 
Blood-vessels  of  horse,  101 

of  ruminants,  132 
Bones,  114 

summary  of  technic,  115 

technic  of,  114 
Brain,  absolute  weight,  209 

of  dog,   148 

descriptive  table,  209 

extirpation  of,  horse,  63 

relation  to  body  weight,  209 
to   cord   weight,   209 

of  ruminants,  123 

technic    of,    209 
Bronchi,  technic  of,   l67 

Cadaver,  cooling  of,  45 

description  of,  7 

external  examination  of,  45 
Cadaveric  lividity,  46 
Caecum  of  horse,  92 
Chisel,   Championniere's  bone,  27 

cross,  29 

Esmarch's  bone,  27 

McEwen's,   27 

side,  30 

2*^7 


228 


INDEX 


Clinical  history,  6 

Costotomes,  35 

Cowper's   glands,  technic  of,   208 

Death,  the  eye  after,  46 

signs  of,  45 
Decapitation  of  horse,  62 

of  ruminants,  122 
Decomposition,  post-mortem,  48 
Description  of  cadaver,  7 
Desk,  20 

Destruction   of   animal,   7 
Double  colon  of  horse,  92 

technic    of,    1 84 
Duodenum  of  horse,  91 

of  swine,  139 

Ear  of  horse,  68 

of   ruminants,    125 

technic  of,  213 
Enterotome,    37 

Epiploic   foramen   of  horse,  90 
External  examination,  45 
Extremities,  50 
Eye  of  horse,  68 

after   death,   46 

of    ruminants,    125 

technic  of,  211 

Foot,  summary  of  technic,  113 

technic  of,  110 
Foramen  of  Winslow  of  horse,  90 
Forceps,  37 

bone-cutting,  35 

bone-holding,  39 

dura,  39 

haemostatic,   39 

tumor,  39 


Frog,  112 

Front  leg   of  horse,  70 
of  ruminants,  125 

Gall-bladder  of  ruminants,  131 
Glass,  magnifying,  44 
Gouge,  Esmarch's  bone,  28 
Guttural  pouches  of  horse,  59 

Hands,  care  of,  9 
Head  of  dog,  147 

of  horse,  56 

of  ruminants,  117 

of  swine,  135 
Heart,  descriptive  table,   176 

of  dog,  147 

of  horse,  99 

of  ruminants,  131 

of  swine,  140 

technic  of,   170 
Hind  leg  of  horse,  71 

of  ruminants,  125 
Hook,  rib,  32 

steel  hammer,  31 

Tyrrell's  blunt  and  sharp,  25 
Hypostasis,  46 

Ileo-caecal  valve  of  swine,  139 
Incision,  lateral  thoracic,  of  dog, 
147 
lateral  thoracic,  of  swine,  137 
pubic-lumbar,  of  horse,  76 
xiphoid-lumbar,   of   dog,    144 

of  swine,   137 
xiphoid-pubic,  of  dog,  144 
of  horse,  72 
of  ruminants,    126 
of  swine,  137 


INDEX 


Instrument  case,   20 

table,   20 
Instruments,  care  of,  9 

post-mortem,  22 
Internal  examination  of  cat,  142 
of  dog,   142 
of  elephant,  159 
of  fowl,  155 
of  guinea  pig,  153 
of  horse,  52 
of  mouse,    152 
of  rabbit,  154 
of  ruminants,  117 
of  swine,  135 
Intestines  of  dog,  144 

descriptive  table,  of  dog,  192 
of  horse,  186 
of  ruminants,  189 
of  swine,  191 
ligation  of,  in  horse,  88 
of  ruminants,    128 
small,  of  horse,  88 
of    swine,    137 
technic  of  dog,  144 
of  horse,  184 
of  ruminants.  188 
of  swine,  188 

Joints,   115 

carpal,  111 

coxofemoral,  of  dog,   143 
phalangeal,  1 1 3 
scapulohumeral.  111 
stifle.    111 

summarj^   of  technic,    115 
technic  of,  114 
tihiotarsal.    111 


Jugular  furrow,  121 
structures,    121 
of  horse,  56 

Kidney,  left,  of  horse,  90 

right,  of  horse,  94 

descriptive  table  of,  199 

of  dog,   146 

of  ruminants,  130 

of  swine,  140 

technic  of,  197 
Knife,  butcher,  23 

incising,  24 

Little's  case,  24 

Monosmith's    enucleation,    24 

Virchow's  brain,  24 
cartilage.  22 
post-mortem,  22 

Larynx   of  dog,    148 

of  horse,  59 

of  ruminants,  122 

technic  of,  l66 
Leg,  technic  of,  110 
Ligation  of  intestines  of  horse,  88 

of  ruminants,  128 
Liver,  descriptive  table  of,  194 

of  dog,   146 

of  horse,  95 

of  ruminants,  131 

of  swine,  139 

technic  of,  193 
Lungs  of  dog,  147 

of  horse,  99 

of  ruminants,  131 

of  swine,  140 

technic  of,  l67 


230 


INDEX 


Lymph-glands,  atlantal,  121 
anterior   cervical,    121 
axillary.   111 
bronchial,  167 
deep   inguinal,    \34< 
external  iliac,  134 
of  horse,  102 
intercostal,   132 
internal   iliac,    132 
lumbar,  132 
mediastinal,  l67 
middle  cervical,  121 
popliteal.    111 
posterior  cervical,  122 
prepectoral,   122 
retropharyngeal,    121 
sternal,  132 
submaxillary,   119 
subparotid,  117 
superficial  inguinal,   134 
supramammary,  1 34 

Mail,  diseased  tissues  in,  1 3 
Mallet,  rawhide,  33 

wood,  32 
Mammary  gland  of  dog,  144 

of  mare,   108 

of  ruminants,  126 
Mandible  of  horse,  57 

of  ruminants,  120 
Meninges,  technic  of,  209 
^lortopsy,  1 

Mucous  membranes,  visible,  49 
Muscles,   110 

psoas,   of  horse,    102 

summary  of  technic,  115 

technic  of,   114 


Musculature,  114 
Myelotome,  Pick's,  24 

Nasal  passages  of  dog,   148 

of  horse,  65 

of  ruminants,  125 
Nasal  septum  of  horse,  65 
Natural  openings,  50 
Neck  of  dog,  147 

of  horse,  56 

of  ruminants,  117 

of  swine,   135 
Necropsy,  1 
Necroscopy,  1 
Needle,  harpoon,  25 

post-mortem,  44 

spearhead,  25 
Nerves,  peripheral,  70 

Obduction,  1 
Q^soiDhagus  of  dog,  148 

of  horse,  59 

of  ruminants,  122 

technic  of,  l67 
Omentum  of  dog,   144 

of  horse,  86 

of  ruminants,  128 
Organs,  description  of,  l6l 

technic  of,   l6l 
Os  innominatum,  114 
Ovaries,  descriptive  table  of,  204 

of  mare,  103 

technic  of,  200 

Pancreas,  descriptive  table  of,  196 
of  dog,  146 
of  horse,  95 


INDEX 


231 


Pancreas  of  ruminants,  131 

technic  of,  195 
Parathyroid  glands,  technic  of,  l67 
Pelvic  organs  of  horse,  109 
Pelvis  of  dog,  1 16 

of  ruminants,  131 

summary  technic  of  horse,  110 

of  swine,  110 

technic  of  horse,  108 
Penis  of  dog,  1 16 

of  horse,  108 

of  ruminants,  126 

technic  of,  208 
Pericardial  fluid  of  horse,  95 

measurement  of,   l69 

of  ruminants,  131 

sac   of   horse,    95 

of   ruminants,    131 
technic  of,   l69 
Peritoneum  of  horse,   102 

of  ruminants,  132 
Pinchers,   33 
Pipettes,   ^-i 
Pith,  25 
Phalanges,   115 
Pleura  of  horse,  102 

of  ruminants,  132 
Post,  1 

Postmorten^,  1 
Post-mortem  ax,  31 

cosmetic,  1 

decomposition,  48 

medicolegal,  1 

protocol,    214 

report,   214 
Prostate  glands,  technic  of,  208 


Rachiotome,  Brunnetti's,  30 

Dexler's,   30 
Raspatory,  25 
Refuse  cans,  21 
Regulations,  express  company's,  12 

mailing  and  parcel  post,  12 
Ribs,  115 

of  horse,  82 

of  ruminants,  127 
Rigor  mortis,  47 
Rule,  44 

Salivary   glands,  parotid,  of  cow, 
117 
of  horse,   57 
submaxillary,  of  cow,  119 
of  horse,   57 
Saw,  41 

Charriere's,  42 

Kelly's  skull,  43 

Langenbeck's  blade,  42 

large  blade,  41 

rachiotomy,  43 

small  frame,  42 
Scale,  21 

Scalpel,  dissecting,  24 
Scissors,  artery,  37 

small,   37 
Sclerostomum  bidentatum,  93 
Sectioanatomica,  1 
Sectiocadavcris,  1 
Section,  1 

Seminal  vesicles,   technic   of,    208 
Shears,  cartilage,  37 
Shelves,   20 
Signa  mortis,  45 
Single  colon  of  horse,  86 


232 


INDEX 


Sinuses  of  horse,  65 
Skin,  51 

of  cat,  142 

of  dog,  142 

of  horse,  54 

of  ruminants,  117 
Specimens,  anthrax,  15 

blackleg,  16 

bacterial  dysentery,  17 

blood,    1 5 

feces,   15 

glanders,  17 

hemorrhagic  septicemia,  16 

hog  cholera,  16 

infectious  abortion,  17 

malignant  edema,  16 

milk,   14 

packing,  1 1 

parasites,  15 

poultry,  17 

pus,  14 

rabies,  17 

shipping  of,  1 1 

of  small  animals,  17 

swine  erysipelas,  16 

swine  plague,  l6 

tetanus,  l6 

tuberculosis,   1 6 

urine,  14 
Spinal  cord  of  dog,  148 
of  horse,  68 
technic  of,  212 
Spleen,    descriptive   table   of,    179 

of  dog,  146 

of  horse,  90 

measurement  of,  177 

of  ruminants,  130 


Spleen  of  swine,  139 

technic  of,  177 
Sole,  112 

Steel,  butcher's,  25 
Sterilizer,  21 
Sternum  of  dog,   147 
Stomach,  descriptive  table  of,  182 

of   dog,    146 

of  horse,   94 

of  ruminants,  130 

of  swine,  139 

technic  of,  180 

Teeth  of  horse,  68 

Tendons,  111 

Testicles,  descriptive  table  of,  209 

technic  of,  208 
Thorax  of  dog,  147 

summary,    technic    of    horse, 
103 

technic  of  horse,  80 

puncture  of,   80 

of  ruminants,  125 

of  swine,  137 

vacuity  of,  in  horse,  80 
Thyroid  glands  of  dog,  147 
of  horse,   56 
of  ruminants,  117 
technic   of,    l67 
Tongue  of  dog,  148 

of  horse,  59 

of  ruminants,  122 

technic  of,  166 
Tonsils  of  dog,  148 

of  ruminants,  121 

technic  of,  l66 


INDEX 


233 


Trachea  of  dog,  148 

of  horse,  59 

of  ruminants,  122 

technic  of,   l66 
Tub,  20 

Udder,  technic  of,  20i 
Urinary  bladder,  technic  of,  208 
Uterus,   descriptive   table   of,   203 

of  mare,   103 

technic  of,  200 


Vacuit}'    of    thorax    of   ruminants, 

127 
Vagina,  technic  of,  200 
Valves,  aortic  semilunar,  175 

bicuspid,  171 

h_vdrostatic  tests  of,  177 

pulmonary  semilunar,  173 

tricuspid,    171 
Vise,  21 

Wall,  113 

Weather  during  autopsy,  5 


1  1  2000 

2  5  2000 

FEB  2  3  ZOOt 


